Edition du :

Issue Dated : 18/04/2023

AS 355 NP
SITUATION DES REVISIONS DU MANUEL DE VOL
FLIGHT MANUAL REVISIONS STATUS
CERTIFICATION TC
TC CERTIFICATION

Ce manuel doit contenir la révision normale This manual must contain the normal revision
(RN) et les révisions rapides (RR) référencées (RN) and rush revisions (RR) listed under the
dans l'édition (EDIT) considérée. relevant issue (EDIT).

PARTIE REGLEMENTAIRE PARTIE REGLEMENTAIRE

PRESCRIBED SECTION PRESCRIBED SECTION
Volume 1 Volume 1
SECT. . . SECT. . .
/ EDIT . / EDIT .
SUP. . DATE SUP. . DATE
0 => 5.1 RN5 21-09 R SUP.56 RN0 15-18

SUP.0 RN0 15-18 APP.1.0 RN0 19-45

SUP.1 RN0 15-18

PARTIE COMPLEMENTAIRE
SUP.2 RN0 15-18
COMPLEMENTARY SECTION
SUP.4 RN0 15-18 Volume 2
SUP.6 RN1 17-38 SECT. EDIT DATE
0, 5.2, 6, 7, 8, 9 RN2 18-43
SUP.7 RN0 15-18

SUP.10 RN0 15-18

SUP.11 RN1 17-24

SUP.14 RN0 15-18

SUP.16 RN0 15-18

SUP.17 RN0 15-18

SUP.18 RN1 16-27

SUP.19.1 RN1 16-27

RR2a 20-28

SUP.21 RN1 17-23

SUP.22 RN0 15-18

SUP.23 RN0 15-18

SUP.26 RN0 15-18

SUP.52 RN0 15-18

SUP.55.2 RN0 15-18

Page 1 / 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

FLIGHT MANUAL

AS 355 NP
EASA TYPE CERTIFICATE No.R.146

REGISTRATION No. SERIAL No.

APPROVED BY:
European Aviation Safety Agency

BY:
EASA approval No. R.C.02426

DATE: on June 05, 2007

THE EFFECTIVITY OF THIS MANUAL AT THE LATEST REVISION IS SPECIFIED

ON THE LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES.

IT IS THE OPERATOR’S RESPONSIBILITY TO MAINTAIN THIS MANUAL IN A

CURRENT STATUS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES.

THIS HANDOOK INCLUDES THE MATERIAL TO BE FURNISHED TO THE PILOT AS

REQUIRED BY FAR-27 AND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE
MANUFACTURER AND HAS BEEN APPROVED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE EASA
CERTIFICATION PROCEDURES.
THE EASA FLIGHT MANUAL CONSISTS OF ALL UNCODED AND CODED A
PAGES MARKED “APPROVED”.

Airbus Helicopters D i r e c t i o n T e c h n i q u e S u p p o r t
Aéroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France

APPROVED 355 NP 0.0.P1

A 15-18 Page 1
 REVISION TO AIRCRAFT PUBLICATION : AS 355 NP
PUBLICATION CONCERNED : FLIGHT MANUAL Volume 1
CUSTOMIZATION AIRCRAFT :
PMVR REVISION No. : 5 DATE CODE: 21-09 CERTIFICATION CODE: A

- The outline of the revision is given below :

. Sections or supplements affected (added or modified),
. Major points of the revision.
- Check that pages in each section are those specified in the list of effective pages.
- Withdraw old and insert new pages affected by this revision.
- Return the acknowledgement card.
- This list of amended pages may be filed (apart from the manual).

THE CONTENT OF THE FLIGHT MANUAL REVISION

MUST BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF FLIGHT CREWS.

DELETED PAGES INSERTED PAGES

Section, DATE Section, DATE
PAGES PAGES
SUP or APP CODE SUP or APP CODE
SRD EASA - 1 09/06/2021 - 1 18/04/2023

SRD FAA - 1 20/12/2021 - 1 18/04/2023

SRD TC - 1 20/12/2021 - 1 18/04/2023

SRD FATA - 1 31/01/2022 - 1 18/04/2023

SRD ANAC - 1 09/11/2021 - 1 18/04/2023

0.0.P5 1 to 4 20-41 0.0.P5 1 to 4 21-09
2.3 1 to 4 15-18 2.3 1 to 4 21-09
2.5 1 to 2 18-44 2.5 1 to 2 21-09
NORMAL
2.6 1 to 7 17-38 2.6 1 to 7 21-09
REVISION
3.3 1 to 2 15-18 3.3 1 to 2 21-09
3.5 1 to 5 15-18 3.5 1 to 5 21-09
4.3 1 to 5 18-44 4.3 1 to 5 21-09

355 NP UPDATE GUIDE

April 2023 Page 1 / 2
 SECTION or
DESCRIPTION OF THE REVISION §
SUPPLEMENT
Update of list of approved effective pages and the log of approved normal
0.0.P5 -
revisions
Minor correction of NOTE 2.3 1.2

Engine starter/generator: New ventilation parameters 2.5 5

Minor correction for oil placard : "MGB" instead of "TGB" 2.6 5

- Deletion of first sentence and wording improvement of the WARNING
3.3 2
- Creation of NOTE with the first sentence at the end of paragraph
Modification of paragraph 2: Addition of a new VEMD message:
3.5 2
FLI VALID
Modification of NOTE: Deletion of the engine crank reference 4.3 2
Harmonization of values: "Pressed in for 30 sec." instead of "..... 20 sec".
4.3 3
and addition of NOTE (Alignment with section 2.5 §5)

355 NP UPDATE GUIDE

April 2023 Page 2 / 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

FLIGHT MANUAL APPENDIX

AS 355 NP
TC TYPE CERTIFICATION No. H.87

The Rotorcraft Flight Manual (RFM) approved for TC registered aircraft consists of the
EASA approved RFM supplemented by the present Appendix.

Sections 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.1, and APP.1.0 of this RFM as well as applicable Supplements

constitute the approved RFM. For TC registered aircraft, compliance with Section 2 and
this Appendix is mandatory.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR TC REGISTERED AIRCRAFT

IMPORTANT NOTE

The effectivity of the Appendix at the latest revision is specified on the list of
effective pages.

THIS APPENDIX MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE EASA FLIGHT MANUAL FOR TC

REGISTERED AIRCRAFT.

Airbus Helicopters D i r e c t i o n T e c h n i q u e S u p p o r t
Aéroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France

APPROVED 355 NP APP.1.0.P1

C 19-45 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF SUPPLEMENTS
Some supplements covering installations or procedures not used on this helicopter may
be withdrawn from this manual. The complete list of supplements appears on this page.

EASA APPROVED SUPPLEMENTS ACCEPTED BY TC

No. DESCRIPTION STATUS

LIST OF SUPPLEMENTS - INCOMPATIBILITY OF
UTILIZATION -
EFFECT ON PERFORMANCE DATA
0 Accepted
NOTE
The EASA approved list of Supplement (SUP.0.P2) is
replaced by the following list for TC registered aircraft.
EQUIVALENT "CATEGORY A" OEI PROCEDURES AND
1 Accepted
PERFORMANCES
2 IFR FLIGHT Accepted
3 RESERVED
4 INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPERATIONS IN COLD WEATHER Accepted
5 RESERVED
ENGINE FAILURE TRAINING PROCEDURES (TRAINING
6 Accepted
MODE)
7 FADEC FAILURE TRAINING PROCEDURE Accepted
8 to 9 RESERVED
10 SKIS INSTALLATION "SURFAIR" Accepted
EXTERNAL LOAD TRANSPORT "CARGO SWING" 1134 kg Accepted
11
(2500 lb) WITH "ON-BOARD" RELEASE UNIT (*)
12 to 13 RESERVED
14 SAND FILTERS Accepted
15 RESERVED
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
16 Accepted
SFIM 85 T 31 (3-AXIS) WITH OPTIONAL COUPLER
17 EMERGENCY FLOATATION GEAR AERAZUR Accepted
18 "AIR EQUIPMENT 76 370" ELECTRICAL HOIST 136 kg (300 lb) Accepted
19 RESERVED
19.1 ELECTRICAL HOIST "BREEZE" 204 kg (450 lb) Accepted
20 RESERVED
21 TWO-PASSENGER FRONT SEAT Accepted
22 LONG AND SHORT "DART" FOOTSTEPS Accepted

(*) Accepted with modifications stated in the present Appendix.

APPROVED 355 NP APP.1.0.P2

C 19-45 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF SUPPLEMENTS (CONT'D)

EASA APPROVED SUPPLEMENTS ACCEPTED BY TC

No. DESCRIPTION STATUS

23 FREON AIR CONDITIONER Accepted
24 to 25 RESERVED
SPECTROLAB SEARCHLIGHT
26 Accepted
355 A 08 5129
27 to 51 RESERVED
52 CAMERA CARRYING INSTALLATION Accepted
53 to
RESERVED
55.1
55.2 GPS "GARMIN GNS 430/430 W" Accepted
56 ABSEILING INSTALLATION Accepted

APPROVED 355 NP APP.1.0.P2

C 19-45 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - TC CERTIFICATION

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
 Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
 C .................................. Specific to TC registered aircraft.
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
 Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
 XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

APPENDIX PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)

APP.1.0.P1 1 to 1 19-45 C

APP.1.0.P2 1 to 2 19-45 C

APP.1.0.P5 1 to 2 19-45 C

APP.1.0 1 to 2 19-45 C

APPROVED 355 NP APP.1.0.P5

C 19-45 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) - TC

EASA approval No.

NORMAL REVISION 0 - date code 19-45 PPIL/pkon/CT.3/PN-0060071949
on March 9, 2020.
Title Creation of the Appendix APP.1.0
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP APP.1.0.P5

C 19-45 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1 GENERAL
The information issued in the present Appendix is applicable for TC registered aircraft. It
supplements or supersedes the approved information given in the basic EASA Flight
Manual and in the EASA Supplements used.

2 LIMITATIONS
The limitations specified in the basic EASA Flight Manual and in the EASA Supplements
used remain applicable.

3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
The emergency procedures specified in the basic EASA Flight Manual and in the EASA
Supplements used remain applicable.

4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
The normal procedures specified in the basic EASA Flight Manual and in the EASA
Supplements used remain applicable.

5.1 REGULATORY PERFORMANCE DATA

The regulatory performance data specified in the basic EASA Flight Manual and in
the EASA Supplements used remain applicable.

APPROVED 355 NP APP.1.0

C 19-45 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SUPPLEMENTS
The paragraphs hereafter of the Flight Manual Supplement are modified by the following:

SUPPLEMENT: SUP.11
TRANSPORT OF EXTERNAL LOADS

The paragraph 1 of the Flight Manual Supplement is supplemented by the following text:

The Cargo Hook System meets the external load type certification regulations for
Non Human External Cargo (NHEC).
Specific operations with an external load that remains in contact with land, water or
any fixed structure have not been demonstrated by the manufacturer and it is the
Operator’s responsibility to develop procedures (in accordance with local operating
requirements, when applicable) to ensure such operations can be safely conducted

The paragraph 2.4 of the Flight Manual Supplement is replaced by the following:

2.4 TYPE OF OPERATION

The cargo hook system meets the external load certification regulations for Non
Human External Cargo (NHEC).
Flight with an empty net or unballasted sling as an external load is prohibited unless
approved operational limits and procedures provided by the operator allow for such
an operation.

Two placards visible to the ground operator and located on the lower fairing near to
the hook indicate:

- The maximum sling load,

- The cargo hook rigging.

Figure 1: Cargo hook rigging placard

APPROVED 355 NP APP.1.0

C 19-45 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

MAIN TABLE OF CONTENTS

APPROVED 355 NP 0.0.P2

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

COMPOSITION
OF APPROVED CONDITIONAL REVISIONS (RC)

This Manual assigned to the helicopter mentioned on the title page contains the following
pink pages except those cancelled when the conditions are complied with.

CAUTION

The reader will have to insert the pink pages incorporating the paragraph(s) affected
by the conditional revision so as the paragraph(s) cover(s) the paragraph(s) of the
standard version or of the variant of standard definition.
(1) Paragraph Revision Code:
• R ............................ Revised, to be replaced.
• N ............................ New, to be inserted.
RC SECTION DATE Number Applicable before condition
PARAGRAPH (1)
No. or SUP. CODE of pages is met:
0.0.P3 *RC* 15-18 1
Modification 07-4622 (Yaw
RCa 4.3 4 15-18 1 servo test lighting modification
on dual hydraulic H/C)

APPROVED 355 NP 0.0.P3

15-18 Page 1
*RC*
 FLIGHT MANUAL

COMPOSITION
OF (APPROVED OR NON APPROVED)
CONDITIONAL REVISIONS (RC)

This Manual assigned to the helicopter mentioned on the title page contains the following
pink pages except those cancelled when the conditions are complied with.

CAUTION

The reader will have to insert the pink pages incorporating the paragraph(s) affected
by the conditional revision so as the paragraph(s) cover(s) the paragraph(s) of the
standard version or of the variant of standard definition.
(1) Paragraph Revision Code:
• R ............................ Revised, to be replaced.
• N ............................ New, to be inserted.
RC SECTION DATE Number Applicable before condition
PARAGRAPH (1)
No. or SUP. CODE of pages is met:

APPROVED 355 NP 0.0.P3

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

COMPOSITION
OF (APPROVED OR NON APPROVED)
RUSH REVISIONS (RR)

The Manual contains the following additional yellow page(s):

CAUTION

The reader will have to insert the yellow pages incorporating the paragraph(s)
affected by the rush revision opposite the existing paragraph(s) of the standard
version or of the variant of standard definition.
(1) Paragraph Revision Code:
• R ............................ Revised, to be replaced.
• N ............................ New, to be inserted.

DATE Number
RR No. SECTION or SUP. PARAGRAPH (1)
CODE of pages

APPROVED 355 NP 0.0.P4

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - EASA CERTIFICATION

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• A .................................. Specific to EASA
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

SECTION PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)

0.0.P1 1 to 1 15-18 A
0.0.P2 1 to 1 15-18
0.0.P3 1 to 1 15-18
0.0.P4 1 to 1 15-18
0.0.P5 1 to 4 21-09 A
1.0.P6 1 to 1 15-18
1.1 1 to 2 15-18
1.2 1 to 2 15-18
1.3 1 to 4 15-18
1.4 1 to 1 15-18
2.0.P6 1 to 2 18-44
2.1 1 to 2 16-20
2.2 1 to 1 15-18
2.3 1 to 4 21-09
2.4 1 to 9 20-41
2.5 1 to 2 21-09
2.6 1 to 7 21-09
3.0.P6 1 to 2 20-41
3.1 1 to 3 15-18
3.2 1 to 6 15-18
3.3 1 to 2 21-09
3.4 1 to 2 20-41
3.5 1 to 5 21-09
3.6 1 to 19 20-41
3.7 1 to 3 15-18
4.0.P6 1 to 2 15-18
4.1 1 to 2 15-18
4.2 1 to 4 15-18
4.3 1 to 5 21-09
4.4 1 to 2 15-18

APPROVED 355 NP 0.0.P5

A 21-09 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - EASA CERTIFICATION

SECTION PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)

4.5 1 to 2 15-18
4.6 1 to 2 17-38
4.7 1 to 2 15-18
4.8 1 to 1 15-18
5.1.P6 1 to 1 15-18
5.1 1 to 19 15-18

APPROVED 355 NP 0.0.P5

A 21-09 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) - EASA

ISSUE 1: NR 0 to NR 6:
Approved on November 5th, 2014 under
NORMAL REVISION 6 - SEPTEMBER 2014
the authority of EASA D.O.A. o.21J.056

ISSUE 2:
Approved on January 12, 2016 under
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 15-18
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J056
Title New issue
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information
EASA Approval No. 10063035
NORMAL REVISION 1 date code 16-20
on September 01, 2017
Add sentence for "Ice and snow conditions" and add a sentence for
Title operation of OAT and MET reference card to measure the MGB and
TGB oil temperature
Revised
Sections 2.1 and 2.4
information
Deleted
None
information
Approved on March 20, 2018 under
NORMAL REVISION 2 date code 17-38
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J700
Title Update of the yaw load compensator check and minor corrections
Revised Sections: 0.0.P5 pages 1, 2 and 3, 2.6 page 5, 4.3 pages 5, 6 and, 4.6
information page 2.
Deleted
0.0.P3 *RC*, 4.3 page *RC*
information
Approved on October 23, 2020 under
NORMAL REVISION 3 date code 18-44
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J700
Addition of an "Engine Starter/Generator" paragraph in the limitations
Title
section et a NOTE IN SECTION 4.3.
Revised Sections: 0.0.P5 pages 1 to 3, 2.0P6 page 2, 2.5 pages 1 and 2, 4.3
information page 3.
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP 0.0.P5

A 21-09 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) - EASA
EASA Approval No. 10076622
NORMAL REVISION 4 date code 20-41
on June 08, 2021
Update of approved engine lubricants, addition of post extinguisher use
Title procedure, improvement of "FIRE" procedure, value correction of oil
pressure for "ENG P" procedure
Revised Sections: 0.0.P5 pages 1 to 4, 2.4 page 4, 3.4 pages 1 and 2,
information 3.6 pages 1, 2,3 and 9.
Deleted
None
information
Approved on March 29, 2023 under
NORMAL REVISION 5 date code 21-09
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J700
- Modification of "Engine starter generator", "Tail rotor control failure",
Title "VEMD failures and caution message" and "Cranking" procedures.
-Minor corrections
Revised Sections: 0.0.P5 pages 1 to 4, 2.3 page 1, 2.5 page 2, 2.6 page 6,
information 3.3 page 2, 3.5 page 2, 4.3 page 4.
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP 0.0.P5

A 21-09 Page 4
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF COMPLEMENTARY RFM EFFECTIVE PAGES

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• Indicated ........................ Specific to indicated civilian airworthiness.
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

SECTION PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)

0.0.P5 1 to 3 18-43
0.0 1 to 1 15-18
5.2.P6 1 to 1 15-18
5.2 1 to 18 15-18
6.0.P6 1 to 1 15-18
6.1 1 to 2 15-18
6.2 1 to 7 15-18
6.3 1 to 3 15-18
6.4 1 to 3 15-18
6.5 1 to 4 17-38
7.0.P6 1 to 3 15-18
7.1 1 to 3 15-18
7.2 1 to 3 17-38
7.3 1 to 3 15-18
7.4 1 to 8 15-18
7.5 1 to 3 15-18
7.6 1 to 3 15-18
7.7 1 to 9 15-18
7.8 1 to 2 15-18
7.9 1 to 4 15-18
7.10 1 to 4 17-38
7.11 1 to 15 15-18
7.12 1 to 1 15-18
7.13 1 to 2 15-18
7.14 1 to 1 15-18
7.15 1 to 4 15-18
8.0.P6 1 to 1 15-18
8.1 1 to 2 15-18

355 NP 0.0.P5
18-43 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF COMPLEMENTARY RFM EFFECTIVE PAGES

8.2 1 to 4 15-18
8.3 1 to 22 18-43
9.0.P6 1 to 3 17-38
9.1 1 to 4 18-43
9.3 1 to 3 17-38
9.7 1 to 3 15-18
9.8 1 to 1 15-18
9.10 1 to 2 15-18
9.11 1 to 1 15-18
9.12 1 to 2 15-18
9.13 1 to 2 15-18
9.14 1 to 3 15-18
9.16 1 to 1 15-18
9.18 1 to 1 15-18
9.20 1 to 4 15-18
9.21 1 to 2 15-18

355 NP 0.0.P5
18-43 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF COMPLEMENTARY RFM NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2)

NORMAL REVISION 0 - date code 15-18

Title New issue

Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information
NORMAL REVISION 1 - date code 17-38
Integration of ELT KANNAD INTEGRA AP-H (MOD 07-4639), minor
Title
corrections and addition of indication of the "HYD2" light flashes
Revised 0.0.P5 pages 1 to 3, 6.5 pages 2 and 4, 7.2 page 1, 7.10 page 4, 8.3
information page 7, 9.0.P6 pages 1 to 3, 9.3 pages 1 to 3.
Deleted
None
information
NORMAL REVISION 2 - date code 18-43
Modification of TEST SHEETS 1A (suppression of "ENG FAIL# not
displayed" result) and 6B (harmonization of OEI MAX rating FLI) in
Title
section 8.3.
Modification of sling condition in section 9.1.
Revised
0.0.P5 pages 1 to 3, 8.3 pages 4 and 17, 9.1 page 1.
information
Deleted
Modification of sling condition in section 9.1.
information

355 NP 0.0.P5
18-43 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF MODIFICATIONS OR SERVICE BULLETINS

MENTIONED IN THE FLIGHT MANUAL

This list includes all modifications or service bulletins that are or have been referenced in
the flight manual.

MODIFICATION DESCRIPTION Embodiment of

/ MOD / SB
SB
Yes No

MOD 07-4622 Yaw servo test lighting modification on dual

hydraulic H/C.

355 NP 0.0
15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 1
GENERAL
CONTENTS

PAGE
1.1 PRELIMINARY NOTES
1 GENERAL .................................................................................................... 1
2 DESCRIPTION OF THE MANUAL .............................................................. 1

1.2 UPDATING
1 GENERAL .................................................................................................... 1
2 REVISIONS ................................................................................................. 1

1.3 SYMBOLS AND CONVERSION FACTORS

1 SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................. 1
2 CONVERSION FACTORS ........................................................................... 4

1.4 TERMINOLOGY
1 GENERAL .................................................................................................... 1
2 USE OF PROCEDURAL WORDS ............................................................... 1

APPROVED 355 NP 1.0.P6

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 1.1
PRELIMINARY NOTES

1 GENERAL
To achieve the required degree of safety, this manual must be used in conjunction with
the relevant regulations covering aircraft operation, such as aerial navigation laws in the
operator's country.
It is essential for the crew to become familiar with the contents of this manual,
particularly with the information specific to customized configurations, and to check all
revisions and related requirement.

2 DESCRIPTION OF MANUAL
This manual contains legally approved information, together with additional
manufacturer's information not subject to approval.
- The approved information is contained in PART 1 "FLIGHT MANUAL", in SECTIONS
1, 2, 3, 4, 5.1, in the SUPPLEMENTS and the Appendix.
- The information not subject to Approval is contained in PART 2 "COMPLEMENTARY
FLIGHT MANUAL", as a complement to PART 1. This information is covered by
SECTIONS 5.2, 6, 7, 8, and 9.
Each PART, each Supplement and each Appendix of the Manual make up a whole
and, for this reason, incorporate its own list of effective pages and are revised
separately.
The list of effective pages (P5) identifies all the pages which compose the manual.
The total number of P5 pages is shown on the List of Effective Pages, identified 1/xy
where xy is a number between 01 and 99 corresponding to the number of P5 pages.

2.1 BASIC AIRCRAFT

The basic helicopter specifications are covered by SECTIONS 1 through 9.

2.2 SPECIAL SYSTEMS AND PROCEDURES

Information concerning optional equipment systems and operational procedures is
covered by SUPPLEMENTS. These are mini Flight Manuals covering any differences
from the basic aircraft information, SECTION by SECTION. The SUPPLEMENTS are
approved on an individual basis.

APPROVED 355 NP 1.1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2.3 ADAPTATION OF MANUAL TO CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

Specific certification requirements may necessitate modifications to the text or layout
of certain pages.
Therefore, a specific Flight Manual (PART 1) is drawn up for each certification.
Each Flight Manual includes its own particular title page; the alphabetical code,
corresponding to the relevant certification, appears in the lower left-hand corner of
each page of the approved PART 1.

APPROVED 355 NP 1.1

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 1.2
UPDATING

1 GENERAL
This Manual is updated periodically through Rush Revisions (RR) or Normal Revisions
(RN).

2 REVISIONS
The Manufacturer makes every effort to keep this Manual updated by revisions to
complete the user's information and capabilities. Each revision is accompanied by
instructions summarizing the major points affected by the change and advising the
person responsible for incorporating the revised pages in the Manual. (The instruction
sheet can be filed separately from the Manual).
The user is responsible for ensuring proper updating of the Manual complying with the
List of Pages given at the beginning of PART 1, PART 2 and of each supplement, since
each of the these PARTS or Supplements is revised separately.
The composition must be checked by number of page and by the date code. The date
code is composed of the last two digits of the year, followed by the number of the week
in that year.

2.1 NORMAL REVISIONS (RN) PRINTED ON WHITE PAPER

Normal revisions fully or partially update the Manual. The pages may be new pages
or may supersede the existing pages.
They are printed on white paper.
The Manual effectivity is specified on the new list of approved effective pages
(0.0.P5, SUP.0.P5 and/or APP.X.X.P5).
Normal revisions are identified in numerical order.

2.2 RUSH REVISIONS (RR) PRINTED ON YELLOW PAPER

Rush revisions partially update a few major points in the Manual.
The new information is given on a page which must face the former text to be
modified or completed.
The Rush Revision is printed on yellow paper.
No white page is deleted.
The revised pages are specified on a separate list (0.0.P4 or SUP.0.P4).

APPROVED 355 NP 1.2

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Rush revisions are identified by the number of the next normal revision and a letter
suffix in normal alphabetical order. Several rush revisions may be issued between
two normal revisions. All rush revisions are cancelled when the normal revision
bearing the same number is issued. If certain rush revision provisions remain after
the subsequent normal revision, they are confirmed by a new rush revision with
another identification code.

2.3 CONDITIONAL REVISIONS (RC) PRINTED ON PINK PAPER

The revised manual issued on white pages, corresponds to the recommended
standard.
For helicopters authorized to fly at an earlier standard, the conditional revision (RC)
retains the previous standard.
The user is responsible for embodiment of the aircraft modification(s) required for
compliance with the recommended standard, after which the pink pages may be
deleted under the user's responsibility.
The pink pages are specified on a separate list (0.0.P3 or SUP.0.P3).

NOTE
These pages are unaffected by normal and rush revisions or by customization.

2.4 THE "ERRATUM" PROCEDURE

In the case of minor errors (typing errors, bad printing) likely to affect the
understanding of the text, the "ERRATUM" procedures are used to make quick
corrections between revisions. In this case, the pages affected by the procedures are
re-issued completely and the date code is underlined for identification. These pages
are summarized on an accompanying sheet which is not identified.

APPROVED 355 NP 1.2

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 1.3
SYMBOLS AND CONVERSION FACTORS

1 SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS

DESIGNATION SYMBOL OR
ABBREVIATION
SPEEDS
Takeoff/ landing decision point speed V1
Best rate of climb speed Vy
Calibrated airspeed CAS
Indicated airspeed IAS
Never exceed speed VNE
Rate of climb ROC
Rate of descent ROD
Takeoff safety speed VTOSS
True airspeed TAS
Rounds per minute rpm
METEOROLOGY
International standard atmosphere ISA
Outside air temperature OAT
Outside air pressure p
Relative air density σ
Wind velocity Vw
ALTITUDE/HEIGHT
Density altitude Hσ
Geometric altitude H
Height h
Height at takeoff/landing decision point h1
Pressure altitude Hp
Radio altimeter height HRA
Above helipad elevation AHE
ENGINE POWER PARAMETERS
Engine generator deviation indication ∆N1
Engine generator speed N1
Engine power check EPC
Engine oil pressure EOP
Engine oil temperature EOT
First limitation indicator FLI
Free turbine speed N2
Maximum continuous power MCP
Maximum takeoff power (5 min) MTOP
Power PWR

APPROVED 355 NP 1.3

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SYMBOL OR
DESIGNATION
ABBREVIATION
ENGINE POWER PARAMETERS (cont’d)
Power turbine outlet temperature TOT
Rotor speed NR
Torque TRQ
HOVER/TAKEOFF/LANDING
Hover in ground effect HIGE
Hover out of ground effect HOGE
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
All-up weight AUW
Center of gravity CG
Empty weight EW
Equipped empty weight EEW
Maximum takeoff weight MTOW
Operating empty weight OEW
Payload P/L
Takeoff gross weight TOGW
Useful load UL
MISCELLANEOUS
Alternating current AC
Ancillary system unit ASU
Automatic direction finder ADF
Automatic flight control system AFCS
Battery contactor BATC
Caution, warning panel CWP
Direct current DC
Electrical master box EMB
Electronic Engine Control Unit EECU
Emergency locator transmitter ELT
Engine ENG
Equivalent ≅
Essential contactor ESSC
External power line contactor EPLC
External power unit EPU
Flight related checks VLV
Full Authority Digital Engine Control FADEC
Fuel Flow Control Lever FFCL
Generator line contactor GLC

APPROVED 355 NP 1.3

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SYMBOL OR
DESIGNATION
ABBREVIATION
MISCELLANEOUS (cont’d)
Global positioning system GPS
Height-velocity HV
High load contactor HLC
Horizontal situation indicator HSI
Intercommunication system ICS
Landing decision point LDP
Left hand side LH
Main bus voltage U bus
Main gear box MGB
Minute min.
Radio magnetic indicator RMI
Right hand side RH
Second sec.
Shed bus contactor SBC
Starting contactor SC
System control unit SCU
Tail gear box TGB
Takeoff decision point TDP
To be confirmed TBC
To be defined TBD
Vertical takeoff and landing VTOL
Vehicle and engine multifunction display VEMD
Weight/altitude/temperature WAT
All engines operative AEO
One engine inoperative OEI

- Symbol used for switches or pushbuttons: .......................... [HORN]

(example)

- Symbol used for VEMD

pushbuttons(example): ........................................................ [SCROLL]

- Symbol used for VEMD indications )

(example) indication indication
ON OFF

APPROVED 355 NP 1.3

15-18 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2 CONVERSION FACTORS
2.1 METRIC UNITS TO OTHER UNITS

Multiply By To obtain
Centimeter (cm) ....................... 0.3937 ............................................Inch (in)
Meter (m) ................................. 3.2808 ............................................ Foot (ft)
Meter per second (m/s) ........... 196.85 ................... Foot per minute (ft/min)
Kilometer (km) ......................... 0.5400 ........................... Nautical mile (Nm)
Liter (l) ..................................... 0.2642 ........................... US gallon (US gal)
Liter (l) ..................................... 0.2200 ........................... UK gallon (UK gal)
Kilogram (kg) ........................... 2.2046 ........................................ Pound (lb)
Bars (bar) ................................ 14.504 ............ Pound per Square Inch (psi)
Kilometer per hour (km/h) ........ 0.5400 ........................................... Knot (kt)
Hecto pascal (hPa) .................. 0.02953 ..................... Inch of Mercury (inHg)
Conversion of degree centigrade (°C) into degree Fahrenheit (°F): °F = (°C x 9/5) + 32

2.2 OTHER UNITS TO METRIC UNITS

Multiply By To obtain
Inch (in) .................................... 2.5400 ............................... Centimeter (cm)
Foot (ft) ..................................... 0.3048 ......................................... Meter (m)
Foot per minute (ft/min) ............ 0.00508 ................... Meter per second (m/s)
Nautical mile (Nm) .................... 1.8520 ................................. Kilometer (km)
US gallon (US gal) .................... 3.7850 ............................................. Liter (l)
UK gallon (UK gal) .................... 4.5460 ............................................. Liter (l)
Pound (lb) ................................. 0.4536 ................................... Kilogram (kg)
Pound per Square Inch (psi)..... 0.0689 .......................................... Bar (bar)
Knot (kt) .................................... 1.8520 ................ Kilometer per hour (km/h)
Inch of Mercury (inHg) .............. 33.864 .......................... Hecto pascal (hPa)
Conversion of degree Fahrenheit (°F) into degree centigrade (°C): °C = 5/9 x (°F – 32)

APPROVED 355 NP 1.3

15-18 Page 4
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 1.4
TERMINOLOGY

1 GENERAL
Unless otherwise specified in the text, altitudes are pressure-altitudes (Hp), speeds are
indicated airspeeds (IAS).
Warnings, Cautions and Notes are used throughout this manual to emphasize important
and critical instructions and are used as follows:

WARNING

AN OPERATING PROCEDURE, PRACTICE, ETC., WHICH, IF NOT CORRECTLY

FOLLOWED, COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR LOSS OF LIFE.

CAUTION

An operating procedure, practice, etc., which, if not strictly observed, could result
in damage to, or destruction of helicopter parts or equipment.

NOTE

An operating procedure, condition, etc., which is essential to highlight.

2 USE OF PROCEDURAL WORDS

The concept of procedural word usage and intended meaning which has been adhered
to in preparing this manual is as follows:

- "Shall" or "must" has been used only when application of a procedure is mandatory.

- "Should" has been used only when application of procedure is recommended.

- "May" and "Need not" have been used only when application of a procedure is
optional.

- "Will" has been used only to indicate future event or action, never to indicate a
mandatory procedure.

APPROVED 355 NP 1.4

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
CONTENTS

PAGE
2.1 GENERAL LIMITATIONS
1 TYPE OF OPERATIONS ............................................................................. 1
2 OCCUPANTS .............................................................................................. 1
3 INSTRUMENT MARKINGS ......................................................................... 2
4 VEMD ANIMATION LOGIC ......................................................................... 2
2.2 WEIGHT AND BALANCE LIMITS
1 WEIGHT LIMITS .......................................................................................... 1
2 LONGITUDINAL CG .................................................................................... 1
3 LATERAL CG............................................................................................... 1
2.3 FLIGHT ENVELOPE LIMITS
1 AIRSPEED LIMITS ...................................................................................... 1
2 ALTITUDE LIMITS ....................................................................................... 4
3 TEMPERATURE LIMITS ............................................................................. 4
4 MANEUVERING LIMITATIONS ................................................................... 4
2.4 VEHICLE LIMITATIONS
1 MAIN ROTOR LIMITATIONS....................................................................... 1
2 ROTOR BRAKE LIMITATIONS ................................................................... 1
3 FIRST LIMITATION INSTRUMENT ............................................................. 2
4 FREE TURBINE LIMITATIONS (N2) ........................................................... 3
5 ENGINE OIL SYSTEM LIMITATIONS ......................................................... 4
6 ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM LIMITATIONS ...................................................... 5
7 GEARBOX SYSTEM LIMITATIONS ............................................................ 7
8 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM LIMITATIONS ......................................................... 8
9 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM LIMITATIONS........................................................ 9

APPROVED 355 NP 2.0.P6

18-44 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LIMITATIONS

1 LANDING AND ROTOR STOPPING LIMITATIONS ON SLOPE ................ 1
2 RUNNING LANDING LIMITATIONS ............................................................ 1
3 BAGGAGE COMPARTMENTS LOAD LIMITATIONS ................................. 1
4 CABIN COMPARTMENT LOAD LIMITATIONS ........................................... 1
5 ENGINE STARTER/GENERATOR .............................................................. 2
6 MANDATORY EQUIPMENT ........................................................................ 2
7 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ............................................................................ 2
2.6 PLACARDS
1 VNE PLACARDS ......................................................................................... 1
2 OPERATING LIMITATION PLACARD ......................................................... 2
3 OTHER PLACARDS DISPLAYED IN THE COCKPIT ................................. 2
4 FLOOR LOADING PLACARDS ................................................................... 4
5 FUEL AND LUBRICANT PLACARDS.......................................................... 5
6 ELECTRICAL PLACARDS .......................................................................... 7

APPROVED 355 NP 2.0.P6

18-44 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 2.1
GENERAL LIMITATIONS

The helicopter is approved on the basis of the FAR part 27 "NORMAL" rotorcraft category.
The helicopter shall be operated in compliance with the limitations of this section.

1 TYPE OF OPERATIONS
The helicopter is approved to operate:
- By day and night in VFR.
NOTE
Additional equipment may be required by operational regulations.

The following are forbidden:

- Aerobatic maneuvers.
- Engine starting when snow or ice accumulations are in or around the engine air
intake.
- Flight in freezing rain or icing conditions.
(visible moisture and temperature conducive to producing ice).
- Intentional single engine flight in normal operation without engine failure except for
maintenance test flight.
- Single engine training except in training mode (refer to SUP.6).

2 OCCUPANTS
- Minimum flight crew ........................................... One pilot in right seat.
- Maximum number of occupants
(including flight crew) ......................................... Six.

APPROVED 355 NP 2.1

16-20 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3 INSTRUMENT MARKINGS
Limitations are marked on instruments with the following color code:

On the VEMD, related numerical value of parameters underlined:

- in yellow when the parameter is in caution or takeoff range,
- in red when at or above safety limit or maximum takeoff power.
Moreover, to enforce safety, red underlining flashes.

4 VEMD ANIMATION LOGIC

When a parameter reaches a limitation, the numerical value appears underscored.
When the parameter reaches the red area, the color ranges are filled.

APPROVED 355 NP 2.1

16-20 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 2.2
WEIGHT AND BALANCE LIMITS

1 WEIGHT LIMITS
- Maximum internal weight for flight,
take-off and landing............................................ : 2600 kg (5732 lb).
- Minimum internal weight for flight,
take-off and landing............................................ : 1800 kg (3568 lb).

2 LONGITUDINAL CG

Figure 1: Longitudinal CG Chart

NOTE
The datum is located 3.40 m (133.8 in) forward of the main rotor head center line.

3 LATERAL CG
- Maximum right CG ............................................. : 0.09 m (3.54 in).

- Maximum left CG ............................................... : 0.09 m (3.54 in).

NOTE
The datum is located in the plane of symmetry of the helicopter.

APPROVED 355 NP 2.2

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 2.3
FLIGHT ENVELOPE LIMITS
1 AIRSPEED LIMITS
1.1 WITH DOORS CLOSED

- When OAT < -35°C, calculated VNE power on must be reduced by

10 kt (18.5 km/h),
- When OAT < -25°C, calculated VNE power off must be reduced by
20 kt (37 km/h), with a minimum of 65 kt (120 km/h).

1.2 WITH DOORS OPEN OR REMOVED

NOTE
Flight with any configuration not shown is prohibited.
In configurations with, at least, one door opened or removed, loose objects
shall not be in the cabin, cushions of unoccupied seats shall be properly
secured or removed and seat belts shall be stowed.

APPROVED 355 NP 2.3

21-09 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Caption code used for open or removed doors limitations:

: door closed : door removed : sliding door closed

: sliding door maneuvering in flight : sliding door open-locked or removed

• Aircraft fitted with four standard doors (LH and RH hand doors)

RH doors
LH doors I II IV
a
VNE VNE 110 kt (204 km/h) or VNE*

b
VNE 110 kt (204 km/h) or VNE* 110 kt (204 km/h) or VNE*

d
100 kt (185 km/h) or VNE* 110 kt (204 km/h) or VNE* 110 kt (204 km/h) or VNE*

(*) lowest value

• Aircraft fitted with LH sliding door (optional) and RH standard doors

RH doors
LH doors I II III IV
e 70 kt (130 km/h) 110 kt (204 km/h)
VNE VNE
or VNE* or VNE*

h 135 kt (250 km/h) 110 kt (204 km/h) 100 kt (185 km/h) 110 kt (204 km/h)
or VNE* or VNE* or VNE* or VNE*

j 100 kt (185 km/h) 110 kt (204 km/h) 100 kt (185 km/h) 110 kt (204 km/h)
or VNE* or VNE* or VNE* or VNE*

f opening : 110 kt
(204 km/h) or VNE*

g
closing : 80 kt FLIGHT PROHIBITED
sliding doorin (148 km/h) or VNE*
(*) lowest value

APPROVED 355 NP 2.3

21-09 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Caption code used for open or removed doors limitations:

: door closed : door removed : sliding door closed

: sliding door maneuvering in flight : sliding door open-locked or removed

• Aircraft fitted with LH standard doors and RH sliding door (optional)

RH doors sliding door m i

V.
LH doors
110 kt (204 km/h) 100 kt (185 km/h) opening : 60 kt (111
VNE km/h)
or VNE* or VNE*
or VNE*
m 110 kt (204 km/h) 110 kt (204 km/h) closing : 60 kt
VNE (111 km/h)
or VNE* or VNE*
or VNE*
o 100 kt (185 km/h) 110 kt (204 km/h) 110 kt (204 km/h)
or VNE*
or VNE* or VNE*
p
FLIGHT PROHIBITED
(*) lowest value

• Aircraft fitted with RH and LH sliding doors (optional)

RH doors ht

LH doors I II V.

110 kt (204 km/h) 100 kt (185 km/h) opening :60 kt

VNE
or VNE* or VNE* (111 km/h) or VNE*

135 kt (250 km/h) 110 kt (204 km/h) 110 kt (204 km/h) closing :60 kt
or VNE* or VNE* or VNE* (111 km/h) or VNE*

x 100 kt (185 km/h) 110 kt (204 km/h) 110 kt (204 km/h)

or VNE* or VNE* or VNE*

opening : 60 kt
(111 km/h) or
VNE*
Closing : 60 kt
FLIGHT PROHIBITED FLIGHT PROHIBITED
(111 km/h) or
VNE*
(*) lowest value

APPROVED 355 NP 2.3

21-09 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2 ALTITUDE LIMITS
- Operating altitude envelope:
Hp = - 1640 ft (- 500 m) to 20000 ft (6096 m).
- Maximum engine starting altitude:
Hp = 16400 ft (5000 m).
NOTE
Engine relighting is possible throughout all the operating envelope as soon as
EOT ≥ -30°C.

3 TEMPERATURE LIMITS
- Minimum temperature .................................................................................... - 40°C
- Maximum temperature ............................................................................. ISA+35°C
limited to +50°C
For cold weather operations refer to SUP.4.

4 MANEUVERING LIMITATIONS
- Do not exceed a load factor that causes LIMIT light to come on.
- In maximum power configuration, slightly lower collective pitch before initiating a
turn, as in this maneuver power requirement is increased.
- In hover, avoid rotation faster than 6 seconds for one full rotation.

APPROVED 355 NP 2.3

21-09 Page 4
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 2.4
VEHICLE LIMITATIONS

1 MAIN ROTOR LIMITATIONS

Audio warnings:
- Low NR aural warning (continuous sound) .......... : NR ≤ 360 rpm.
- High NR aural warning (intermittent sound) ......... : NR ≥ 410 rpm.

2 ROTOR BRAKE LIMITATIONS

CAUTION
Both engines must be shut down before rotor brake application.
- Maximum rotor speed for rotor brake application ............................... : 170 rpm.
- Recommended speed for rotor brake application .............................. : 140 rpm.
- Minimum time between two consecutive rotor brake applications ..... : 5 min.

APPROVED 355 NP 2.4

20-41 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3 FIRST LIMITATION INSTRUMENT

(The numerical values shown are given as examples).

Use of heating and demisting is forbidden above the engine
maximum continuous rating (N1 or TOT):
3.1 ALL ENGINES OPERATIVE LIMITATIONS
N1 (%) TRQ (%)
POWER LIMIT FLI value TOT (°C)
(see note 1) (per engine)
AEO MCP
9 98.7 749 71.8
(unlimited)
MTOP
10 100.5 773 86.4
(t ≤ 5 min.)
AEO max. transient
10.4 103.4 800 89.6
(t ≤ 10 sec.)
- Max. TOT upon starting:
. Continuous .......................... : 765 °C (10 on FLI).

. Transient (≤ 5 sec.) ............. : 870 °C (10.4 on FLI).

NOTE 1
For N1, limitations change according to Hp, OAT and speed, above indicated
limitation values are absolute N1 limits.
NOTE 2
For torque:
- MTOP can be maintained for 5 min. with IAS < Vy.
- 100 % torque corresponds to 328 kW for a rotor speed of 394 rpm.

APPROVED 355 NP 2.4

20-41 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3.2 ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE LIMITATIONS

N1 (%) TRQ (%)
POWER LIMIT FLI value TOT (°C)
(see note 1) (per engine)
OEI CONT
12 102.5 812 115
(unlimited)
OEI MAX
13.2 104.1 885 131
(≤ 2.5 min.)
OEI max. transient
14 104.4 886 147.8
(≤ 5 sec.)

NOTE 1
For N1, limitations change according to Hp and OAT, above indicated
limitations values are absolute N1 limits.

4 FREE TURBINE LIMITATIONS (N2)

NOTE
A NR equivalent speed of 394 rpm corresponds to a N2 speed of 45 438 rpm.
Engine free turbine overspeed automatic CUT-OFF: N2 ≈ 441 rpm ± 12 rpm.

APPROVED 355 NP 2.4

20-41 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5 ENGINE OIL SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

5.1 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE

5.2 APPROVED ENGINE LUBRICANTS

NORMAL USE FOR -30°C ≤ OAT ≤ +50°C
NATO Specification
Oil type Code Class Approved oil trademarks
FRANCE USA UK
Mil Civil
Normal use
DEF BP Turbo oil 2380
MIL- SAE
Average synthetic DCSEA STAN MOBIL Jet Oil 2
0.156 PRF- AS Standard
5 cSt at 98.9° C 299 91-101 CASTROL 5000
23699 5780
TURBONYCOIL 600

OTHER OILS USE FOR -40°C ≤ OAT ≤ +30°C

NATO Specification
Oil type Code Class Approved oil trademarks
FRANCE USA UK
Mil Civil
MIL- BP Turbo oil 2389
Other oil
0.148 — PRF- — — — MOBIL AVREX S 256
7808
Synthetic fluid
3 cSt at 98.9° C TURBONYCOIL 13B
0.150 AIR 3514 — — — —
DEF
Synthetic fluid
— — — — STAN — Aero SHELL Turbine Oil 390
4 cSt at 98.9° C
91-94
NOTE
- When the oil specification/grade/ trademark differ from the approved one, the
engine manufacturer approval shall be obtained before using this oil.
- In case of oil change with trademark/NATO code/category/grade or
specification change, apply instructions as prescribed in the Engine
Maintenance Manual.
- All specifications are effective at latest issue or amendment.

APPROVED 355 NP 2.4

20-41 Page 4
 FLIGHT MANUAL

6 ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

6.1 FUEL PRESSURE

NOTE
Commercial designations of approved fuels and additives are specified in
TURBOMECA documentation.

6.2 APPROVED FUELS

- NORMAL FUELS
(Fuels approved to operate in the whole flight envelope without any restrictions).
USE FOR: -40°C ≤ OAT ≤ +50°C
Anti-ice
NATO
Type of fuel Specifications additive
code
included
FRANCE USA UK RUSSIA
Kerosene - 50 F 34 AIR 3405 MIL-T-83133 D.ENG. RD Yes
(AVTUR-FSII) (JP8) F 34 (JP8) 2453
Kerosene - 50 F 35 AIR 3405 ASTM-D-1655 D.ENG.RD No
(AVTUR) (JP1) F 35 JET A1 2494
Kerosene — — ASTM-D-1655 — No
JET A
KEROSENE — — — — GOST 10227 No
TC1 (TS 1)
KEROSENE — — — — GOST 10227 No
PT (RT)
Chinese fuel
PRC National
Standard — — — — — No
N°3 Jet fuel

NOTE
All specifications are effective at latest issue or amendment for all approved
fuels.

APPROVED 355 NP 2.4

20-41 Page 5
 FLIGHT MANUAL

- REPLACEMENT FUELS
(Fuel allowing operations in a restricted flight envelope.)
· Fuels with a restricted flight envelope of:
Minimum fuel temperature for starting: -30°C.
Specifications Anti-ice
Type of fuel NATO code additive
FRANCE USA UK
included
High flash point AIR 3404 - D.ENG.RD
F 43 No
(JP5) (AVCAT ) F 43 2498
High flash point AIR 3404 MIL-T-5624 D.ENG.RD
F 44 Yes
(JP5) (AVCAT FSII) F 44 (JP5) 2452

6.3 FUEL ADDITIVES

Anti-ice additives:

USE OF COMPULSORY ANTI-ICE ADDITIVE

Aircraft without fuel flowmeter system Aircraft with fuel flowmeter system (post
OP3946)

Operation at OAT ≤ -17°C Operation at OAT ≤ 0°C

Specifications Concentration
NATO symbol S 748
MIL-I-27686
D.ENG.RD 2451 Between 0.10% and 0.15%
AIR 3652
PHILLIPS PFA55MB
Fluid I: GOST 8313
Fluid I-M: TU6-10-1458 Between 0.10% to 0.30%
TGF: GOST17477
TGF-M: TU6-10-1457
Fungicide additive:
· Approved additives:
BIOBOR J.F. according to Maintenance Manual.
Anti-oxidation, Metal de-activator, Corrosion inhibitor:
· Approved additives:
According to the approved specifications in force (IONOL anti-oxidant and
ANK anti-corrosion included).

APPROVED 355 NP 2.4

20-41 Page 6
 FLIGHT MANUAL

7 GEARBOX SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

NOTE
- Mineral and synthetic oils shall not be mixed. Refer to the oil change
procedures described in the Maintenance Manual.
- All specifications are effective at latest issue or amendment.
- In case of fluid change with trademark/NATO code/category/grade or change in
specification, apply instruction as prescribed in Maintenance Manuel.
7.1 MGB OIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE
- Minimum oil pressure: 1 bar (14.5 psi).
On the CWP MGB P lights up for MGB P < 1 bar (14.5 psi).
- Maximum oil temperature: 122°C.
On the CWP MGB TEMP lights up for MGB TEMP > 122°C.

7.2 MGB LUBRICANTS

NORMAL USE
NATO Approved operating
Oil type Specifications
Code temperatures
FRANCE USA UK
Mineral oil 0.155 AIR 3525 MIL-L-6086 DTD 581 -20°C* ≤ OAT ≤ +50°C
NOTE: The "SHELL" trademark is prohibited

(*) Operation at OAT < -20°C is approved provided that MGB and TGB oil
temperature at engine start is ≥ -20°C.
A procedure to measure the oil temperatures is provided in the Aircraft Maintenance
Manual (MET 60-00-00- 603).

COLD WEATHER USE

NATO Approved operating
Oil type Specifications
Code temperatures
FRANCE USA UK
Synthetic oil 0.150 AIR 3514 — -40°C ≤ OAT ≤ 0°C

Synthetic oil 0.148 AIR 3513 MIL-L-7808 — -40°C ≤ OAT ≤ 0°C

APPROVED 355 NP 2.4

20-41 Page 7
 FLIGHT MANUAL

7.3 TGB LUBRICANTS

NATO Approved operating
Oil type Specifications
Code temperatures
FRANCE USA UK
Synthetic oil
5 cSt 0.156 — MIL-L-23699 —

Mineral oil 0.155 AIR 3525 MIL-L-6086 — -20°C* ≤ OAT ≤ +50°C

Synthetic oil
3 to 3.5 cSt 0.150 AIR 3514 — —
-40°C ≤ OAT ≤ 0°C
Synthetic oil
0.148 AIR 3513 MIL-L-7808 —
3 cSt

(*) Operation at OAT < -20°C is approved provided that MGB and TGB oil
temperature at engine start is ≥ -20°C.
A procedure to measure the oil temperatures is provided in the Aircraft Maintenance
Manual (MET 60-00-00- 603).

8 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

8.1 SERVO CONTROL FLUID
NORMAL USE
NATO Specification
Fluid type Notes
Code FRANCE USA UK
Synthetic fluid
Recommended — — MIL-H-83282 — —
use
Mineral fluid H 515 AIR 3520 MIL-H-5606 DTD 585 —

8.2 HYDRAULIC PRESSURE

Nominal hydraulic pressure: 35 bar (510 psi).
HYD for hydraulic pressure < 24 bar (350 psi).

APPROVED 355 NP 2.4

20-41 Page 8
 FLIGHT MANUAL

9 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

9.1 DC CIRCUIT LIMITATIONS
DC parameters are monitored on the VEMD according to electrical parameters
selector setting on the upper front panel.

Maximum generator current

APPROVED 355 NP 2.4

20-41 Page 9
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 2.5
MISCELLANEOUS LIMITATIONS

1 LANDING AND ROTOR STOPPING LIMITATIONS ON

SLOPE
- Nose up ............................................................................................................... 10°
- Nose down ............................................................................................................ 6°
- Sideways ............................................................................................................... 8°

2 RUNNING LANDING LIMITATIONS

Excluding emergencies and associated training, maximum speed for performing:
- Running landing ................................................................................................ 40 kt

3 BAGGAGE COMPARTMENTS LOAD LIMITATIONS

RH cargo compartment ........................................................................ 100 kg (220 lb)
LH cargo compartment ......................................................................... 120 kg (264 lb)
with a max. distributed load of 300 kg/m2 (62.5 lb/ft2)

Rear cargo compartment ......................................................................... 80 kg (176 lb)

with a max. distributed load of 145 kg/m2 (30 lb/ft2)

4 CABIN COMPARTMENT LOAD LIMITATIONS

Rear cabin floor ..................................................................................... 310 kg (682 lb)
Forward cabin floor ................................................................................ 150 kg (330 lb)
with a max. distributed load of 300 kg/m2 (62.5 lb/ft2)

APPROVED 355 NP 2.5

21-09 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5 ENGINE STARTER/GENERATOR
To prevent starter overheat damage, limit starter time to the following:

1st Cooling Cooling 2nd Cooling Cooling

Crank Crank
Start time time Start time time

Failed 1 min 30 s 1 min OK

Failed 1 min 30 s 1 min Failed 30 min 30 s 1 min

When performing an engine ventilation, the starter time is the duration that the
[CRANK] is pressed.

6 MANDATORY EQUIPMENT
A minimum of two adequate radio/audio headsets shall be on-board the helicopter,
one worn by the pilot at the controls to monitor the audio warnings delivered through
the ICS system, and a spare one.

7 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
When optional equipment items are installed, refer to the supplements for additional
limitations, procedures and performance data.

APPROVED 355 NP 2.5

21-09 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 2.6
PLACARDS
All placards shown hereafter are usually presented in bilingual form French/English.
However, the State of Registry may approve markings and placards in local language
intended for:
- Emergency passenger information and instruction,
- Instruction for operation of passenger doors.
The following illustrations of placards and decals are typical presentations. Slight formal
differences from the real placards and decals do not affect information presented therein.

1 VNE PLACARD

V.N.E. POWER ON
Hp (ft) IAS (kt)

0 150
2000 145
4000 140
6000 135
8000 130
10 000 125
12 000 120
14 000 115
16 000 110
18 000 105
20 000 100

V.N.E. POWER OFF

LESS 30 kt

Location: Inside cabin, on center post.

APPROVED 355 NP 2.6

21-09 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2 OPERATING LIMITATION PLACARD

Location: Inside cabin, aft of overhead canopy bow.

3 OTHER PLACARDS DISPLAYED IN THE COCKPIT

- LH side - RH side
Location: Inside cabin, at door bottom, in front of door jettisoning handle.

Location: - RH forward seat, at bottom RH side (optional).

- LH forward seat, at bottom LH side (optional).

APPROVED 355 NP 2.6

21-09 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Location: Console RH side.

Location: Inside cabin, on center post.

Location: Inside cabin.

APPROVED 355 NP 2.6

21-09 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4 FLOOR LOADING PLACARDS

Location: On console.

Location: Cargo hold LH side Location : Cargo hold RH side

Location: Rear cargo hold

APPROVED 355 NP 2.6

21-09 Page 4
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5 FUEL AND LUBRICANT PLACARDS

Location: Under filler necks, LH side.

Location: LH of filler necks, LH side.

Location: Beside engine oil tank filler cap, RH of MGB bay.

APPROVED 355 NP 2.6

21-09 Page 5
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Location: Near MGB filler neck LH side.

Location: Hydraulic reservoir, RH side and LH side.

APPROVED 355 NP 2.6

21-09 Page 6
 FLIGHT MANUAL

6 ELECTRICAL PLACARDS

Location: LH side of aircraft, above grounding point.

Location: RH side, on external power receptacle cover.

APPROVED 355 NP 2.6

21-09 Page 7
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
CONTENTS
PAGE
3.1 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
1 GENERAL .................................................................................................... 1
2 AUDIO WARNINGS ..................................................................................... 2
3 VISUAL WARNINGS AND ADVISORIES .................................................... 3

3.2 ENGINE FLAME-OUT

1 AUTOROTATION LANDING........................................................................ 1
2 ENGINE FAILURE ....................................................................................... 2
3 IN FLIGHT INTENTIONAL ENGINE SHUTDOWN ...................................... 5
4 IN FLIGHT ENGINE RELIGHTING .............................................................. 5
5 FUEL FLOW GOVERNOR FAILURES ........................................................ 6

3.3 TAIL ROTOR FAILURES

1 TAIL ROTOR DRIVE SHAFT FAILURE ....................................................... 1
2 TAIL ROTOR CONTROL FAILURE ............................................................. 2

3.4 SMOKE IN THE CABIN

1 SOURCE NOT IDENTIFIED ........................................................................ 1
2 SOURCE IDENTIFIED ................................................................................. 2
3 AFTER COCKPIT EXTINGUISHER USE .................................................... 2

3.5 VEMD FAILURES AND CAUTION MESSAGES

1 VEMD SCREEN FAILURES ........................................................................ 1
2 FAILURES/CAUTION MESSAGES ON VEMD............................................ 1
3 CAUTION MESSAGES ON FLI ................................................................... 3

APPROVED 355 NP 3.0.P6

20-41 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

PAGE
3.6 CAUTION AND WARNING PANEL
1 ENGINE ALARMS ....................................................................................... 1
2 TRANSMISSION ALARMS .......................................................................... 7
3 HYDRAULIC ALARMS ................................................................................ 9
4 ELECTRICAL ALARMS ............................................................................... 10
5 FUEL ALARMS ............................................................................................ 15
6 MISCELLANEOUS ALARMS ....................................................................... 17
7 ICING ........................................................................................................... 19
8 AIR DATA INSTRUMENT FAILURES ......................................................... 19

3.7 VARIOUS WARNINGS, FAILURES AND INCIDENTS NOT INDICATED

ON THE CWP
1 ROTOR BRAKE INOPERATIVE .................................................................. 1
2 YAW CONTROL SERVO-UNIT SLIDE VALVE JAMMED ........................... 1
3 ICS INOPERATIVE (GMA 340 H) ................................................................ 2
4 COCKPIT LIGHTING FAILURE ................................................................... 2
5 NR/N2 INDICATION FAILURES .................................................................. 3

APPROVED 355 NP 3.0.P6

20-41 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 3.1
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
1 GENERAL
Emergency procedures describe the actions that the pilot must take relative to the
various possible failures that can occur.
Meanwhile, depending on the many variable external environments, such as the type of
terrain overflown, the pilot may have to adapt to the situation according to his
experience.
To help the pilot in his decision process, four recommendations are used:
LAND IMMEDIATELY
Self explanatory.
LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE
Emergency conditions are urgent and require landing at the nearest landing site at
which a safe landing can be made.
LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE
Emergency conditions are less urgent and in the pilot's judgment, he may proceed to
the nearest airfield where he can expect appropriate assistance.
CONTINUE FLIGHT
Continue flight as planned. Repair at the destination according to the maintenance
manual.
NOTE
Immediate actions that the pilot shall take are written in bold characters.

APPROVED 355 NP 3.1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2 AUDIO WARNINGS
On the front overhead panel, a [HORN] pushbutton is used to activate the audio
warning.
When [HORN] pushbutton is pressed in: -HORN-.

NOTE
The pilot at the controls shall wear an adequate radio / ICS audio headset to
monitor the audio warning through the ICS system.

- GONG
A gong is generated each time a red warning light appears on the Caution and Warning
Panel.

- CONTINUOUS TONE
Two continuous tones can be heard:
- a 310 Hz tone when NR is ≤ 360 rpm.
- a 285 Hz tone:
. after 1.5 sec. delay when OEI limitations are exceeded,
. after 2.5 sec. delay when AEO limitations are exceeded,
. immediately when AEO transient limitations are or will be exceeded during fast
power increase.
1. Collective pitch ........................................... REDUCE to maintain NR in normal
operating range or power within
limitations.
2. Engine parameters ..................................... CHECK.

- INTERMITTENT TONE
An intermittent tone (310 Hz) can be heard when the NR is above 410 rpm.
1. Collective pitch ........................................... INCREASE to maintain NR in normal
operating range.
2. Apply applicable procedure according to the situation.

APPROVED 355 NP 3.1

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3 VISUAL WARNINGS AND ADVISORIES

- Symbol used for CWP warning,
caution, advisory lights ............................... ENG P.1 ENG P.1
ON OUT

- Symbol used for VEMD advisories ............. )

ON OUT
OEI MAX OEI MAX
ON OUT
- Symbol used for VEMD messages............. CHECK N1 CHECK N1
ON OUT

APPROVED 355 NP 3.1

15-18 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 3.2
ENGINE FLAME-OUT

1 AUTOROTATION LANDING
1.1 CRUISE FLIGHT OVER LAND
1. Collective pitch ...................................... REDUCE to maintain NR in normal
operating range.
2. IAS ........................................................... SET to 65 kt (120 km/h), heading into
wind.

• Time permitting :
3. Emergency fuel shutoff levers .............. AFT.
4. Booster pumps....................................... OFF.
5. Engines selectors .................................. OFF.
6. [EMERGENCY CUT OFF] ....................... OFF on final approach.

• At height around 70 ft (21 m), depending on gross weight and external

conditions (wind and terrain):
7. Cyclic ...................................................... FLARE to a nose-up attitude of 15/20°.

• At 20/25 ft (6/8 m) and at constant attitude:

8. Collective pitch ...................................... INCREASE gradually to reduce the rate
of descent and forward speed.
9. Cyclic ...................................................... FORWARD to adopt a slightly nose-up
landing attitude (< 8°).
10. Pedals ..................................................... ADJUST to cancel any sideslip
tendency.
11. Collective pitch ...................................... INCREASE to cushion touch-down.

• After touch-down :
12. Cyclic, collective, pedals ....................... CONTROL ground run.

• Once the aircraft has stopped :

13. Collective pitch ...................................... FULL DOWN.
14. Rotor brake ............................................. APPLY below 170 rpm.
15. [EMERGENCY CUT OFF] ....................... OFF (if not performed before).

APPROVED 355 NP 3.2

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1.2 DITCHING (WITHOUT EMERGENCY FLOATATION GEAR)

Apply same procedure as over land, except items 12, 13 and 14. Maneuver to head
the aircraft equally between the wind and waves direction on final approach. Ditch
with minimum forward speed (IAS < 30kt) (56 km/h) and rate of descent. Then apply
the following:

• After touch-down :
12. Collective pitch ......................................... MAINTAIN UP.
13. Rotor brake .............................................. APPLY.
14. Door emergency handles ......................... PULL-UP, JETTISON forward doors.
15. Unfasten seat belts.
Abandon aircraft once the rotor has stopped.

2 ENGINE FAILURE
NOTE 1
LIMIT may appear when exceeding AEO MTOP or when selected OEI rating is
exceeded in case of an engine failure.
NOTE 2
OEI rating stops are selected by a pushbutton on the collective grip.
Although N1 is limited to corresponding selected rating torque limits are to be
controlled by the pilot.

2.1 ENGINE FAILURE ON TAKEOFF

By applying the takeoff procedure defined in SECTION 4 and depending on the
terrain surface configuration, pilot should abort takeoff when failure occurs at
IAS < 30 kt (56 km/h).
Beyond this speed, pilot may either:
• Abort takeoff if terrain surface permits.
• Continue takeoff if single engine climbing performance permits (refer to
SECTION 5).
NOTE 3
There is no unsafe area up to Hp = 7000 ft (2100 m) and for AUW ≤ 2250 kg. For
other conditions, refer to SECTION 5 paragraph 5-7.

2.1.1 Aborted takeoff

1. Collective pitch ............................... LOWER, maintain NR > 360 rpm
2. Cyclic stick ....................................... NOSE UP to +15° attitude

• When aircraft begins to descend:

3. Cyclic stick ........................................ REDUCE NOSE UP attitude (< 8°)
4. Collective pitch ................................. INCREASE to cushion touchdown
5. Collective pitch ................................. FULL DOWN after complete stop

APPROVED 355 NP 3.2

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2.1.2 Continued takeoff

1. Collective pitch ............................... LOWER, maintain NR > 360 rpm,
CONTROL OEI MAX power
2. IAS ................................................... Vy as soon as possible
3 OEI rating ......................................... SELECT OEI CONT after 2.5 min. max

• Continue climbing:
4. Engine failed ..................................... IDENTIFY
5. Affected engine................................. OFF

LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE

2.2 ENGINE FAILURE IN HOVER
2.2.1 Hover IGE (or below H/V diagram low point)
1. Collective pitch ............................... MAINTAIN
2. Pedals .............................................. CONTROL YAW
3. Collective pitch ............................... INCREASE as needed to cushion
touchdown.
2.2.2 Hover OGE
WARNING
SAFE LANDING CANNOT BE ENSURED IN CASE OF A FAILURE IN
HOGE BELOW THE TOP POINT OF THE HV DIAGRAM (REFER TO
SECTION 5) OR IN CONFINED AREA.
1. Collective pitch ............................... LOWER, maintain NR > 360 rpm.
2. Cyclic stick ...................................... NOSE DOWN to -20° attitude to gain
airspeed according to available height.
Then if single engine climbing performance permits (refer to SECTION 5) :

• IAS = 40 kt (74 km/h) at height ≥ 50 ft AGL (15 m) could be established

YES NO

Flight may be continued. LAND IMMEDIATELY

Apply continued takeoff . Cyclic stick ........... FLARE.
or OEI landing procedure * As aircraft nears the ground :
if terrain surface permits. . Cyclic stick ........... REDUCE NOSE UP
attitude (< 8°).
LAND AS SOON AS . Collective pitch ..... INCREASE to
PRACTICABLE cushion touchdown.

APPROVED 355 NP 3.2

15-18 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2.3 ENGINE FAILURE IN CRUISE FLIGHT

Symptoms:
- slight jerk in the yaw axis (the jerk may not be noticed at low power or during
approach),
- change in the noise level,
- FLI needles split,
- DIFF PWR + Gong,
- ° ENG P. #° ° GEN.# ° may light up on failed engine,
- OEI MAX ° appears on FLI,
- Low NR audio warning if NR ≤ 360 rpm.
Flight may be continued on one engine.
1. Collective pitch ...................................... LOWER, maintain NR > 375 rpm.
2. OEI rating ................................................ SELECT OEI CONT .
3. Failed engine ........................................... IDENTIFY.
4. Failed engine ........................................... OFF.
5. Corresponding [FUEL P] .......................... OFF.

LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE

To obtain maximum fuel range capacity with OEI, fuel tanks crossfeed valve may be
opened (refer to SECTION 4).

2.4 OEI APPROACH AND LANDING

1. IAS ........................................................... ≥ Vy.
2. OEI rating ................................................. SELECT OEI MAX °.
3. Collective pitch ......................................... CONTROL NR ≥ 375 rpm
and ROD ≤ 500 ft/min.

• At 100 ft AGL (30 m):

4. IAS ........................................................... REDUCE so as to get 40 kt (74 km/h)
at 50 ft (15 m).

• As aircraft nears the ground:

5. Cyclic stick ............................................... NOSE UP attitude < 8°.
6. Collective pitch ......................................... INCREASE to cushion touchdown.

APPROVED 355 NP 3.2

15-18 Page 4
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3 IN FLIGHT INTENTIONAL ENGINE SHUTDOWN

Depending on engine system malfunctions or emergency conditions, intentional single
engine flight may be required. Apply the following procedure for intentional in-flight
engine shutdown:
1. Collective pitch .................................. SET TRQ ≤ 40 % on each engine
2. OEI stops selector ............................. SELECT OEI CONT
3. Engine # selector ............................... TRNG then OFF
4. [FUEL P. #] ........................................ OFF
5. [GEN. #] ............................................. OFF

• If necessary:
6. Electrical consumption ....................... REDUCE (refer to SECTION 2)
7. [FUEL XFEED] .................................. ON (refer to SECTION 4)

4 IN FLIGHT ENGINE RELIGHTING

Engine relighting is possible throughout the operating envelope as soon as engine oil
temperature is ≥ -30°C.
Depending on the type of failure, cause of the flame out or reason for engine shutdown,
engine restart may be attempted throughout the whole flight envelope:
1. Engine # selector ............................. OFF
2. [FUEL P. #] ........................................ CHECK ON
3. Engine # selector ............................. FLT
The relighting sequence will automatically be carried out as soon as N1 ≤ 17%.
NOTE
When setting the engine selector through TRNG position, a transient hunting of
the FLI of the other engine may be observed.

APPROVED 355 NP 3.2

15-18 Page 5
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5 FUEL FLOW GOVERNOR FAILURES

These procedures are related to fuel governor failures not indicated by a warning
light. For GOV and/or FADEC #, refer to section 3.6 paragraph 1.
Symptoms:
- one engine with low FLI setting,
- the other engine at medium or high FLI setting.
Pilot actions:
NR ................................................................ CHECK
A NR < 375 rpm : failure of the engine at low FLI setting
1. Collective pitch .................................... LOWER to control 375 ≤ NR ≤ 395 rpm.
2. IAS ......................................................... Vy
3. Affected engine ...................................... IDENTIFY
4. Affected engine selector ........................ OFF
5. In cruise flight OEI procedure ................ APPLY
B NR > 395 rpm : failure of the engine at high FLI setting
1. Collective pitch .................................... DO NOT REDUCE, try to keep
NR ≤ 420 rpm if possible
2. Affected engine .................................... IDENTIFY
3 Affected engine selector ..................... OFF
4 Collective .............................................. LOWER, control 375 ≤ NR ≤ 395 rpm
5 IAS ......................................................... Set to Vy
6. In cruise flight OEI procedure ................ APPLY
C 375 ≤ NR ≤ 395 rpm
1. Collective pitch .................................... INCREASE slowly.
2. NR.......................................................... CHECK NR decrease.

YES NO
Failure on engine at low FLI setting Failure on engine with frozen FLI
3. Apply same procedure as case A
For all the cases:
LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE

APPROVED 355 NP 3.2

15-18 Page 6
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 3.3
TAIL ROTOR FAILURES

1 TAIL ROTOR DRIVE SHAFT FAILURE

Symptoms: The helicopter will yaw to the left. The rate of turn will depend on power
applied and airspeed set at the time of the failure.
Pilot's actions:
• In hover or at low speed near the ground:
LAND IMMEDIATELY to prevent excessive turn rate.
• In cruise flight or in OGE hover (outside H/V diagram envelope):
1. Power .................................................... REDUCE as much as possible.
2. Forward speed ..................................... MAINTAIN or INCREASE
(weathercock effect).
3. Cyclic stick ........................................... MAINTAIN HEADING
(roll control).
Select a suitable landing area for a steep approach at a power enabling a
reasonably coordinated flight.
• On final approach:
4. Engines ................................................. SHUTDOWN.
5. Autorotation procedure ....................... APPLY, touchdown at the lowest possible
ground speed.

APPROVED 355 NP 3.3

21-09 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2 TAIL ROTOR CONTROL FAILURE

Symptoms: Jamming of pedals or loss of pedal effectiveness. These conditions
make it impossible to change tail rotor thrust with the pedals.

WARNING
WHEN AIRSPEED IS LESS THAN 20 KT (37 KM/H) AND PARTICULARLY NEAR
TO THE GROUND, GO-AROUND MAY BE IMPOSSIBLE DUE TO LOSS OF THE
VERTICAL FIN EFFICIENCY.

1. Cyclic and collective ..................................... ADJUST to set IAS to 70 kt

(130 km/h) in level flight
2. Tail rotor hydraulic ........................................ OFF (collective grip switch)
3. [ACCU TST]................................................. PRESS for 5 sec. (load compensator
depressurizes)

On a suitable area for a running landing procedure:

Make a shallow approach with a slight left sideslip. Perform a running landing. The
sideslip will be reduced progressively as airspeed is reduced and collective is applied to
cushion the landing.

NOTE
Landing is made easier with a RH wind component.

APPROVED 355 NP 3.3

21-09 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 3.4
SMOKE IN THE CABIN
1 SOURCE NOT IDENTIFIED
1. Heating, Demisting system ..................... OFF
2. Overhead lights ........................................ ON (night flight)
3. [EMERGENCY CUT OFF] ......................... DOWN POSITION
4. [SHED BUS 1] + [SHED BUS 2] ................ SHED position
5 [OIL FANS] ................................................ OFF
6. All switches and pushbuttons ..................... OFF except overhead lights, [DCT BAT]
and [S/BY HORIZ] (if fitted)
7. [EMERGENCY CUT OFF] ......................... UP POSITION
• Perform following actions in the prescribed order.
• Check DC parameters and correct operation of each new function before the next
action.
8. [GENE 1] .................................................... ON
9. [GENE RST] ............................................... PRESS (if required)
10. [BAT/EPU 1] .............................................. ON
11. Essential DC consumers ............................ ON one by one (depending on flight
conditions)
12. I. GEN ........................................................ CHECK (refer to SECTION 2)
13. [GENE 2] .................................................... ON
14. [GENE RST] ............................................... PRESS (if required)
15. [BAT/EPU 2] .............................................. ON
16. [OIL FANS] ................................................ ON
17. [SHED BUS 1] + [SHED BUS 2] ................ ON
18. All other DC consumers ............................. ON, one by one
• When faulty system is identified:
Faulty system ................................................... OFF

NOTE
If electrical consumption must be reduced, [OIL FANS] may be kept OFF when
IAS ≥ 60 kt (111 km/h).

CAUTION

When [EMERGENCY CUT-OFF] is in down position, the VEMD goes off. Apply the
procedure for failure of both screens (Section 3.5 paragraph 1).

APPROVED 355 NP 3.4

20-41 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2 SOURCE IDENTIFIED
1. Affected system ......................................... OFF
2. Cabin ventilation........................................... OPEN
3. Front door windows ...................................... OPEN
4. Sliding door windows ................................... OPEN (if fitted)
5. Ventilation nozzles ....................................... OPEN

3 AFTER COCKPIT FIRE EXTINGUISHER USE

1. Avoid as much as possible extinguisher agent inhalation.
2. Ventilate the cabin.

APPROVED 355 NP 3.4

20-41 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 3.5
VEMD FAILURES AND CAUTION MESSAGES
1 VEMD SCREEN FAILURES
• Failure of one screen
Failed screen.................................................. OFF.
Read all available parameters on the other screen.
Engines and vehicle parameters are available using the [SCROLL] pushbutton either
on the VEMD or on the collective pitch lever.
Lower screen failure:

ENG VEH
SCROLL

Upper screen failure:

SCROLL
ENG VEH

• Failure of both screens

To avoid any power overlimit, the maximum authorized power will be the power
needed to establish level flight with the following law:
IAS = 100 kt - 2 kt / 1000 ft Hp (185 km/h – 4 km/h / 300 m Hp)

LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE

Landing procedure: carry out a no hover precautionary landing.

2 FAILURES/CAUTION MESSAGES ON VEMD

When a parameter is off line, the parameter value is not displayed on the VEMD upper
screen and the parameter scale symbology is displayed in yellow. Caution messages
are self explanatory and the pilot shall comply with the action requested. If no light is lit
on the caution and warning panel, no other action is required from the pilot.

APPROVED 355 NP 3.5

21-09 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LANE 1 (or 2) FAILED

: Self explanatory.
---> PRESS OFF 1 (or 2)

CROSSTALK FAILED
: Self explanatory
---> PRESS OFF 1 (or 2)
Screens brightness control failed
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL FAILED :
(present brightness level frozen).

(INTERNAL) CONFIG DIFFERS (Internal) configurations inconsistency

:
MAINTENANCE lane 1/lane 2.
Displayed on both screens: press [OFF1] and [OFF2]. Operate the VEMD in single lane
mode: Press [OFF1] or [OFF2] then check parameters consistency.

VEH PARAM OUT RANGE : Abnormal vehicle parameter.

ENG OUT RNG : Abnormal engine parameter.

These messages appear when a parameter usually displayed on these pages reaches a
limitation, as the relevant (vehicle or engine) pages are not displayed.
- [SCROLL] .............................................. PRESS to reach the relevant page and
check the parameter.

CHECK ENG : Caution message on engine page.

This message appears when a caution message is displayed on the engine page as the
engine page is not displayed.
- [SCROLL] .............................................. PRESS to reach engine page and check
the caution message.
FLI VALID : The "FLI" function becomes valid again
------> PRESS RESET after failure.

GPS system not available

GPS NOT AVAILABLE :
(no absolute time reference).
- GPS navigation system (if fitted)............ CHECK ON.
If no GPS on board, check VEMD configuration.

OVERLIMIT DETECTED : Engine/vehicle overlimit recorded.

This message appears as soon as a parameter overlimit is recorded in the VEMD. It will
be displayed on the FLI or engine page until 40% N1 during the next engine start.
After the flight, check the recorded overlimit data and perform the associated
maintenance actions.
For all these messages, unless otherwise required by accompanying caution/warning
lights or procedures:
CONTINUE FLIGHT

APPROVED 355 NP 3.5

21-09 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3 CAUTION MESSAGES ON FLI

• OEI CONT
When in AEO mode, the OEI CONT power level is inappropriately pre-selected.
Press the OEI stop selector on the collective grip to clear the message and to pre-
select OEI MAX in case of an engine failure.
CONTINUE FLIGHT

• ENG FAIL

Corresponding engine has failed.

OEI MAX or OEI CONT is displayed
when OEI rating stop is selected.

- Engine failure procedure ................... APPLY, refer to section 3.2.

LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE

• FADEC FAIL

Corresponding engine FADEC has

failed.
If TRQ ≠ 40% ± 2, TRQ value appears
in a yellow box.

- CWP .................................................. CHECK FADEC #

- FADEC # procedure .......................... APPLY, refer to section 3.6
paragraph 1.4.
LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE

APPROVED 355 NP 3.5

21-09 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

• FLI # FAIL on one engine

Loss of three power parameters.

Failed FLI pointer disappears.

NOTE
An automatic increase of 7 % of the remaining torque provides the possibility
to observe the affected engine limitations.

• FLI # DISC on one engine

FLI # computation discrepancy between VEMD lane 1/lane 2.
Failed FLI pointer disappears; digital values of power parameters are still displayed.

• FLI # DEGR on one engine

Loss of one or two power

parameters (TRQ, TOT, DN1/N1).
The affected FLI is computed with
the remaining parameter(s).

For these failures:

CONTINUE FLIGHT
Perform a precautionary no-hover landing.

APPROVED 355 NP 3.5

21-09 Page 4
 FLIGHT MANUAL

• FLI # FAIL or FLI # DISC on both engines

Both failed FLI pointers disappear.

- Two screen failure procedure ............ APPLY, refer to paragraph 1 of this

section

• CHECK N1 / CHECK TRQ / CHECK TOT

Significant difference between the two

engines corresponding parameters:
- diff. N1 ≥ 5 %
- diff. TRQ ≥ 30 %
- diff. TOT ≥ 80°C.

- N1/TRQ/TOT consistency ................. CHECK, align parameters via engine trim

if necessary

CORRECT NOT CORRECT

Possible loss of power. Invalid parameter computation

on one engine

CONTINUE FLIGHT CONTINUE FLIGHT

Perform a precautionary
no-hover landing.

APPROVED 355 NP 3.5

21-09 Page 5
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 3.6
CAUTION AND WARNING PANEL
1 ENGINE ALARMS
1.1 FIRE
WARNING
PANEL CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
• IN FLIGHT:
FIRE.#. 1. Power ..................................... REDUCE
On affected engine:
Fire in engine bay 2. Fuel shutoff control lever ..... CLOSED
3. Engine # selector .................. OFF
4. [FUEL P #] .............................. OFF
5. [GEN #] ................................... OFF
6 Heating and air conditioning ... OFF
7. CWP ....................................... MONITOR FIRE.#.
After 1 min.:

NO YES

LAND IMMEDIATELY LAND AS SOON AS

PRACTICABLE
 When fire extinguishers are installed:
8. Eng # ..................................... WAIT N1 ≤ 50 %
9. 1st extinguisher ........................ FIRE
10. CWP ....................................... MONITOR FIRE.#.
After 1 min.:

NO YES

LAND AS SOON AS
PRACTICABLE
11. 2nd extinguisher ....................... FIRE
12. CWP ....................................... MONITOR FIRE.#.
After 1 min.:

NO YES

LAND IMMEDIATELY LAND AS SOON AS

PRACTICABLE

APPROVED 355 NP 3.6

20-41 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

WARNING
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
PANEL
FIRE.#. • ON GROUND, IN HOVER or ON LANDING:
(Cont'd) LAND IMMEDIATELY
Fire in engine bay 1. Engine 1 and 2 selectors ............. OFF
2. [FUEL P 1] + [FUEL P 2] ................ OFF
3. Fuel shutoff control lever............. CLOSED
4. 1st + 2nd extinguishers (if fitted) ...... FIRE
. When NR ≤ 170 rpm:
5. Rotor brake .................................... AFT
Evacuate aircraft and fight fire from outside.

1.2 DIFF. POWER

WARNING
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
PANEL

DIFF PWR Loss of power on engine with low torque.

Difference of: 1. Collective pitch ............... REDUCE POWER

. N1 > 7 % 2. Engine parameters ........... MONITOR
and/or 3. Engine Trim ...................... CHECK around medium position
. TRQ > 35 %
between both YES NO
engines.

+
4. Be prepared for possible Eng. Trim ....... Balance engines
Triple "Gong"
engine failure
audio warning.

LAND AS SOON AS CONTINUE FLIGHT

PRACTICABLE

APPROVED 355 NP 3.6

20-41 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1.3 ENGINE OIL SYSTEM

WARNING
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
PANEL
1. Oil pressure .................. CHECK EOP # on VEMD vehicle page
ENG P.#
EOP # < 1.7 bar EOP < 1.7 bar (24.7 psi) EOP ≥ 1.7 bar (24.7 psi)
(24.7 psi).
2. Power.................. REDUCE. 2. EOP ........... MONITOR
- Affected engine:
3. Selector................ OFF
4. OEI procedure ..... APPLY
LAND AS SOON AS CONTINUE FLIGHT
PRACTICABLE
• On ground:
CHIP # Affected engine ........................... SHUTDOWN
• In flight:
Metal chip in the
affected engine oil OEI flight condition ...................... Establish
system. Affected engine ........................... SHUTDOWN

LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE

The affected engine can be restarted for landing if necessary.
CAUTION
Be prepared for engine failure. Monitor N1, TOT, TRQ, engine
oil pressure and temperature of affected engine closely. If the
parameters fluctuate or their limits are exceeded shutdown
the affected engine immediately.

APPROVED 355 NP 3.6

20-41 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

VEMD CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

1. CWP ................................. CHECK ENG P.#

YES NO

2. FLI ......... CHECK TRQ #

TRQ reading correct

NO YES

2. ENG P.# 3. CWP ............ MONITOR

procedure. ............ Apply 4. EOT ............. MONITOR

LAND AS SOON AS CONTINUE FLIGHT

PRACTICABLE
1. Collective pitch ............... REDUCE POWER
2. [OIL FANS]....................... CHECK ON
3. Airspeed ........................... SET to 80 KIAS (148 km/h)
Temperature decrease

YES NO

LAND AS SOON AS • Depending on flight conditions,

PRACTICABLE engine #:
3. Selector ....................... OFF
Check cooler fans operation 4. OEI procedure ............. APPLY

LAND AS SOON AS
PRACTICABLE
• During approach:
5. Affected Engine ........... FLT if
necessary
NOTE
In case of failure of one or both cooler fans, ram air cooling at
80 KIAS is sufficient to keep the engine oil temperature in the
normal range.

APPROVED 355 NP 3.6

20-41 Page 4
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1.4 FADEC FAILURES

WARNING
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
PANEL
FADEC # • IN CRUISE FLIGHT:

+ 1. CHECK .......................... Engine parameters

2. Failed engine ................. IDENTIFY corresponding FFCL

on FFCL # . Smooth collective pitch actions

+ . Maintain TRQ > 0 on not affected engine
FADEC FAIL . Depending on conditions and if necessary, slowly balance
and engine power using the FFCL with
LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE
TRQ
61 %
• APPROACH AND LANDING PROCEDURE:
Around 500 to 1000 ft (152 to 305 m) above landing site:
(if TRQ ≠ 40% ± 2) 1. IAS ............................... SET 70 kt (130 km/h) in level flight
on VEMD
2. FFCL with ................... SET TRQ to 40 % (failed engine)
(Yellow box around TRQ value disappears on FLI)
Full FADEC
3. Approach ..................... SET IAS = 40 kt (74 km/h) with a
failure
slow rate of descent to an IGE hover
Landing: from the IGE hover
Corresponding 1. Collective pitch .............. LOWER SLOWLY to low pitch
fuel flow frozen
2. NR................................. MONITOR
On ground or as soon as high NR warning sounds:
3. FFCL with ................. AFT
4. Apply normal shutdown procedure

APPROVED 355 NP 3.6

20-41 Page 5
 FLIGHT MANUAL

WARNING
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
PANEL
GOV • In cruise flight:
1. Both FFCL .............................. CHECK in neutral notch
Minor FADEC
failure YES NO
or
2. Collective pitch ....... Avoid rapid 2. FFCL ..... NEUTRAL
FFCL out of neutral movements
notch
3. STATUS PAGE ...... DISPLAY
to identify affected engine and
failure code
CONTINUE FLIGHT

GOV • Engine starting phase:

(Cont'd) During starting phase, TOT is low and does not increase after
engine selector is set to ON.
Faulty TOT 1. Corresponding FFCL .......... SLIGHTLY FORWARD
governing: Limited
2. TOT .................................... CHECK within limits
fuel flow during
starting phase. . When N1 ≥ 68%:
3. FFCL................................... BACK to neutral detent

OVSP # • Engine stopped or during starting phase:

. Normal procedure, overspeed protection is not armed

N2 overspeed for N2 ≤ 100 rpm

detection. • Starting phase, NR > 100 rpm:
. Overspeed protection system is unserviceable
Abort start-up
• In flight:
. Overspeed protection system is unserviceable or
. Overspeed protection has been activated on engine #;
engine # has been automatically shut down. Apply engine
failure procedure, refer to section 3.2.

LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE

APPROVED 355 NP 3.6

20-41 Page 6
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2 TRANSMISSION ALARMS
WARNING
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
PANEL

MGB FIRE LAND IMMEDIATELY

Fire in MGB 1. Engine oil temperatures .....CHECK
compartment • If temperature exceeds 107°C:
2. Engine selectors ....................... OFF
3. Autorotation procedure............ APPLY

NOTE
Fire in MGB may cause engine and MGB oil cooling systems
failure.

MGB TEMP 1. Collective pitch ............ REDUCE POWER

MGB oil 2. [OIL FANS] ................... CHECK ON
temperature 3. CWP .............................. TEST and MONITOR for MGB P
≥ 122°C
4. IAS ................................. SET to 80 KIAS (148 km/h)

MGB TEMP MGB TEMP

LAND AS SOON AS LAND AS SOON AS

POSSIBLE PRACTICABLE
Check cooler fans operation

NOTE
In case of failure of one or both cooler fans, ram air cooling at
80 KIAS is sufficient to keep the MGB oil temperature in the
normal range.

APPROVED 355 NP 3.6

20-41 Page 7
 FLIGHT MANUAL

WARNING
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
PANEL
MGB P 1. Collective pitch .......... REDUCE to set TRQ ≤ 2 x 30%
2. IAS ............................... Vy
MGB oil pressure
< 1 bar (14.5 psi) 3. CWP ............................ TEST and
MONITOR for MGB TEMP

NOTE 1
The MGB has successfully passed a bench test at this
power consisting in running the gearbox for 45 minutes at
zero oil pressure.
NOTE 2
The induced rate of descent will remain ≤ 600 ft/min.
In most cases this will allow several nautical miles of flight.

LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE

MGB CHIP 1. Collective pitch .......................... REDUCE POWER

2. CWP ......................................... TEST and MONITOR for:
Metal particles in
the MGB oil MGB TEMP and/or MGB P

YES NO

Apply appropriate procedure LAND AS SOON AS

PRACTICABLE

TGB CHIP CONTINUE FLIGHT

Metal particles in Avoid prolonged hovering
the TGB oil

APPROVED 355 NP 3.6

20-41 Page 8
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3 HYDRAULIC ALARMS
WARNING
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
PANEL
CAUTION
HYD #
During high load factor maneuvers, servocontrol
+ reversibility could be encountered.
Keep aircraft on a more or less level attitude.
SERVO Avoid abrupt maneuvers.
Maintain bank angle lower than 30°.
Loss of hydraulic Maintain IAS below 110 kt (204 km/h) (or VNE if less).
pressure on
corresponding
circuit. NOTE
One remaining circuit allows continued safe flight
and landing.
HYD 1 HYD 2

Loss of LH circuit Loss of RH circuit

LIMIT may be on at Tail rotor control
high collective pitch. hydraulic power lost.
(refer to para. 6)
CAUTION
Do not press [ACCU TST]
pushbutton as this would
discharge the yaw load
compensator and right pedal
loads may be significant.

LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE

For all cases, normal approach and landing

SERVO

Jamming of a
LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE
distributor valve on
main servo unit.

APPROVED 355 NP 3.6

20-41 Page 9
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4 ELECTRICAL ALARMS
4.1 BATTERY FAILURES
WARNING
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
PANEL
BAT TEMP 1. [BAT/EPU 1] + [BAT/EPU 2] ...........OFF

Battery internal BAT TEMP BAT TEMP

overheating
LAND AS SOON AS LAND AS SOON AS
POSSIBLE PRACTICABLE

NOTE
Engine restarting impossible.

BAT FUSE 1. CWP ................................................MONITOR for BAT TEMP

Battery isolated 2. V. ESS .............................................MONITOR
from DC circuit
CONTINUE FLIGHT

BAT.1 1. [BAT/EPU 1] + [BAT/EPU 2] ...........CHECK ON

+
BAT.2 CONTINUE FLIGHT
Battery off line

BAT.# 1. [BAT/EPU #] ....................................CHECK ON

Affected battery
contactor open CONTINUE FLIGHT

APPROVED 355 NP 3.6

20-41 Page 10
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.2 GENERATOR FAILURES

WARNING
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
PANEL

GEN.1 1. [GENE 1] + [GENE 2] ............ CHECK ON

+ 2. [GENE RST] .......................... PRESS
GEN.2 GEN.1 + GEN.2
Failure of both DC
generators
YES NO

CONTINUE FLIGHT 3. [GENE 1] + [GENE 2] ....... OFF

4. [SHED BUS] 1 + 2 ............ SHED
5. [OIL FANS] ....................... OFF
6. IAS ............................ MAINTAIN
≥ 60 kt (111 km/h)

LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE

Exit IMC conditions as soon as possible if applicable.
The battery supplies the main buses.
NOTE

GEN.1 + GEN.2 come on if the DC system is supplied

with external power.

APPROVED 355 NP 3.6

20-41 Page 11
 FLIGHT MANUAL

WARNING
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
PANEL

GEN.# 1. [GENE #] ......................................... CHECK ON

2. [GENE RST] .................................... PRESS
Failure of one GEN.#
DC generator

YES NO

3. [GENE #] ............. OFF

CONTINUE FLIGHT 4. I. GEN .................. MONITOR

• During hoisting mission (as applicable):

. Finish present hoisting, abort mission
• If I. GEN > I max (refer to SECTION 2):
. Unnecessary consumers ...........OFF
CONTINUE FLIGHT
NOTE
- For Hp > 16000 ft (4880 m) avoid abrupt power
increase as TOT transients may occur.
- If [OIL FANS] has to be set OFF, maintain
IAS ≥ 60 kt (111 km/h).

APPROVED 355 NP 3.6

20-41 Page 12
 FLIGHT MANUAL

VEMD CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

Over voltage on one generator (> 29 V):

V.ESS
1. Affected generator..................... OFF
V
32.0 2. CWP .......................................... MONITOR for BAT TEMP
3. GEN.# procedure .................. Apply
CONTINUE FLIGHT

I.GEN Over intensity on one generator :

A 1. Affected generator..................... OFF.
155
2. GEN.# procedure .................. Apply.
CONTINUE FLIGHT
Over intensity on both generators:
I.GEN
V.ESS 1. [BAT/EPU 1] + [BAT/EPU 2] ..... OFF
A
V
27.6
155 159
27.8 If over intensity persists on one generator:
2. Affected generator..................... OFF
3. GEN.# procedure .................. Apply
LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE

4.3 DIRECT BATTERY CIRCUIT FAILURE

OVERHEAD
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
PANEL

DCT • With DC circuit not powered:

BAT Direct Battery circuit is on line, switch off if necessary (shutdown
procedure) or keep it on when required (Smoke in the cabin
procedure).
[DCT BAT]
• With DC circuit normally powered:
lights on
Direct Battery circuit off line: FADEC computers are only supplied
by their own engine alternators.
[DCT BAT] .............................. CHECK ON
LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE

APPROVED 355 NP 3.6

20-41 Page 13
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.4 AC SYSTEM* FAILURES

WARNING CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
PANEL
• Single inverter* AC system (VFR version):
INV.#
[ INV # ] ................................... CHECK ON
Inverter failure
Affected inverter ...................... RESET, if possible
CONTINUE FLIGHT
NOTE
AFCS* disengages automatically, fly hands on.
• Dual AC inverter system* (IFR version):
[ INV # ] ................................... CHECK ON
AC voltage .............................. CHECK
Affected inverter ...................... RESET if possible

CONTINUE FLIGHT
NOTE
The other inverter takes over and automatically
supplies the overall AC circuit.

INV.1 Total AC* power failure.

+ Flight controls.......................... HANDS ON

INV.2 NOTE
AFCS* disengages automatically.

LEAVE IMC CONDITIONS AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.

* If installed

APPROVED 355 NP 3.6

20-41 Page 14
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5 FUEL ALARMS
WARNING
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
PANEL

FUEL 1. Fuel quantities ......................... CHECK

Avoid large pitch attitude changes.
Fuel quantity 2. Fuel transfer ............................ PERFORM IF NECESSARY
≤ 6 % in one
or two fuel NOTE
tanks. Below 20%, the rear tank (RH gauge) tends to empty into the
front tank. Level equalizing is obtained with a 4% difference (e.g.
10 % front – 6 % rear).
With both tanks at 6 % 18 min. flying time remains in level flight at
MCP.

• When both fuel gauges near zero reading:

LAND IMMEDIATELY

1. Collective .................................. REDUCE POWER

F.FILT #
2. CWP ......................................... F.FILT #
Pre-clogging
of fuel filter #. YES NO

CONTINUE FLIGHT Shut down affected engine.

Landing ................ENG. # on FLT if
necessary

F.FILT 1 Heavy fuel system contamination.

+ 1. Collective pitch .......................... REDUCE POWER
F.FILT 2
LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE

APPROVED 355 NP 3.6

20-41 Page 15
 FLIGHT MANUAL

VEMD CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

1. [FUEL P #] .................................. CHECK ON

YES NO

Fuel quantity........ CHECK

[FUEL P #] ................ ON
CONTINUE FLIGHT
Fuel quantity .............. CHECK

CONTINUE FLIGHT

APPROVED 355 NP 3.6

20-41 Page 16
 FLIGHT MANUAL

6 MISCELLANEOUS ALARMS
WARNING
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
PANEL
P.PITOT For corresponding system:
or [PITOT] ....................................... CHECK ON
A.PITOT * IAS .............................................. Monitor readings
Pitot heating CONTINUE FLIGHT
inoperative.

DOOR Airspeed...................................... REDUCE to 70 kt (130 km/h)

One or two cargo

compartment side
door(s) not locked. LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE

Descent and approach at low rate of descent.

HORN [HORN] ....................................... CHECK ON

Audio warning
inoperative. NO YES

[HORN]................ ON Audio warning system

unserviceable
CONTINUE FLIGHT

TRNG One engine selector in training mode position (TRNG), refer to

SUP.6:
One engine in - Corresponding engine N2 is governed at 355 rpm (at zero
training mode. power).
- The "working" engine power (N1, TRQ) is limited to the
OEI MAX or OEI CONT training power level.
- In case of "working" engine failure or if NR drops below
355 rpm, training mode will be automatically cancelled, the
engine in TRNG mode accelerates and provides power up
to its OEI limits.
CONTINUE FLIGHT

APPROVED 355 NP 3.6

20-41 Page 17
 FLIGHT MANUAL

WARNING
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
PANEL
LIMIT • During cruise flight or steep maneuvers:
Main servo unit 1. Collective pitch ..................... REDUCE POWER
max load reached
2. Cyclic .................................... REDUCE SPEED or LOAD
or FACTOR as applicable

Power limit CONTINUE FLIGHT

reached:
NOTE
AEO: LIMIT may appear associated with HYD 1 in case of
hydraulic failure (refer to para. 3 in this section).
- Ng >Ng MTOP
- Torque > 89 % • In hover flight:
- TOT > 779°C
1. FLI ........................................ CHECK both FLI, balance
engines if necessary
In OEI mode when
OEI MAX selected: 2. Helicopter loading data ......... CHECK
- Ng > Ng max OEI
MAX • During OEI procedures:
- Torque > 130.5 % 1. FLI ........................................ CHECK POWER
- TOT > 886°C 2. OEI stop ................................ CHECK appropriate OEI stop is
selected

NOTE
Torque limits are to be controlled by the pilot.

APPROVED 355 NP 3.6

20-41 Page 18
 FLIGHT MANUAL

7 ICING
The first visible indication of icing is the formation of ice deposits on the windscreen
wiper.
[PITOT] ................................................. CHECK ON, # PITOT

CAUTION
Leave icing conditions area as soon as possible.

8 AIR DATA INSTRUMENT FAILURES

PITOT / STATIC SYSTEM FAILURE
Symptoms:
Obviously incorrect or erratic altitude, airspeed or vertical speed indications.

Pilot's actions:
Should the pilot’s air data instruments fail, refer to the indications of stand-by or copilot’s
instruments if fitted.
1. NORMAL/STD-BY static valve ...................... STD-BY
2. [PITOT] .......................................................... CHECK ON, # PITOT
3. Cabin ventilation ............................................ OFF
4. Ventilation nozzles ......................................... OFF
5. All windows CLOSED
If failure persists:
Power ................................................................ MAINTAIN recommended
cruise power or below

LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE

APPROVED 355 NP 3.6

20-41 Page 19
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 3.7
VARIOUS WARNINGS, FAILURES AND INCIDENTS
NOT INDICATED ON THE CWP
1 ROTOR BRAKE INOPERATIVE
WARNING

WAIT UNTIL ROTOR COMES TO A STANDSTILL BEFORE LEAVING THE

AIRCRAFT.

Rotor stopping with wind blowing:

1. Aircraft ........................................................INTO WIND
2. Cyclic stick..................................................slightly INTO WIND

2 YAW CONTROL SERVO-UNIT SLIDE VALVE JAMMED

(yaw pedals jamming)
• In hover:
Angular speed ......... Zero

YES NO

LAND NORMALLY Hydraulic switch

(collective pitch) ........... OFF

LAND AS SOON AS
POSSIBLE

• In cruising flight:
IAS .................................... Reduce, enter side slip if necessary
Hydraulic switch
(collective pitch) ................ OFF

LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE

APPROVED 355 NP 3.7

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3 ICS INOPERATIVE (GMA 340 H)

1. ICS ....................................................................... OFF
2. COM 1 .................................................................. Check ON, adjust volume
3. [ICS FAIL]* ........................................................... EMER (on copilot side if dual pilot
IFR configuration fitted)

NOTE 1
VHF communications will remain available for the RH pilot only via COM 1
transceiver.
For dual pilot IFR optional configuration an [ICS FAIL] selector allows pilots
intercommunication via COM 1 when set to "EMER" in case of ICS failure.
Audio warnings will be transmitted via the COM 1 audio system.

NOTE 2
Abort or cancel hoisting operations in case of ICS failure.

(*) if installed

4 COCKPIT LIGHTING FAILURE

- Overhead panels and console lighting failure
[SYST LT] ............................................................ OFF
Overhead panels and console will be supplied by the [INST LT] circuit. Overall
brightness will then be adjusted by the pilot instrument panel lighting potentiometer.

- Pilot's instruments lighting failure

[INST LT].............................................................. OFF
Instrument panel will be supplied by the [SYST LT] circuit. Overall brightness will
then be adjusted by the console lighting potentiometer.

- Full cockpit lighting failure

Unlikely but could be a single failure in case of DC power shedding (Smoke in cabin
procedure).
Cockpit dome lights .............................................. ON

APPROVED 355 NP 3.7

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5 NR/N2 INDICATION FAILURES

• NR INDICATION FAILURE
Collective pitch.................................... MAINTAIN TRQ 1 + TRQ 2 ≥ 10 %
NR reading is given by N2 pointers.

LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE

• N2 INDICATION FAILURE
N2 # failure:
NR indication ......................................... CHECK in normal operating range with
TRQ # > 0

CONTINUE FLIGHT

APPROVED 355 NP 3.7

15-18 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
CONTENTS

PAGE
4.1 GENERAL
1 OPERATING LIMITATIONS ........................................................................ 1
2 FLIGHT PLANNING ..................................................................................... 1
3 TAKEOFF AND LANDING DATA ................................................................ 1
4 WEIGHT AND BALANCE DATA .................................................................. 2

4.2 PREFLIGHT CHECK

1 EXTERIOR CHECK ..................................................................................... 1
2 INTERIOR CHECK ...................................................................................... 4
3 TURN AROUND CHECK ............................................................................. 4

4.3 START UP
1 ENGINE PRESTART CHECK...................................................................... 1
2 ENGINE STARTING .................................................................................... 3
3 CRANKING .................................................................................................. 4
4 RUN-UP CHECK ......................................................................................... 5

4.4 TAKEOFF
1 BEFORE TAKEOFF CHECK ....................................................................... 1
2 TAKEOFF CHECK AND PROCEDURE ...................................................... 2

4.5 CLIMB- CRUISE - APPROACH - LANDING

1 CLIMB .......................................................................................................... 1
2 CRUISE ....................................................................................................... 1
3 APPROACH ................................................................................................. 2
4 LANDING ..................................................................................................... 2

APPROVED 355 NP 4.0.P6

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

PAGE
4.6 ENGINE AND ROTOR SHUTDOWN
1 ENGINE SHUTDOWN ................................................................................. 1
2 ROTOR SHUTDOWN .................................................................................. 2

4.7 MISCELLANEOUS PROCEDURES AND DATA

1 TANK CAPACITIES ..................................................................................... 1
2 FUEL TRANSFER ....................................................................................... 2

4.8 EXTREME WEATHER OPERATIONS

1 HIGH WIND OPERATION (WIND ABOVE 30 kt (56 km/h)) ........................ 1
2 COLD WEATHER OPERATION .................................................................. 1

APPROVED 355 NP 4.0.P6

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 4.1
GENERAL

This section contains instructions and procedures for operating the helicopter from the
planning stage, through actual flight conditions, to secure the helicopter after landing.
Normal and standard conditions are assumed in these procedures. Pertinent data in other
sections is referenced when applicable.
The instructions and procedures contained herein are written for the purpose of
standardization and are not applicable to all situations.

1 OPERATING LIMITATIONS
For minimum and maximum limits, refer to SECTION 2.
Each time an operating limitation is exceeded, an appropriate entry shall be made in the
logbook (helicopter, engine, etc.). The entry shall state which limit was exceeded, the
duration, the extreme value attained, and any additional information essential in
determining the maintenance action required.

2 FLIGHT PLANNING
Each flight should be planned adequately to ensure safe operations and to provide the
pilot with the data to be used during flight. Flight planning must comply with helicopter
limitations and performance (Refer to SECTIONS 2, 5, 6 and supplements).

3 TAKEOFF AND LANDING DATA

Refer to SECTION 2 - LIMITATIONS and
SECTION 5 - REGULATORY & COMPLEMENTARY PERFORMANCE DATA.

APPROVED 355 NP 4.1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4 WEIGHT AND BALANCE DATA

Weight and balance data shall be checked throughout the whole flight duration taking in
account payload changes, fuel consumption and transfer. Proceed as follows:
- Refer to SECTION 6 - WEIGHT AND BALANCE
- Check weight of fuel, oil, payload, etc...
- Compute takeoff and anticipated landing gross weights
- Check helicopter centre of gravity (CG) locations throughout the flight duration
- Check that the weight and CG limitations in SECTION 2 are not exceeded. Pay
attention to CG location if a fuel transfer is foreseen
CAUTION
When initial cg location is forward, there is a risk of exceeding forward limitation
during the flight; initial CG location must be adapted accordingly.

APPROVED 355 NP 4.1

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 4.2
PREFLIGHT CHECK

- Make sure that all flightworthiness-required corrective maintenance operations have

been performed.
- These preflight checks can be done without opening any cowlings unless the helicopter
had been parked for more than 2 days or in case of any visible leak or doubt.
- Check that the aircraft area is clean and unobstructed.
- Remove all picketing items if applicable (covers, blade socks, mooring lines,...).
- Carry out the following checks:

1 EXTERIOR CHECK

Figure 1: Sequence of checks

Station 1
- General appearance .................................... Condition – No leakage
- Transparent panels ...................................... Condition - Cleanliness
- Windshield wiper (if installed) ....................... Condition
- MGB – Engine oil cooler air inlet .................. Check no obstruction or foreign objects
- Side slip indicator ......................................... Condition
- Ventilation inlet ............................................. Condition – No obstruction
- Pitot tube(s) .................................................. Cover removed - Condition
- Landing lights ............................................... Condition

APPROVED 355 NP 4.2

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Station 2
- LH front door, door jettison system .............. Condition
- LH rear door ................................................. Condition, closed or open - locked
(sliding door)
- LH cargo bay door........................................ Open
- Loads and objects carried ............................ Stowage
- LH cargo bay door........................................ Closed, locked
- Fuel tank filler plugs ..................................... Closed, locked
- Fuel tank ..................................................... Drained (before the first flight, if
OAT ≥ 0°C), absence of leaks (at the
drains)
- MGB cowling ................................................ Locked – Check:
. no foreign object on transmission deck
. engine oil level
. MGB oil level
. hydraulic fluid level
- All lower fairing panels ................................. Locked
- Landing gear and foot step........................... Attachment – Visual check
- Main rotor head and blades.......................... Visual inspection, no impact
- Engine air intake .......................................... Clear (water, snow, foreign object)
- Engine cowling ............................................. Locked
- Exhaust pipe ................................................ Clear – Cover removed
- Rear cargo door ........................................... Open
- Loads and objects carried ............................ Stowage
- ELT .............................................................. Check ARMED position
- Overspeed test switches .............................. Check OFF position
- Rear cargo door ........................................... Closed, locked
- Oil drains ...................................................... No oil under scuppers
Station 3
- LH static port ................................................ Clear, blank removed
- Tail boom, antennas..................................... Condition - Fairing fasteners locked
- Stabilizer, fin, external lights......................... General condition
- Tail rotor guard (if fitted) ............................... Condition, attachment
- TGB fairing ................................................... Attachment, fasteners locked
- TGB oil level ................................................. Check
- Tail skid ........................................................ Condition, attachment

APPROVED 355 NP 4.2

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Station 4
- Tail rotor head .............................................. Condition, laminated bearing. Check for
separation, cracks, etc...
- Tail rotor blades ........................................... Condition, no impact
- Stabilizer, fin, external lights......................... General condition
- Tail boom, antennas..................................... Condition - Fairing fasteners locked
- RH static port ............................................... Clear, blank removed

Station 5
- Exhaust pipe ................................................ Clear – Cover removed
- Oil drains ...................................................... No oil under scuppers
- Engine air intake .......................................... Clear (water, snow, foreign object)
- Engine cowling ............................................. Locked
- EPU door...................................................... Closed or EPU plugged-in
- All lower fairing panels ................................. Locked
- Landing gear and foot step........................... Attachment – Visual check
- RH cargo bay door ....................................... Open
- Loads and objects carried ............................ Stowage
- RH cargo bay door ....................................... Locked
- Main rotor head and blades.......................... Visual inspection, no impact
- MGB cowling ................................................ Locked – Check:
. no foreign object on transmission deck
. engine oil level
. hydraulic fluid level
- RH rear door ................................................ Condition, closed or open locked (sliding
door)
- RH front door, door jettison system .............. Condition
- External mirror (if fitted) ................................ Set to avoid dazzling (night flight)

APPROVED 355 NP 4.2

15-18 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2 INTERIOR CHECK
- Cabin ............................................................ Clean
- Fire extinguisher........................................... Secured - Checked
- Fuses or breakers ........................................ All set
- Loads and objects carried ............................ Stowed and secured
- Front door jettison systems .......................... Check - Plastic guard condition

3 TURN AROUND CHECK

- Overall aspect ............................................. Condition, cleanliness
- Engine / MGB / TGB .................................... Oil level
- Main and tail rotor blades
(from ground) ............................................... Visual inspection, no impact
- Loads and objects carried ........................... Stowed and secured
- All cowlings .................................................. Locked
- Doors ........................................................... Closed or open-locked (sliding doors)

NOTE

If the aircraft is to be parked for some time between flights, temporary picketing
is recommended by fitting blanks, covers and blade socks (in winds above 40 kt
(74 km/h)).
In this case, perform a complete pre-flight check.

APPROVED 355 NP 4.2

15-18 Page 4
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 4.3
START UP
1 ENGINE PRESTART CHECK
1. Seats and control pedals............................ ADJUST and LOCK
2. Seat belts ................................................... FASTEN
NOTE
Copilot seat belts shall be fastened in all cases.
3. Static pressure selector.............................. NORMAL
4. Collective pitch ........................................... LOCKED
5. Heating* and demisting .............................. OFF
6. Emergency fuel shutoff levers .................... FORWARD, lock wired
7. FFCL (both) ................................................ NEUTRAL
8. Rotor brake control .................................... OFF, fully forward
9. [AUTO-MAN] ............................................. AUTO (guarded)
10. Engine selectors ........................................ OFF
11. Other pushbuttons and switches ................ OFF
12. [S/BY HORIZ]* ........................................... ON – Check lights on
13. [BAT/EPU 1] + [BAT/EPU 2]...................... ON
14. [SYST LT] [INST LT] (pil./copil.) ................ AS REQUIRED
15. [DCT BAT] lights ....................................... CHECK ON
16 FFCL warning lights ................................... ON
17. CWP lights ................................................. CHECK:
• On battery power:
GEN.1 GEN.2 HORN ENG P.1 ENG P.2
INV.1* INV.2* FADEC 1 FADEC 2
A.PITOT* P.PITOT
HYD.1 SERVO HYD.2 MGB P
OVSP1 OVSP2
• With EPU supply:
Same lights as above plus
BAT.1 BAT.2

* If installed

APPROVED 355 NP 4.3

21-09 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

18. [DCT BAT] ................................................. ON – CHECK:

. pushbutton lights off
19. VEMD/CWP ............................................... MONITOR FADEC built-in test
(approx. 10 sec.) then:
FADEC 1 FADEC 2
GOV TRNG
. FFCL red lights off
20. [FUEL XFEED] ........................................ CLOSED
21. [A/COL LT] ................................................ ON
22. [POS LT] .................................................... AS REQUIRED
23. [SERVO TST] ............................................. PRESS: SERVO
24. [ACCU TST] ............................................... PRESS, free travel center yaw pedals
25. [HORN] ...................................................... ON: HORN
26. GPS navigation system .............................. ON
27. CWP........................................................... TEST:
. All warning/caution/advisory lights ........... CHECK illuminated
. VEMD screens test pattern ...................... DISPLAYED
• Upon TEST pushbutton release:
. FLI test on VEMD ..................................... - MONITOR FLI needles:
full deflection then back and pause at
10 for 2 sec. then back to zero.
- Check continuous TONE and triple
"GONG"
. CWP dimmer ............................................ AS REQUIRED
28. VEMD:
. Fuel quantities .......................................... CHECK
. EOP and EOT (both engines) .................. CHECK
. Caution messages ................................... NO MESSAGE
. V.ESS ...................................................... CHECK voltage ≥ 22 V
. Status page .............................................. DISPLAY, check for failure messages
29. Flight Instruments ...................................... CHECK readings
30. Collective pitch ........................................... CHECK free travel LIMIT then LOCK
31. Cyclic stick ................................................. CENTER, friction adjusted or
cyclic trim* ON
* If installed

APPROVED 355 NP 4.3

21-09 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2 ENGINE STARTING
Engines may be started in any order.
• STARTING 1st ENGINE
1. CWP ........................................................ CHECK FADEC # GOV #
2. [GENE #] ................................................. ON
3. [FUEL P #] ............................................... ON
4. Fuel pressure ........................................... CHECK correct
5. Cyclic control............................................ HAND ON
6. Engine # selector ..................................... FLT
7. V.ESS ...................................................... CHECK voltage, if < 17 V, abort starting
sequence
- Monitor:
. N1 increases, DIFF PWR
. TOT increases and stabilizes at about 700°C
. EOP increases
. NR/N2 increases
CAUTION
Abort starting procedure by setting the engine # selector to OFF if:
. Ignition is not effective after 30 sec
. TOT value underscored red and FLI # pointer above max. transient
. FADEC #
. N2 pointer moves consequently beyond NR pointer
- Check:
. At N1 ≥ 50%: GEN. #
. At N1 ≥ 65%: ENG P.# ENG # FAIL OEI MAX
. At NR > 100 rpm: OVSP. #
. At NR ≥ 200 rpm: HYD.1 HYD.2 MGBP SERVO

8. [HORN] .................................................... CHECK audio warning: ON for

250 rpm ≤ NR ≤ 360 rpm
9. NR. ........................................................... CHECK in lower normal operating range
10. Engine # selector safety device ................ SET

APPROVED 355 NP 4.3

21-09 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

• STARTING 2nd ENGINE

Proceed as for first engine, refer to paragraph 2.
- Check:
. At N1 ≥ 50%: GEN. #
. At N1 ≥ 65%: ENG P.# ENG # FAIL OEI MAX
. DIFF PWR

NOTE
In case of failed engine start return the engine starting selector to OFF. Observe
the engine starter limitation given in SECTION 2.5 § 5.

3 CRANKING
The cranking procedure can be performed after an aborted start or for check or
maintenance purposes.
Proceed as follows:
1. Emergency fuel shut-off lever .................... FORWARD
2. Engine # selector ....................................... OFF
3. [AUTO-MAN] # selector ............................. AUTO
4. N1 .............................................................. CHECK ≤ 10 %
5. [FUEL P #] ................................................. ON
6. [CRANK] .................................................... PRESS IN for 30 sec. max.
7. [CRANK] .................................................... RELEASE
8. [FUEL P #] ................................................. OFF

CAUTION
Do not crank the engine with the emergency fuel shutoff valve closed or with the
fuel pump off as this could damage the engine high pressure fuel pump.

NOTE
Observe the engine starter limitation given in SECTION 2.5 § 5.

APPROVED 355 NP 4.3

21-09 Page 4
 FLIGHT MANUAL

RC a
The paragraph 4 - AFTER STARTING CHECKLIST , is modified as follows:
4 AFTER STARTING CHECKLIST
• GENERAL CHECKS
1. EPU (if used) ......................................... DISCONNECT
2. [PITOT] .................................................. ON P.PITOT A.PITOT *
3. [INV 1]* / [INV 2]* ................................... ON
4. [SERVO TST] ........................................ PRESS: SERVO
5. Yaw compensator test ........................... PERFORM:
CAUTION
During yaw compensator check, be sure not to inadvertently unlock the collective
pitch to avoid undue collective pitch rise.
. Yaw hydraulic switch
(collective pitch grip) ...................... OFF, check yaw pedal loads remain low.
. [ACCU TST] .................................. PRESS, check pedal loads increase
. Yaw hydraulic switch
(collective pitch grip) ...................... ON, check no load on yaw pedals
6. Engine and rotor parameters ................. CHECK
7. Voltage and current parameters ............ CHECK
8. Flight instruments .................................. CHECK
9. Radio/Radio navigation systems............ ON – TEST
10. All necessary equipment ........................ ON – TEST
11. External lights ........................................ AS REQUIRED
12. AFCS* .................................................... PERFORM run up checks
13. OEI stops selector ................................. CHECK:
OEI CONT then OEI CONT

(*) If installed

The rest of the paragraph is unchanged.

CAUTION
THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE REMOVED FROM THE MANUAL UNTIL EMBODIMENT
OF MODIFICATION 07.4622.

APPROVED 355 NP 4.3

15-18
*RC*
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4 RUN-UP CHECK
• GENERAL CHECKS
1. EPU (if used) ......................................... DISCONNECT
2. [PITOT] .................................................. ON P.PITOT A.PITOT *
3. [INV 1]* / [INV 2]* ................................... ON
4. [SERVO TST] ........................................ PRESS: SERVO
5. Engine and rotor parameters ................. CHECK
6. Voltage and current parameters ............ CHECK
7. Flight instruments .................................. CHECK
8. Radio/Radio navigation systems ............ ON – TEST
9. All necessary equipment ........................ ON – TEST
10. External lights ........................................ AS REQUIRED
11. AFCS* .................................................... PERFORM run up checks
12. OEI stops selector ................................. CHECK:
OEI CONT then OEI CONT

• SPECIAL CHECKS (1st flight of the day)

P2 valves test:
1. Engine# selector .................................... TRNG
2. TOT of normally operating engine ......... RECORD when stabilized
3. Heating* or demisting system ................ ON
4. TOT of normally operating engine ......... CHECK increase ≥ 15°C
5. Engine# selector .................................... FLT
6. Other engine .......................................... PERFORM the same check
NOTE
If TOT doesn't increase the P2 valve of the idling engine is jammed open.

(*) If installed

APPROVED 355 NP 4.3

21-09 Page 5
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 4.4
TAKEOFF
1 BEFORE TAKEOFF CHECK
1. Doors ......................................................... CLOSED or sliding doors
OPEN LOCKED
2. Engine selectors......................................... FLT – Safety device SET
3. Cyclic and collective frictions ..................... AS REQUIRED
4. Heating* and demisting systems ................ OFF
5. CWP and other warning lights .................... Lights OFF
6. NR/N2 ........................................................ CHECK
7. Flight instruments / VEMD ......................... CHECK parameters
8. Engines ...................................................... BALANCED (engine trim)
9. Landing light ............................................... AS REQUIRED
10. AFCS* ........................................................ ON
11. [SAND FILT]* ............................................. AS REQUIRED
NOTE
Adjust collective and cyclic friction so that friction loads are felt by the pilot when
moving the flight controls.
Engine power shall only be applied when EOT ≥ 10°C.

* If installed

APPROVED 355 NP 4.4

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2 TAKEOFF CHECK AND PROCEDURE

CAUTION

Use of P2 air bleeds is forbidden above engine maximum continuous rating (N1
or TOT).
For safe operation, takeoff path should avoid HV diagram (refer to section 5).
- Gradually increase collective pitch to establish IGE hover at 5 ft (1.5 m) and check:
1. CWP and other warning lights.................. Lights OFF
2. NR/N2 ...................................................... Within normal operating range
3. Power, Pressures, Temperatures ............ Within limitations

- Increase airspeed with HIGE power until IAS = 40 kt (74 km/h), then begin to climb
so as to clear 50 ft (15 m) at IAS = 40 kt (74 km/h).

Figure 1: Takeoff Procedure

APPROVED 355 NP 4.4

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 4.5
CLIMB - CRUISE - APPROACH - LANDING

1 CLIMB
- Above 50 ft (15 m), for maximum climb performance, select Maximum Continuous
Power and optimum climbing speed of (Vy):
IAS = 55 kt (102 km/h)
- Adjust the power during the climb to remain within the limitations; if necessary,
balance engine power with engine trim.
- Heating* and demisting .............................. As required

* If installed

2 CRUISE
- The maximum cruise speed is obtained by observing the MCP limitations. If
necessary, balance engine power with engine trim.
- The recommended cruise is obtained by applying the following torque values:
Hp (ft) 0 4 000 8 000 12 000 16 000 20 000
TRQ % = 2 x 67 2 x 62 2 x 57 2 x 52 2 x 47 2 x 42

- The maximum endurance is obtained by flying at Vy.

- Reduce IAS in turbulence.
- Fuel transfer as required (refer to section 4.7).
NOTE
Below 20 % the rear tank (RH indicator) tends to empty into the front tank.
Leveling is obtained with a 4 % difference (e.g. 10 % front – 6 % rear).

APPROVED 355 NP 4.5

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3 APPROACH
• Approach check:

1. Weight / performance .................................... COMPUTE

2. VNE ............................................................... COMPUTE
3. [FUEL XFEED] .............................................. OFF
4. [SAND FILT]* ................................................ AS REQUIRED
5. Engine selectors ............................................ FLT
6. [AUTO-MAN] selectors .................................. AUTO
7. CWP and other warning lights ....................... OFF
8. NR/N2 ............................................................ CHECK
9. Flight instruments / VEMD ............................. CHECK parameters
10. AFCS* mode.................................................. AS REQUIRED
11. Landing lights ................................................ AS REQUIRED
12. Heating* and demisting system ..................... OFF

CAUTION
Use of P2 air bleeds is forbidden above engine maximum continuous rating (N1
or TOT).

• Final approach:

Enter final approach at Vy then reduce speed gradually so as to clear 50 ft (15 m)

at IAS = 40 kt (72 km/h).

4 LANDING
From the hover, gradually reduce collective pitch and control landing until touchdown
then lower collective pitch to full low pitch and centralize cyclic stick and pedals.
On ground:
- AFCS* .................................................... OFF
- Collective pitch locking .......................... AS REQUIRED

* If installed

APPROVED 355 NP 4.5

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 4.6
ENGINE AND ROTOR SHUTDOWN

1 ENGINE SHUTDOWN
1. Collective pitch ........................................... LOCK
2. Cyclic pitch and yaw control pedals ........... NEUTRAL
3. Engine cooling ........................................... WAIT for 1 min.
4. Landing lights ............................................. OFF
5. [PITOT] [HORN] ......................................... OFF
6. [INV 1]* / [INV 2]* ....................................... OFF
7. Unnecessary systems ................................ OFF
8. Engine selectors (one by one) ................... TRNG then OFF
9. [FUEL P 1] [FUEL P 2]............................... OFF
10. [GENE 1] [GENE 2] .................................... OFF

* If installed

APPROVED 355 NP 4.6

17-38 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2 ROTOR SHUTDOWN
• At NR ≤ 170 rpm (high wind conditions), 140 rpm recommended:
1. Rotor brake ........................................................ APPLY
• When rotors are stopped:
2. Radio – GPS navigation system ........................ OFF
3. [A/COL LT] ........................................................ OFF
4. External lights .................................................... OFF
5. Yaw load compensator check:
- Right pedal moves forward without
pilot input, or right pedal can be
moved forward with low force ........................ CHECK.
- [ACCU TST] .................................................. PRESS for 3 sec.
- Pedals can be re-centered and
remain centered............................................. CHECK.

NOTE
Yaw load compensator maintenance action is required if, before activation
of [ACCU TST] pushbutton, the right pedal cannot be moved forward with
low force.

The [ACCU TST] discharges the yaw load compensator. In order to repeat the
check, it is necessary to re-pressurize the hydraulic system.
6. VEMD ................................................................ CHECK Flight Report page:
· Flight duration
· Engine N1 and N2 cycles (check indicated in white characters, >0)
· Messages FAILURE DETECTED or OVERLIMIT DETECTED:
Revert to maintenance mode and check corresponding chapter
7. [DCT BAT] ......................................................... OFF
8. [BAT/EPU 1] + [BAT/EPU 2] ............................. OFF
9. [S/BY HORIZ]* ................................................... CHECK lights on then OFF
10. Pitots, static ports, air intakes and
exhaust covers, blade socks .............................. AS REQUIRED

* If installed

APPROVED 355 NP 4.6

17-38 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 4.7
MISCELLANEOUS PROCEDURES AND DATA
1 TANK CAPACITIES
- Forward fuel tank maximum capacity:
330 liters (261 kg - 87.2 US Gal - 575 lb)

- Rear fuel tank maximum capacity:

400 liters (316 kg – 105.6 US Gal - 697 lb)

- Fuel gauges

Figure 1: Fuel gauges

NOTE 1
Fuel quantity indication in kg and fuel flow indication in kg/h is based on a fuel
density of 0.79 kg/l.

NOTE 2
The unusable fuel quantity is reached when zero is indicated on the fuel
gauge.
Fuel quantity is displayed in yellow when ≤ 6 % in a tank.
With the two tanks at 6 % remaining fuel, 18 min. flying time remains at MCP.

APPROVED 355 NP 4.7

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2 FUEL TRANSFER
When rear tank is full, fuel quantity in both tanks can be equalized as soon as the front
tank gauge reaches less than 40 %.
1. [FUEL XFEED] ............................................. PRESS, check lights ON
+ on vehicle page
2. Fuel quantities in each tank.......................... CHECK effective transfer
· When required fuel quantity has been transferred:
3. [FUEL XFEED] ............................................. OFF

NOTE
When fuel tank crossfeed is open (gravity transfer) and below 20 %, the rear
tank (RH VEMD display) tends to empty into the front tank. Levelling is
obtained with a 4 % difference (e.g. 10 % front – 6 % rear).

APPROVED 355 NP 4.7

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 4.8
EXTREME WEATHER OPERATIONS
1 HIGH WIND OPERATION (WIND ABOVE 30 kt (56 km/h))
- Parking
• Park the helicopter head into the wind. Maintain rotor brake applied with one
blade at 12 o’clock. Keep blade socks until start up.
• For wind above 40 kt (74 km/h) the helicopter must be tied down.

- Start up
• When the rotor begins to turn, apply a small cyclic stick input into wind.

- Engine and rotor shutdown

• Allow engine oil to cool with engine selectors on FLT position.

NOTE
Start up and shutdown have been demonstrated up to 40 kt (74 km/h) of wind
from any direction and for 50 kt (93 km/h) headwind.

2 COLD WEATHER OPERATION

(Refer to SUP. 4)
Engine start-up procedure when EOT < - 30°C:
1. FFCL # ....................................................... RETARD to idle stop then
2. Engine # starting ........................................ PROCEED as per normal procedure
(refer to SECTION 4.3 paragraph 2)
3. EOT............................................................ MONITOR
• When EOT ≥ 0°C:
4. FFCL # ....................................................... FORWARD slowly to NEUTRAL detent
• After second engine start-up:
5. NR/N2 ........................................................ CHECK
6. EOP ........................................................... CHECK
7. CWP........................................................... CHECK ENG P.#

NOTE
Use of 3 cSt synthetic oil is recommended for low temperature operations.

APPROVED 355 NP 4.8

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 5.1
REGULATORY PERFORMANCE DATA
CONTENTS

PAGE

1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................... 1
2 DEMONSTRATED WIND ENVELOPES.................................................... 1
3 ENGINE HEALTH CHECK ........................................................................ 2
4 AIR DATA SYSTEMS CALIBRATION ....................................................... 6
5 HEIGHT - VELOCITY DIAGRAM ............................................................... 8
6 TWIN ENGINE IGE HOVER PERFORMANCE ......................................... 10
7 TWIN ENGINE OGE HOVER PERFORMANCE ....................................... 11
8 SINGLE ENGINE IGE HOVER PERFORMANCE ..................................... 12
9 SINGLE ENGINE OGE HOVER PERFORMANCE ................................... 13
10 WEIGHT INDEX ........................................................................................ 14
11 TWIN ENGINE RATE OF CLIMB .............................................................. 15
12 WEIGHT INDEX ........................................................................................ 16
13 SINGLE ENGINE RATE OF CLIMB .......................................................... 17
14 TAKEOFF WEIGHTS PERMITTING OEI CLIMB AT 150 FT/MIN
AT 1000 FT ABOVE HELIPORT ELEVATION........................................... 18
15 NOISE LEVEL ........................................................................................... 19

APPROVED 355 NP 5.1.P6

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 5.1
REGULATORY PERFORMANCE DATA

1 INTRODUCTION
The following performance curves apply to the basic version of the aircraft.
Refer to supplement when optional equipment is fitted.

2 DEMONSTRATED WIND ENVELOPES

2.1 STARTING AND STOPPING ROTOR WIND ENVELOPE
Starting and stopping the rotors has been substantiated for winds of 40 kt (74 km/h)
from any direction and for 50 kt (93 km/h) headwind (forward center axis +/- 20°).

2.2 WIND ENVELOPE IN HOVER

Hovering with winds from any direction up to 17 kt (31 km/h) has been demonstrated
over the entire flight envelope although it is not to be taken as a limit.
For example hover at sea level at maximum gross weight and for all CG locations
has been substantiated at 30 kt (56 km/h).

APPROVED 355 NP 5.1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3 ENGINE HEALTH CHECK

3.1 BEFORE TAKEOFF
In HIGE at 5 ft (1.5 m) and before initiating forward flight, pull the collective pitch lever
slightly to ensure that the N1 can increase by at least 1%, without exceeding the
maximum transient takeoff power.
After a safe altitude has been reached, the engine health check may be performed
using the following procedure.
3.2 ENGINE HEALTH CHECK PROCEDURE
The engine health check consists in checking:
- engine power margin (torque margin) and
- engine TOT margin
• Flight conditions:
· Hp ≥ 7000 ft (2100 m), recommended to be NG limited
· Heating* and demisting systems off
· Level flight at Vy AEO
• Procedure for engine 1 check:
· Collective pitch ............... Maintain position
· Engine 2 selector ............ TRNG
With collective pitch:
· FLI .................................. Set OEI MAX training power on ENG 1 in level flight
· NR .................................. Set NR = 370 rpm
· Stabilize .......................... 60 sec.
· Parameters ..................... Record Hp, OAT, NR, TRQ 1, N1 and TOT 1
· Lower collective pitch, ENG 2 selector back to FLT
• Apply same procedure for the other engine

* If installed

3.3 RESULTS ANALYSIS

Refer to the corresponding TOT CHECK chart (Fig 1) and to the ENGINE POWER
CHECK chart for each engine (Fig 2 and Fig. 3).
Use the charts in the direction shown by the arrows in the examples.
The TOT and torques margins can be computed (points T’ and P’) as shown in the
examples.
The engine health check is satisfactory if :
- point “P” is located within the “CORRECT” area on the ENGINE POWER CHECK
chart,
and
- point “T” is located within the “CORRECT” area on the TOT CHECK chart.

APPROVED 355 NP 5.1

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 1

APPROVED 355 NP 5.1

15-18 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 2

APPROVED 355 NP 5.1

15-18 Page 4
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 3

APPROVED 355 NP 5.1

15-18 Page 5
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4 AIR DATA SYSTEMS CALIBRATION

4.1 AIRSPEED INDICATOR CALIBRATION
The calibration curves are plotted on Figure 4.
4.2 ALTIMETER CALIBRATION
The aircraft static ports have errors of ± 0.8 hPa (0.024 inHg) which gives a
maximum error of ± 21 ft (7 m).
4.3 STANDBY STATIC SYSTEM CALIBRATION
When using the “standby static”, errors occur in the pilot’s altimeter or IAS readings
with respect to the normal readings.

To obtain the actual speed or altitude, deduct the values given in the following table
from the instrument indicated readings.

Correction values
Indicated airspeed Indicated altitude

0 0
Hover
(negligible effect) (negligible effect)

Climb
0
IAS = 55kt minus 7 kt (13 km/h)
(negligible effect)
(102 km/h)

Level flight at
minus 15 kt (28 km/h) minus 120 ft (36 m)
MCP

APPROVED 355 NP 5.1

15-18 Page 6
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 4

APPROVED 355 NP 5.1

15-18 Page 7
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5 HEIGHT - VELOCITY DIAGRAM

5.1 ALL UP WEIGHT ≤ 2250 kg (4960 lb)
For all up weights not exceeding 2250 kg (4960 lb), there is no unsafe area when
Hp ≤ 7000 ft (2134 m) (all OAT conditions).

5.2 ALL UP WEIGHT > 2250 kg (4960 lb)

For all up weights above 2250 kg (4960 lb), the height-velocity diagram is specified in
Figure 5.
The flight envelope area to be avoided is defined by 3 points: A, B, C:
- Point A, low hover point and point C, high hover point are defined by:
 a constant zero airspeed
 a variable height depending upon the all up weight and Hp as determined
upon Figure 7
NOTE
When point C matches point A, there is no unsafe area.

- Point B:
Point B is defined by:
 a constant airspeed of 30 kt (56 km/h)
 a constant height of 50 ft (15 m)

APPROVED 355 NP 5.1

15-18 Page 8
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 5

APPROVED 355 NP 5.1

15-18 Page 9
 FLIGHT MANUAL

6 TWIN ENGINE IGE HOVER PERFORMANCE

Figure 6

APPROVED 355 NP 5.1

15-18 Page 10
 FLIGHT MANUAL

7 TWIN ENGINE OGE HOVER PERFORMANCE

Figure 7

APPROVED 355 NP 5.1

15-18 Page 11
 FLIGHT MANUAL

8 SINGLE ENGINE IGE HOVER PERFORMANCE

Figure 8

APPROVED 355 NP 5.1

15-18 Page 12
 FLIGHT MANUAL

9 SINGLE ENGINE OGE HOVER PERFORMANCE

Figure 9

APPROVED 355 NP 5.1

15-18 Page 13
 FLIGHT MANUAL

10 WEIGHT INDEX

Figure 10

APPROVED 355 NP 5.1

15-18 Page 14
 FLIGHT MANUAL

11 TWIN ENGINE RATE OF CLIMB

Figure 11

APPROVED 355 NP 5.1

15-18 Page 15
 FLIGHT MANUAL

12 WEIGHT INDEX

Figure 12

APPROVED 355 NP 5.1

15-18 Page 16
 FLIGHT MANUAL

13 SINGLE ENGINE RATE OF CLIMB

Figure 13

APPROVED 355 NP 5.1

15-18 Page 17
 FLIGHT MANUAL

14 TAKEOFF WEIGHTS PERMITTING OEI CLIMB AT 150 FT/MIN

AT 1000 FT ABOVE HELIPORT ELEVATION

APPROVED 355 NP 5.1

15-18 Page 18
 FLIGHT MANUAL

15 NOISE LEVEL
Noise characteristics at maximum gross weight defined by chapter 8 of the
ICAO annex 16 are as follows:

Noise Level ICAO / EASA CS 36

Flight
measured Noise Limits
phase
(EPNdB) (EPNdB)

Takeoff 88.7 94.2

Flyover 86.7 93.2

Approach 92.8 95.2

The measured noise level corresponds to a reference VH (maximum horizontal speed)

of 119.3 kt (221 km/h) TAS.

APPROVED 355 NP 5.1

15-18 Page 19
 FLIGHT MANUAL

FLIGHT MANUAL

AS 355 NP

SUPPLEMENT

LIST OF SUPPLEMENTS
INCOMPATIBILITY OF USE
EFFECT ON PERFORMANCE DATA

IMPORTANT NOTE

The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given

in the basic flight manual and/or the supplements listed in section supplement 0.

The effectivity of the manual at the latest revision is specified on the list of effective
pages.

Airbus Helicopters D i r e c t i o n T e c h n i q u e S u p p o r t
Aéroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.0.P1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

NOTE
Pages SUP.0.P3 and SUP.0.P4 concern the whole of the Supplements assigned to
the helicopter mentioned on the title pages.
LIST OF SUPPLEMENTS
Some Supplements covering installations or procedures not used on this helicopter
may be withdrawn from this manual. The complete list of Supplements appears on
pages SUP.0.P2.

No. TITLE
LIST OF SUPPLEMENTS - INCOMPATIBILITY OF USE -
0
EFFECT ON PERFORMANCE DATA
EQUIVALENT "CATEGORY A" OEI PROCEDURES AND
1
PERFORMANCE
2 IFR FLIGHT

3 RESERVED

4 INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPERATIONS IN COLD WEATHER

5 RESERVED

6 ENGINE FAILURE TRAINING PROCEDURES (TRAINING MODE)

7 FADEC FAILURE TRAINING PROCEDURE

8 to 9 RESERVED

10 SKIS INSTALLATION "SURFAIR"

EXTERNAL LOAD TRANSPORT
11 "CARGO SWING" 1134 kg (2500 lb)
with "ON-BOARD" release unit (P/N 528-023-51)
12 to 13 RESERVED

14 SAND FILTERS

15 RESERVED

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

16 SFIM 85 T 31 (3-axis)
WITH OPTIONAL COUPLER
EMERGENCY FLOATATION GEAR
17
AERAZUR

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.0.P2

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF SUPPLEMENTS (cond't)

No. TITLE
"AIR EQUIPMENT 76 370" ELECTRICAL HOIST
18
136 kg (300 lb)
19 RESERVED
ELECTRICAL HOIST "BREEZE"
19.1
204 kg (450 lb)
20 RESERVED
21 TWO-PASSENGER FRONT SEAT
22 LONG AND SHORT "DART" FOOTSTEPS
23 FREON AIR CONDITIONER
24 to 25 RESERVED
SPECTROLAB SEARCHLIGHT
26
355 A 08 5129
27 to 51 RESERVED
52 CAMERA CARRYING INSTALLATION
53 to 55.1 RESERVED
55.2 GPS “GARMIN GNS 430/430W”
56 ABSEILING INSTALLATION

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.0.P2

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

COMPOSITION
OF CONDITIONAL REVISIONS (RC)

This Manual assigned to the helicopter mentioned on the title page contains the following
pink pages except those cancelled when the conditions are complied with.

CAUTION

The reader will have to insert the pink pages incorporating the paragraph(s) affected
by the conditional revision so as the paragraph(s) cover(s) the paragraph(s) of the
standard version or of the variant of standard definition.
(1) Paragraph Revision Code:
• R ............................ Revised, to be replaced.
• N ............................ New, to be inserted.

RC SECTION DATE Number Applicable before condition

PARAGRAPH (1)
No. or SUP. CODE of pages is met:

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.0.P3

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

COMPOSITION

OF RUSH REVISIONS (RR)

The Supplements contain the following additional yellow page(s):

CAUTION

The reader will have to insert the yellow pages incorporating the paragraph(s)
affected by the Rush Revision opposite the existing paragraph(s) of the standard
version or of the variant of standard definition.
(1) Paragraph Revision Code:
• R ............................ Revised, to be replaced
• N ............................ New, to be inserted

DATE Number
RR SUPPLEMENT PARAGRAPHS (1)
CODE of pages

SUP.0.P4 20-28 1 N
4.1 and 4.3 *RR* 20-28 1 N
2a SUP.19.1
4.4.3 *RR* 20-28 1 N

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.0.P4

20-28 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

COMPOSITION

OF RUSH REVISIONS (RR)

The Supplements contain the following additional yellow page(s):

CAUTION

The reader will have to insert the yellow pages incorporating the paragraph(s)
affected by the rush revision opposite the existing paragraph(s) of the standard
version or of the variant of standard definition.
(1) Paragraph Revision Code:
• R ............................ Revised, to be replaced
• N ............................ New, to be inserted

RR DATE Number
SECTION or SUP. PARAGRAPHS of pages (1)
No. CODE

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.0.P4

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - EASA CERTIFICATION

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• A .................................. Specific to EASA
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

SECTION
PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)
or SUP.
SUP.0.P1 1 to 1 15-18

SUP.0.P2 1 to 2 15-18

SUP.0.P3 1 to 1 15-18

SUP.0.P4 1 to 1 15-18

SUP.0.P5 1 to 2 15-18 A

SUP.0 1 to 2 15-18

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.0.P5

A 15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) EASA

ISSUE 1: NR 0 to 4:
EASA Approval No. 10034224
NORMAL REVISION 4 - MAY 2010
on March 17th, 2011

ISSUE 2:
Approved on January 12, 2016 under
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 15-18
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J056
Title New issue
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.0.P5

A 15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

INCOMPATIBILITIES OF UTILIZATION BETWEEN

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ITEMS

The following list is non-exhaustive and covers only those EASA-approved equipment
items which are incompatible with one or several other items
NOTE
Incompatibility of installation between equipment items is stated in the Master
Servicing Manual (MSM).

Operation of the following installation: ........... Makes operation with the MANUAL
following optional
Item SECTION
equipment items
No. No.
impossible:
1 Skis installation 7 SUP.10
Transport of external loads:
2 3-4-5-7-8 SUP.11
"Cargo SWING"
3 Emergency floatation gear 2 - 4* - 6 - 7 SUP.17
SUP.18 or
4 Electric hoist 2 - 3* - 5 - 7 - 8 - 9
SUP.19.1
5 Forward two-place seat 2-4 SUP.21
6 Camera carrying installation 3 SUP.52
7 Abseiling installation 1-2-3-4 SUP.56
8 Dual air ambulance installation 2-4 /
9 Rear seat armrests 4 /
10 Drip pan 11 /
11 TAP kit 10 /
(*) Hoisting remains possible when the floats are folded.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.0

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

INFLUENCE OF OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ITEMS

ON PERFORMANCE DATA

When several optional equipment items are used simultaneously, the basic performance
data must be reduced by the value corresponding to the influence of each optional item.
1 APPROVED PERFORMANCE DATA
- Hover performance:
When the installation of optional equipment modifies the hover performance specified
in the basic flight manual SECTION 5, the relevant supplement either provides the
new IGE and OGE charts or prescribes a reduction with respect to the basic flight
manual performance.

- Rate of Climb:
When the rate of climb in the basic flight manual SECTION 5 is modified, the relevant
flight manual supplement either provides a new chart or prescribes a reduction with
respect to the flight manual performance.

2 COMPLEMENTARY PERFORMANCE DATA

The influences of the optional equipment items are specified in SECTION 5.2
"Additional performance data ".

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.0

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

FLIGHT MANUAL

AS 355 NP

SUPPLEMENT

EQUIVALENT "CATEGORY A"

OEI PROCEDURES AND PERFORMANCE

IMPORTANT NOTE

The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given

in the basic flight manual and/or the supplements listed in section supplement 0.

The effectivity of the manual at the latest revision is specified on the list of effective
pages.

Airbus Helicopters D i r e c t i o n T e c h n i q u e S u p p o r t
Aéroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1.P1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - EASA CERTIFICATION

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• A .................................. Specific to EASA
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

SECTION
PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)
or SUP.
SUP.1.P1 1 to 1 15-18

SUP.1.P5 1 to 2 15-18 A

SUP.1 1 to 65 15-18

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1.P5

A 15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) EASA

ISSUE 1: NR 0 to NR 2:
EASA approval No. 10034224
NORMAL REVISION 2 - MAY 2010
on March 17th, 2011

ISSUE 2:
Approved on January 12, 2016 under
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 15-18
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J056
Title New issue
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1.P5

A 15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Subpart 1 - GENERAL DATA

1.1 GENERAL
1.1.1 CERTIFICATION CRITERIA
Though the helicopter is not certified with respect to FAR 29 category A
requirements, this supplement deals with the procedures and performance allowing
the aircraft to be operated in "Equivalent Category A" conditions in the sense of
these operational rules.
With the above restriction and for ease of understanding, all the following
procedures of this supplement will be referred to as "Category A" procedures.

1.1.2 APPLICABILITY
The limitations, procedures and performance specified in the basic flight manual
and in the applicable flight manual supplements remain applicable and are
supplemented or modified by the specific limitations, procedures and performance
data mentioned in this supplement.
Refer to relevant supplements when optional equipment items are installed.

1.1.3 DEFINITIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS

The symbols and definitions given below are used in this supplement.

1.1.3.1 Abbreviations and symbols

AEO All Engines Operating
AHE Above Helipad Elevation
AGL Above Ground Level
AOE Above Obstacle Elevation
h1 Height above helipad elevation at applicable decision point
LDP Landing Decision Point
OEI CONT Max. continuous Contingency Power
OEI MAX 2.5 min. Max. Contingency Power
TDP Takeoff Decision Point
TOGW Takeoff Gross Weight
VTOL Vertical Takeoff and Landing Procedures
VTOSS Takeoff Safety Speed
Vy Best Rate of climb Speed
V1 Speed at applicable decision point
WAT Weight/Altitude/Temperature

1.1.3.2 Definitions
Category A takeoff Determined so that, if one engine fails at any time
after the start of takeoff, the aircraft can:
- prior to TDP return to and stop safely on the takeoff
area, or
- after TDP continue the takeoff and climb out and
attain single-engine forward flight.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Category A landing Determined so that, if one engine fails at any time in

the approach path, the aircraft can:
- prior to LDP climb out from the engine failure point
and attain single-engine forward flight or continue
the approach and stop safely on the landing area, or
- after LDP continue the approach and stop safely on
the landing area.

V1 Indicated Airspeed at Takeoff or Landing Decision

Point.

h1 AGL/AHE height at Takeoff or Landing Decision Point.

VTOSS Airspeed at which the helicopter climbs at a

ROC ≥ 100 ft/min at 200 ft (60 m) AGL/AHE/AOE with:
- 1 engine inoperative,
- 1 engine at OEI MAX power rating.
VTOSS = 40 kt (74 km/h) IAS for any type of
Category A procedure.

Vy Best Rate of climb Speed.

Vy = 55 kt (102 km/h) IAS.

TDP Takeoff Decision Point. The TDP is:

- the first point from which a continued takeoff capability
is assured, and
- the last point in the takeoff path from which a rejected
takeoff is assured within the determined rejected
takeoff distance.

LDP Landing Decision Point.

The LDP is the last point in the approach and landing
path from which a balked landing can be accomplished.

D1 Sum of the following:

Rejected Takeoff − Horizontal distance required to accelerate from the
Distance takeoff initial point up to the TDP where an engine
failure may occur.
− Horizontal distance required to stop the helicopter
safely when one engine fails at the TDP.

D2 Horizontal distance from the takeoff initial point to the

Continued Takeoff point where the helicopter clears the 35 ft (10 m)
Distance AGL/AHE with VTOSS and ROC ≥ 0 after an engine
failure at TDP.

Segment 1 OEI takeoff climbing flight path from 35 ft (10.5 m) to

D3 200 ft (60 m) AGL/AHE/AOE at OEI MAX power setting
and VTOSS. Associated distance: D3.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Acceleration segment Distance required accelerating from VTOSS to Vy in

D4 level flight at OEI MAX power rating.

Segment 2 OEI takeoff climbing flight path from 200 ft (60 m) to

D5 1000 ft (300 m) AGL/AHE/AOE at OEI CONT power
setting and Vy. Associated distance: D5.

D6 Horizontal distance from a point 50 ft (15 m) above the

Continued Landing landing surface to the complete stop point after landing
Distance with one engine inoperative.

D7 Horizontal distance during a go-around from a point

Balked Landing 50 ft (15 m) above the landing surface to a minimum
Distance height of 35 ft (10.5 m) AGL/AHE/AOE point with
VTOSS and ROC ≥ 0 after an engine failure at LDP.

Clear heliport Heliport allowing for applicable flight phase:

− an available takeoff prepared surface at least equal to
the greater of D1 and D2 or,
− an available landing prepared surface at least equal
to the Clear heliport Landing Distance (D6).

Short field heliport Heliport with:

− a takeoff or landing area at least 80 m (264 ft) long,
clear of obstacles and,
− surrounding obstacles with a maximum height of 30 ft
(9 m).

Confined heliport Heliport with:

− a takeoff or landing area of at least 80 m (264 ft) long,
clear of obstacles and,
− a takeoff and landing flight path clear of obstacles
higher than 150 ft (45 m).

1.1.4 TYPES OF CATEGORY A PROCEDURES

The different types of Category A procedures are described in the following
subparts of this supplement:
. Subpart 1: GENERAL DATA
. Subpart 2: CLEAR HELIPORT
. Subpart 3: VTOL – SURFACE LEVEL AND ELEVATED HELIPAD
. Subpart 4: VTOL – SHORT FIELD
. Subpart 5: VTOL – CONFINED HELIPORT

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1.2 LIMITATIONS
The limitations specified in the basic flight manual Section 2 and in the applicable
flight manual supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by
the limitations mentioned in this supplement.

1.2.1 APPROVED TYPES OF OPERATIONS

The AS 355 NP is approved to operate in "equivalent Category A" operations from
clear heliports and from heliports/helipads requiring VTOL operations (refer to
Subparts 3 to 5 of this supplement).

1.2.2 APPROVED ALTITUDE / OAT ENVELOPE

OAT limitations : -35°C to ISA+35 limited to 50°C
Altitude limitations :
. A : Clear heliport operations, Hσ = 8500 ft (2550 m)
. A + B : VTOL operations, Hσ = 9000 ft (2700 m)

Figure 1: Approved Category A flight envelope.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 4
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1.2.3 ENGINE POWER CHECK

Category A operations are prohibited if the engine power check is not satisfactory
on both engines.

1.2.4 MAXIMUM TAKEOFF AND LANDING WEIGHT

The maximum take-off and landing weights according to the ambient conditions are
specified:
- by the type of procedure
- by the distant obstacles along the takeoff path
For further data concerning the maximum takeoff and landing weight related to the
applicable procedure, refer to the applicable subpart of this supplement.

1.2.5 HELICOPTER CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS

1.2.5.1 Configuration requirements
When operating the helicopter in Category A, the following equipment must be
installed and operational:
- Artificial horizon
- Altimeter
- Radar altimeter for:
. surface level helipad operations
. short field heliport operations
- Swiveling retractable landing light (for night operations)

1.2.5.2 Operational compatibility

Category A operations are prohibited with doors opened or removed.
Category A takeoff and landing must be performed with heating and demisting
systems off.

1.2.6 WIND LIMITATIONS

Category A takeoff and landing procedures are prohibited for tail wind component
flight conditions.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 5
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1.3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES – GENERAL DATA

The data in this subsection are applicable to all applicable Category procedures.

NOTE
For detailed information concerning Category A emergency procedures
after an engine failure, refer to subparts 2 to 5 of this supplement for
applicable procedure.

1.3.1 SINGLE ENGINE FAILURE DURING TAKEOFF

If one engine fails prior to TDP the takeoff must be rejected.
If one engine fails after TDP the takeoff must be continued.

1.3.2 SINGLE ENGINE FAILURE DURING LANDING

If one engine fails prior to LDP the pilot may decide to balk the landing or to
continue the approach.
If one engine fails after LDP the landing must be continued.

1.3.3 OEI MAX/OEI CONT TOPPING SELECTION

A topping pushbutton on collective pitch grip provides selection between OEI MAX
(2.5 min. Max. contingency power) and OEI CONT (Continuous contingency power)
engine power limitations.
At power-up the OEI MAX engine power limits are set by default.
OEI CONT is automatically deactivated and OEI MAX automatically selected
if NR ≤ 330 rpm.
NOTE
In AEO mode the OEI CONT topping shall not be selected.
Although N1 are automatically limited to corresponding selected rating,
torque limits are to be controlled by the pilot.

1.4 NORMAL PROCEDURES – GENERAL DATA

The data in this subsection are applicable to all applicable Category procedures.
Engine power check is to be performed as required by basic flight manual
SECTION 5.
For further normal procedures refer to subparts 2 to 5 of this supplement for
applicable procedure.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 6
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1.5 PERFORMANCE
The data in this subpart are applicable to all applicable Cat. A procedures.

1.5.1 ENGINE POWER CHECK

For power check procedure refer to basic Flight Manual SECTION 5.
1.5.2 OEI CLIMB PERFORMANCE
OEI rate of climb performance chart for OEI CONT power setting at Vy is presented
in basic Flight Manual SECTION 5.
1.5.3 OEI CRUISE PERFORMANCE
The OEI cruise flight service ceiling in level cruise flight is presented in Figure 2 of
this subpart.
1.5.4 WIND INFORMATION
Wind accountability is unfactored.
NOTE
Unless otherwise authorized by operating regulations, it is not authorized to
take more than 50 % of the actual headwind component in performance
computation.
1.5.5 CLIMBOUT PERFORMANCE
Segment 1, acceleration segment and segment 2 performance and distances are
presented in Figures 4 to 7 of this subpart.
1.5.6 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
The table below presents the list of optional equipment items which affect Category
A limitations and performance when installed.
OEI cruise
ROC Height gain/100m (330
OPTIONAL flight Reduce
SUP Reduce ROC ft)
EQUIPMENT max. weight
by: Reduce gain value by:
value by:
EMERGENCY 50 ft/min AEO. 8 ft (2.5 m) segment 1.
FLOATATION 13 25 kg (55 lb)
GEAR. 30 ft/min OEI. 5 ft (1.5 m) segment 2.
FREON AIR 20 ft/min AEO. 10 ft (3 m) segment 1.
CONDITIONER 18 30 kg (66 lb)
(when operating). 35 ft/min OEI. 5 ft (1.5 m) segment 2.
15 ft (4.5 m) for ROC
2.5 % for > 400 ft/min segment 1.
LONG OR SHORT
22 ROC > 400 ft/min. 0
FOOTSTEPS. 5 ft (1.5 m) for ROC
OEI or AEO.
> 400 ft/min segment 2.
ELECTRIC HOIST 100 ft/min AEO. 5 ft (1.5 m) segment 1.
12 15 kg (33 lb)
136 kg (any type). 20 ft/min OEI. 3 ft (1.0 m) segment 2.
23 100 ft/min AEO. 5 ft (1.5 m) segment 1.
ELECTRIC HOIST
and 15 kg (33 lb)
204 kg (any type). 20 ft/min OEI. 3 ft (1.0 m) segment 2.
23.1

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 7
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1.5.7 OEI CRUISE FLIGHT

Figure 2: OEI Cruise flight service ceiling.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 8
 FLIGHT MANUAL

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 9
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 3: Weight index.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 10
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 4: Segment 1 Height gain for 100 m horizontal distance / D3.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 11
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 5: Weight index.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 12
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 6: Segment 2 Height gain for 100 m horizontal distance / D5.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 13
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 7: D4 - Distance required to accelerate from VTOSS to Vy.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 14
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Subpart 2 - CLEAR HELIPORT

2.1 GENERAL DATA
This subsection provides information necessary for category A operations at clear
heliports.
These procedures apply when the available distance for takeoff or landing at the
heliport is at least equal to the takeoff and landing distances required by this subpart.

2.1.1 DEFINITIONS
TDP . V1 = 30 kt (56 km/h)
. h1 = 15 ft (4.5 m) AGL

LDP . V1 = 40 kt (74 km/h)

. h1 = 50 ft (15 m) AGL
. ROD ≤ 500 ft/m

2.2 LIMITATIONS
(in addition to the limitations given in part 1 "GENERAL DATA")

2.2.1 MAXIMUM TAKEOFF AND LANDING WEIGHT

For maximum takeoff and landing weight refer to Figure 8.

2.2.2 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

Refer to the table below for maximum takeoff and landing weight penalty when
optional equipment items are installed:

OPTIONAL Takeoff and landing maximum weight.

SUP
EQUIPMENT Reduce Fig 8 value by:

EMERGENCY
FLOATATION GEAR
9-17 25 kg (55 lb)

FREON AIR
CONDITIONER 9-23 30 kg (66 lb)
(when operating)
ELECTRIC HOIST
136 kg (300 lb).
9-18 15 kg (33 lb)

ELECTRIC HOIST
204 kg(450 lb).
9-19 15 kg (33 lb)

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 15
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 8: Cat A Clear heliport - Maximum takeoff and landing weight

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 16
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2.3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

2.3.1 CLEAR HELIPORT TAKEOFF: ENGINE FAILURE PRIOR TO TDP
1. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST OEI MAX power and NR ≥ 365 rpm
2. Cyclic stick .................................. REDUCE GROUND SPEED with a 15° nose-
up attitude
• When ground speed nears zero:
3. Cyclic stick .................................. REDUCE NOSE-UP attitude below 8°
4. Collective pitch ........................... INCREASE to cushion touchdown
• After touch-down:
5. Collective pitch.............................. LOWER slowly to full low pitch
• Once the aircraft has stopped:
6. Engine shutdown ....................................... PERFORM

NOTE
If ground surface permits, make the maneuver easier by performing a running
landing.

Figure 9: OEI rejected takeoff profile

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 17
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2.3.2 CLEAR HELIPORT TAKEOFF: ENGINE FAILURE AFTER TDP

1. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST OEI MAX power and NR ≥ 365 rpm
2. Cyclic stick .................................. INCREASE SPEED to VTOSS
(40 kt / 78 km/h IAS)
• Once VTOSS is reached:
3. Cyclic stick .................................. INITIATE CLIMB at VTOSS
4. Collective pitch ........................... MAINTAIN OEI MAX power
• Upon reaching 200 ft AGL:
5. Cyclic stick .................................. INCREASE SPEED to Vy
(55 kt / 102 km/h IAS)
• Upon reaching Vy:
6. OEI stop ....................................... SELECT OEI CONT
7. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST OEI CONT and NR ≥ 365 rpm
8. Climb ............................................ CONTINUE at Vy
9. Failed engine shutdown ................ PERFORM

Figure 10: OEI continued takeoff profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 18
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2.3.3 CLEAR HELIPORT LANDING: ENGINE FAILURE PRIOR LDP

NOTE
The pilot may decide to balk the landing or to continue the approach. If the
decision is to continue the approach, refer to § 2.3.4 "ENGINE FAILURE
AFTER LDP" of this subpart.
Heating and demisting systems must be off before final approach.

Balked landing procedure:

1. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST OEI MAX power and NR ≥ 365 rpm
2. Cyclic stick .................................. INITIATE CLIMB at VTOSS
(40 kt / 74 km/h IAS)
• Upon reaching 200 ft AGL:
3. Cyclic stick .................................. INCREASE SPEED to Vy
(55 kt / 102 km/h IAS)
• Upon reaching Vy:
4. OEI stop ....................................... SELECT OEI CONT
5. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST OEI CONT and NR ≥ 365 rpm
6. Climb ............................................ CONTINUE at Vy
7. Failed engine shutdown ................ PERFORM

Figure 11: OEI Balked landing profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 19
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2.3.4 CLEAR HELIPORT LANDING: ENGINE FAILURE AFTER LDP

NOTE
The landing is mandatory if engine failure occurs after the LDP.

1. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST if necessary to maintain

NR ≥ 365 rpm
2. Cyclic stick .................................. REDUCE GROUND SPEED
with a 15° nose-up max. attitude
• When ground speed nears zero:
3. Cyclic stick .................................. REDUCE NOSE-UP attitude below 8°
4. Collective pitch ........................... INCREASE to cushion touchdown
• After touch-down:
5. Collective pitch.............................. LOWER slowly to full low pitch
• Once the aircraft has stopped:
6. Engine shutdown .......................... PERFORM

NOTE
If ground surface permits, make the maneuver easier by performing a running
landing.

Figure 12: OEI landing profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 20
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2.4 NORMAL PROCEDURES

2.4.1 STANDARD CLEAR HELIPORT TAKEOFF PROCEDURE
1. Maximum takeoff weight ................................ DETERMINE (Fig. 15)
2. Rejected takeoff distance (D1)....................... DETERMINE (Fig. 16)
3. Continued takeoff distance (D2) .................... DETERMINE (Fig. 18)
4. Before takeoff checklist .................................. PERFORMED
5. Radar altimeter (if installed) ........................... SET BUG at 15 ft (TDP height)
6. Hover IGE at 7 ft skids height ........................ ESTABLISH
7. CWP and other warning lights ....................... OFF
8. All parameters................................................ Normal operating range
9. Takeoff:
Start nose down rotation (~ -15°) and simultaneously smoothly increase power
(0.5 to 0.7 FLI) for acceleration. Adjust pitch attitude at about 25 kt (46 km/h) to
achieve 30 kt (56 km/h) at 15 ft (4.5 m)
• After TDP:
10. Airspeed......................................................... INCREASE to Vy
11. Power............................................................. AS REQUIRED

Figure 13: Clear heliport AEO takeoff profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 21
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2.4.2 STANDARD CLEAR HELIPORT LANDING PROCEDURE

1. Maximum landing weight ............................... DETERMINE (Fig. 15)
2. Landing distances .......................................... DETERMINE (Fig. 18)
3. Approach check-list ....................................... PERFORM
4. Radar altimeter (if installed) ........................... SET BUG at 50 ft/15 m
(LDP height)
5. Final approach:
Enter final approach at Vy then reduce speed gradually so as to clear
50 ft (15 m) at IAS = 40 kt (72 km/h) with a ROD ≤ 500 ft/min
• After LDP:
6. Collective and cyclic controls ......................... ADJUST to maintain desired
trajectory, terminate approach

Figure 14: Clear heliport AEO landing profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 22
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2.5 CLEAR HELIPORT PERFORMANCE DATA

2.5.1 MAXIMUM TAKEOFF AND LANDING WEIGHT
Refer to Figure 8 § 2.2 "Maximum takeoff and landing weight on clear heliport" of
this subpart.

2.5.2 AEO TAKEOFF AND LANDING DISTANCES

Normal Takeoff distances:
- Distance to clear 50 ft (15 m) at 40 kt (74 km/h) IAS (D50) during normal takeoff
procedure (refer to SECTION 4):
. D50 = 160 m (525 ft) for the whole flight envelope
- Distance to clear 200 ft (60 ft) at Vy (D200) during normal takeoff procedure
(refer to SECTION 4):
. For Hp ≤ 3000 ft (900 m): D200 = 500 m (1640 ft)

. For 3000 < Hp ≤ 6000 ft (900 < Hp ≤ 1800 m):

D200 = 900 m (3000 ft)

. For 6000 < Hp ≤ 8500 ft (1800 < Hp ≤ 2550 m):

D200 = 1250 m (4100 ft)
Normal Landing distances:
- The landing distance to clear 50 ft (15 m) at 40 kt (74 km/h) IAS during normal
landing procedure (refer to SECTION 4) is equivalent to the OEI continued
landing/balked landing distance, refer to Fig 18 of this subpart.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 23
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2.5.3 CLEAR HELIPORT OEI TAKEOFF DISTANCES

Figure 15: D1 - Clear Heliport Rejected takeoff distance.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 24
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 16: D2 - Clear Heliport Continued takeoff distance.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 25
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2.5.4 CLIMBOUT PERFORMANCE

The climbout flight path begins at the end of the "Continued takeoff distance" or
"Balked landing distance" at 35 feet (10.5 m) AGL or higher and VTOSS and is
divided into Segment 1, up to 200 ft AGL, and Segment 2, from 200 ft (60 m) to
1000 ft (300 m) AGL at Vy.
The flight planning has to take into account the existing obstacles along flight path;
the following charts should be used for determining the takeoff flight path:

1. Segment 1 (D3) ......................................... Fig. 4 (refer to subpart 1)

2. Acceleration distance to Vy (D4)................ Fig. 7 (refer to subpart 1)
3. Segment 2 (D5) ......................................... Fig. 6 (refer to subpart 1)

Figure 17: OEI Clear Heliport Climbout profile

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 26
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2.5.5 CLEAR HELIPORT OEI LANDING DISTANCES

Figure 18: D6/D7 - OEI Landing distance/Balked landing distances.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 27
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Subpart 3 - VTOL PROCEDURES

SURFACE LEVEL OR ELEVATED HELIPAD
3.1 GENERAL DATA
This subpart provides information necessary for category A operations at surface
level or elevated helipads with maneuvering area and takeoff/landing flight path clear
of obstacles.
3.1.1 DEFINITIONS
TDP . V1 = 0
. h1 = 90 ft (27 m) AHE

LDP . V1 = 30 kt (56 km/h)

. h1 = 90 ft (27 m) AHE
. ROD ≤ 300 ft/min.

R1 Horizontal distance from initial takeoff up to the extreme

Rearward aft point of the takeoff profile
takeoff distance

D6-LDP Horizontal distance from LDP up to the complete stop

Continued after engine failure at LDP
landing distance
from LDP

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 28
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3.2 LIMITATIONS
(in addition to the limitations given in part 1 "GENERAL DATA")

3.2.1 HELIPAD DATA

The surface of the helipads shall be solid to generate ground effect.

Surface level helipad:

Helipad on ground or on the water at negligible height over the surface having
dimensions, under day and night conditions, of at least:
- 15 x 15 m (50 x 50 ft) or
- 20 m (67 ft) in diameter

Elevated helipad:
Helipad on a raised structure over the surface having dimensions, under day and
night conditions, of at least:
- 20 x 20 m (67 x 67 ft) or
- 20 m (67 ft) in diameter

NOTE
For Category A small size (≤ R1 distance) elevated helipad operations, the
barometric altimeter is to be used as source for LDP/TDP identification,
according to the following correspondence table (reference for barometric
altimeter is QNH):

RADALT Altimeter value RADALT Altimeter value

height difference height difference
TDP LDP
90 ft (27 m) +70 ft (21 m) 90 ft (27 m) +100 ft (30 m)

3.2.2 MAXIMUM TAKEOFF AND LANDING WEIGHT

For maximum takeoff and landing weight refer to Figure 19.

NOTE 1
A height-velocity area to be avoided does not exist when:
- using an all up weight derived from chart Fig. 3-1 and,
- following the Category A VTOL normal takeoff and landing procedures.

NOTE 2
With current optional equipment installed, no weight penalty is to be taken in
account for Category A VTOL Helipad operations.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 29
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 19: Maximum takeoff and landing weight for VTOL operations

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 30
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3.3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

3.3.1 HELIPAD TAKEOFF: ENGINE FAILURE PRIOR TO TDP (before
fuselage rotation)
1. Cyclic stick .................................. ADJUST ATTITUDE to reach landing area
2. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST OEI MAX power and NR ≥ 365 rpm
• At height around 30 ft (9 m) AHE:
3. Collective pitch ........................... INCREASE continuously to cushion
touchdown
• At height around 5 ft (1.5 m)AHE:
4. Cyclic stick .................................. CONTROL to minimize ground speed
5. Collective pitch ........................... INCREASE to max. pitch if necessary to
cushion touchdown
• After touch-down:
6. Collective pitch.............................. FULL LOW pitch
7. Engine shutdown .......................... PERFORM

Figure 20: VTOL Helipad Rejected takeoff profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 31
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3.3.2 HELIPAD TAKEOFF: ENGINE FAILURE AFTER OR AT TDP

(fuselage rotation started)
1. Cyclic stick .................................. NOSE-DOWN to -25°
2. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST OEI MAX power and NR ≥ 365 rpm
• As soon as 25 kt (46 km/h) IAS is reached:
3. Cyclic stick .................................. REDUCE NOSE-DOWN attitude.
4. Collective pitch ........................... MAINTAIN OEI MAX power
• Once VTOSS is reached:
5. Cyclic stick .................................. INITIATE CLIMB at VTOSS
6. Collective pitch ........................... MAINTAIN OEI MAX power
• Upon reaching 200 ft (60 m) AHE:
7. Cyclic stick .................................. INCREASE SPEED to Vy
(55 kt / 102 km/h IAS)
• Upon reaching Vy:
8. OEI stop ....................................... SELECT OEI CONT
9. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST OEI CONT and NR ≥ 365 rpm
10. Climb ............................................ CONTINUE at Vy
11. Failed engine shutdown ................ PERFORM

Figure 21: VTOL Helipad OEI Continued takeoff profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 32
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3.3.3 HELIPAD LANDING: ENGINE FAILURE PRIOR LDP

NOTE
The pilot may decide to balk the landing or to continue the approach. If the
decision is to continue the approach, refer to § 3.3.4 "ENGINE FAILURE
AFTER LDP" of this subpart.
Heating and demisting systems must be off before final approach.

Balked landing procedure:

1. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST OEI MAX power and NR ≥ 365 rpm
2. Cyclic stick .................................. NOSEDOWN attitude (~15°)
3. Cyclic stick .................................. INITIATE CLIMB at VTOSS
• Upon reaching 200 ft AGL:
4. Cyclic stick .................................. INCREASE SPEED to Vy
(55 kt / 102 km/h IAS)
• Upon reaching Vy:
5. OEI stop ....................................... SELECT OEI CONT
6. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST OEI CONT and NR ≥ 365 rpm
7. Climb ............................................ CONTINUE at Vy
8. Failed engine shutdown ................ PERFORM

Figure 22: VTOL Helipad OEI Balked landing profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 33
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3.3.4 HELIPAD LANDING: ENGINE FAILURE AFTER LDP

NOTE
The landing is mandatory if engine failure occurs after the LDP.

1. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST if necessary to maintain

NR ≥ 365 rpm
2. Cyclic stick .................................. REDUCE GROUND SPEED smoothly
• Before touchdown:
3. Cyclic stick .................................. ESTABLISH landing attitude to minimise
ground speed
4. Collective pitch ........................... INCREASE to cushion touchdown
• After touch-down:
5. Collective pitch.............................. LOWER to full low pitch
6. Engine shutdown .......................... PERFORM

Figure 23: VTOL Helipad OEI continued landing profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 34
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3.4 NORMAL VTOL PROCEDURES

3.4.1 STANDARD HELIPAD VERTICAL TAKEOFF PROCEDURE
1. Maximum takeoff weight ............................ DETERMINE (Fig. 25)
2. Before takeoff checklist .............................. PERFORM
3. Radar altimeter (surface level pad) ............ SET BUG at 90 ft/27 m (TDP height)
For elevated helipad, the barometric altimeter is to be used to identify TDP.
Before starting elevated helipad operations, the TDP should be defined as follows:
Reference: the reference is the helicopter on the elevated helipad with engines
at flight idle at full low pitch setting or before engines started.
Procedure: Read the indicated barometric altitude and add 70 ft (21 m) to
obtain the TDP altitude for barometric altimeter indication.

NOTE
Ground running with high pitch setting or using IGE hover as reference will
lead to erroneous results.

4. Hover IGE at 5 ft (1.5 m) height ................. ESTABLISH

5. CWP and other warning lights ................... OFF
6. All parameters............................................ CHECK normal operating range
7. Vertical takeoff ........................................... INITIATE
Establish ROC of ~200 ft/min and maintain front part of the helipad in the lower
part of lower chin window.
• Reaching TDP at 90 ft (27 m) AHE:
8. Cyclic stick ................................................. Start nose down rotation.
Adjust pitch attitude at about 25 kt
(46 km/h) to achieve 30 kt (56 km/h)
in level flight.

NOTE
Consider TDP is reached when initiating fuselage rotation.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 35
 FLIGHT MANUAL

• After TDP:
9. Airspeed .................................................... INCREASE to Vy
10. Power ........................................................ AS REQUIRED

Figure 24: VTOL Helipad AEO takeoff profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 36
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3.4.2 STANDARD VTOL HELIPAD LANDING PROCEDURE

1. Maximum landing weight ........................... DETERMINE (Fig. 25)
2. Approach check-list ................................... PERFORM
3. Radio altimeter (surface level pad) ............ SET BUG at 90 ft/27 m (LDP height)
For elevated helipad, the barometric altimeter is to be used to identify LDP.
Before entering elevated helipad approach, the LDP should be defined as follows:
Reference: Set the accurate local QNH of the landing area.
Procedure: Add 100 ft (30 m) to the helipad announced altitude to obtain the
LDP altitude for barometric altimeter indication.
4. Final approach:
Enter final approach at Vy then reduce speed gradually so as to clear 300 ft
(90 m) at IAS = 40 kt (72 km/h) and reach LDP at 90 ft (15 m) AHE at
IAS = 30 kt (56 km/h) with a ROD ≤ 300 ft/min.
• After LDP:
5. Collective and cyclic controls ..................... ADJUST to maintain desired
trajectory, reduce speed
continuously up to a hover at 5 ft
(1.5 m) above landing point
6. Landing ...................................................... Slow vertical descent up to
touchdown

Figure 25: VTOL Helipad AEO landing profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 37
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3.5 VTOL HELIPAD PERFORMANCE DATA

3.5.1 MAXIMUM TAKEOFF AND LANDING WEIGHT

Figure 26: Maximum takeoff and landing weight for VTOL operations

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 38
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3.5.2 CLIMBOUT PERFORMANCE

The climbout flight path begins at the end of the "Continued takeoff distance" or
"Balked landing distance" at 35 ft (10.5 m) AGL/AHE or higher and VTOSS and is
divided into Segment 1, up to 200 ft (60 m) AGL/AHE, and Segment 2, from 200 ft
(60 m) to 1000 ft (300 m) AGL/AHE at Vy.
The flight planning has to take into account the existing obstacles along flight path;
the following charts should be used for determining the takeoff flight path:

1. Segment 1 distance (D3) ........................... Fig. 4 (refer to subpart 1)

2. Acceleration distance to Vy (D4)................ Fig. 7 (refer to subpart 1)
3. Segment 2 distance (D5) ........................... Fig. 6 (refer to subpart 1)

Figure 27: VTOL Helipad OEI climbout profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 39
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3.5.3 VTOL HELIPAD TAKEOFF AND LANDING DISTANCES TABLE

CONDITIONS
- HEATING AND DEMISTING SYSTEMS OFF VTOL
- ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE AT TDP/LDP HELIPAD
- OEI MAX POWER RATING
- MAXIMUM TAKEOFF OR LANDING WEIGHT TAKEOFF AND LANDING
- SURFACE LEVEL OR ELEVATED HELIPAD DISTANCES
-

Rearward takeoff distance (R1) -35 m (115 ft)

Rejected takeoff distance (D1) Within pad dimensions
Continued takeoff distance (D2) 240 m (790 ft)
Continued landing distance (D6) 120 m (400 ft)
Continued landing distance (D6-LDP) 210 m (690 ft)
Balked landing distance (D7-LDP) 210 m (690 ft)

Figure 28: VTOL Helipad takeoff and landing distances

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 40
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Subpart 4 - VTOL PROCEDURES

SHORT FIELD HELIPORT
4.1 GENERAL DATA
This subpart provides information necessary for Category A operations at short field
heliports with a takeoff and landing area at least 80 m (264 ft) long, clear of obstacles
and a takeoff and landing flight path clear of obstacles higher than 30 ft (9 m).
4.1.1 DEFINITIONS
TDP . V1 = 0
. h1 = 120 ft (36 m) AGL

LDP . V1 = 30 kt (56 km/h)

. h1 = 120 ft (36 m) AGL
. ROD ≤ 300 ft/min.

R1 Horizontal distance from initial takeoff up to the extreme

Rearward aft point of the takeoff profile.
takeoff distance

D6-LDP Horizontal distance from LDP up to the complete stop

Continued after engine failure at LDP.
landing distance
from LDP

4.2 LIMITATIONS
(in addition to the limitations given in subpart 1 "GENERAL DATA").

4.2.1 SHORT FIELD HELIPORT DATA

The surface of the heliport shall be solid to generate ground effect.
Takeoff and landing area minimum length: 80 m (264 ft).
Maximum surrounding obstacles height: 30 ft (9 m).

NOTE
For Category A short field operations, the radar altimeter is to be installed and
operational for TDP and LDP identification.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 41
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.2.2 MAXIMUM TAKEOFF AND LANDING WEIGHT

For maximum takeoff and landing weight refer to Figure 29.

NOTE 1
A height-velocity area to be avoided does not exist when:
- using an all up weight derived from chart Fig. 4-1 and,
- following the Category A VTOL normal takeoff and landing procedures.

NOTE 2
With current optional equipment installed, no weight penalty is to be taken
into account for Category A VTOL Short Field operations.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 42
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 29: Maximum takeoff and landing weight for VTOL operations

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 43
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

4.3.1 SHORT FIELD TAKEOFF: ENGINE FAILURE PRIOR TO TDP

(before fuselage rotation)
1. Cyclic stick .................................. NOSEDOWN ATTITUDE to reach landing
area (-5 to -15° upon height)
2. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST OEI MAX power and NR ≥ 365 rpm
• As soon as positive ground speed established (~15 kt/28 km/h):
3. Cyclic stick .................................. REDUCE NOSEDOWN attitude (0 to -5°) to
reach landing area
• At height around 25 ft (7.5 m) AGL:
4. Collective pitch ........................... INCREASE continuously to cushion
touchdown
5. Cyclic stick .................................. REDUCE GROUND SPEED
• At height around 10 ft (3 m) AGL:
6. Cyclic stick .................................. CONTROL to establish minimum ground
speed at touchdown
7. Collective pitch ........................... INCREASE to max. pitch if necessary to
cushion touchdown
• After touch-down:
8. Collective pitch.............................. FULL LOW pitch
9. Engine shutdown .......................... PERFORM

Figure 30: VTOL Short Field Rejected takeoff profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 44
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.3.2 SHORT FIELD TAKEOFF: ENGINE FAILURE AFTER OR AT TDP

(fuselage rotation started)
1. Cyclic stick .................................. NOSE-DOWN to -25°
2. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST OEI MAX power and NR ≥ 365 rpm
• As soon as 25 kt (46 km/h) IAS is reached:
3. Cyclic stick .................................. REDUCE NOSE-DOWN attitude
4. Collective pitch ........................... MAINTAIN OEI MAX power
• Once VTOSS (40 kt/74 km/h) is reached:
5. Cyclic stick .................................. INITIATE CLIMB at VTOSS
6. Collective pitch ........................... MAINTAIN OEI MAX power
• Upon reaching 200 ft (60 m)AGL:
7. Cyclic stick .................................. INCREASE SPEED to Vy
(55 kt / 102 km/h IAS)
• Upon reaching Vy:
8. OEI stop ....................................... SELECT OEI CONT
9. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST OEI CONT and NR ≥ 365 rpm
10. Climb ............................................ CONTINUE at Vy
11. Failed engine shutdown ................ PERFORM

Figure 31: VTOL Short Field OEI Continued takeoff profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 45
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.3.3 SHORT FIELD LANDING: ENGINE FAILURE PRIOR TO LDP

NOTE
The pilot may decide to balk the landing or to continue the approach. If the
decision is to continue the approach, refer to § 4.3.4 "ENGINE FAILURE
AFTER LDP" of this subpart.
Heating and demisting systems must be off before final approach.

Balked landing procedure:

1. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST OEI MAX power and NR ≥ 365 rpm
2. Cyclic stick .................................. INCREASE IAS to VTOSS (40 kt/74 km/h)
3. Cyclic stick .................................. INITIATE CLIMB at VTOSS
• Upon reaching 200 ft (60 m) AGL:
4. Cyclic stick .................................. INCREASE SPEED to Vy
(55 kt / 102 km/h IAS)
• Upon reaching Vy:
5. OEI stop ....................................... SELECT OEI CONT
6. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST OEI CONT and NR ≥ 365 rpm
7. Climb ............................................ CONTINUE at Vy
8. Failed engine shutdown ................ PERFORM

Figure 32: VTOL Short field OEI Balked landing profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 46
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.3.4 SHORT FIELD LANDING: ENGINE FAILURE AFTER LDP

NOTE
The landing is mandatory if engine failure occurs after the LDP.

1. Collective pitch ........................................ ADJUST if necessary to maintain

NR ≥ 365 rpm
2. Cyclic stick ............................................... REDUCE GROUND SPEED
smoothly
• Before touchdown:
3. Cyclic stick ............................................... ESTABLISH landing attitude to
minimise ground speed
4. Collective pitch ........................................ INCREASE to cushion touchdown
• After touch-down:
5. Collective pitch........................................... LOWER to full low pitch
6. Engine shutdown ....................................... PERFORM

Figure 33: VTOL Short Field OEI continued landing profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 47
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.4 NORMAL VTOL SHORT FIELD PROCEDURES

4.4.1 STANDARD VTOL SHORT FIELD TAKEOFF PROCEDURE
1. Maximum takeoff weight ............................ DETERMINE (Fig. 35)
2. Before takeoff checklist .............................. PERFORM
3. Radar altimeter .......................................... SET BUG at 120 ft / 36 m
(TDP height)
4. Hover IGE at 5 ft skids height .................... ESTABLISH
5. CWP and other warning lights ................... OFF
6. All parameters............................................ CHECK normal operating range
7. Vertical takeoff ........................................... INITIATE
Establish ROC of ~200 ft/min and maintain front part of the takeoff area in the
lower part of lower chin window.
• Reaching 120 ft (36 m) AGL:
8. Cyclic stick ................................................. Start nose down rotation.
Adjust pitch attitude at about 25 kt
(46 km/h) to achieve 30 kt (56 km/h)
in level flight

NOTE
Consider TDP is reached when initiating fuselage rotation.

• After TDP:
9. Airspeed .................................................... INCREASE to Vy
10. Power ........................................................ AS REQUIRED

Figure 34: VTOL Short Field AEO takeoff profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 48
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.4.2 STANDARD VTOL SHORT FIELD LANDING PROCEDURE

1. Maximum landing weight ........................... DETERMINE (Fig. 35)
2. Approach check-list ................................... PERFORM
3. Radio altimeter........................................... SET BUG at 120 ft / 36 m
(LDP height)
4. Final approach:
Enter final approach at Vy then reduce speed gradually so as to clear 300 ft (90
m) at IAS = 40 kt (72 km/h) and reach LDP at 120 ft (36 m) AGL at IAS = 30 kt
(56 km/h) with a ROD ≤ 300 ft/min.
• After LDP:
5. Collective and cyclic controls ..................... ADJUST to maintain desired
trajectory, reduce speed
continuously up to a hover at 5 ft
(1.5 m) above landing point
6. Landing ...................................................... Slow vertical descent up to
touchdown

Figure 35: VTOL Short Field AEO landing profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 49
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.5 VTOL SHORT FIELD PERFORMANCE DATA

4.5.1 MAXIMUM TAKEOFF AND LANDING WEIGHT

Figure 36: Maximum takeoff and landing weight for VTOL operations

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 50
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.5.2 CLIMBOUT PERFORMANCE

The climbout flight path begins at the end of the "Continued takeoff distance" or
"Balked landing distance" at 35 feet (10.5 m) AGL or higher and VTOSS and is
divided into Segment 1, up to 200 ft (60 m) AGL, and Segment 2, from 200 ft (60 m)
to 1000 ft (300 m) AGL at Vy.
The flight planning has to take into account the existing obstacles along flight path;
the following charts should be used for determining the takeoff flight path:

1. Segment 1 (D3) ......................................... Fig. 4 (refer to subpart 1)

2. Acceleration distance to Vy (D4)................ Fig. 7 (refer to subpart 1)
3. Segment 2 (D5) ......................................... Fig. 6 (refer to subpart 1)

Figure 37: VTOL Short Field OEI climbout profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 51
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.5.3 VTOL SHORT FIELD TAKEOFF AND LANDING DISTANCES TABLE

CONDITIONS
- HEATING AND DEMISTING SYSTEMS OFF
- ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE AT TDP/LDP
VTOL
- OEI MAX POWER RATING SHORT FIELD
- MAXIMUM TAKEOFF OR LANDING WEIGHT
- RUNWAY LENGTH ≥ 80 m (263 ft)
TAKEOFF AND LANDING
- DISTANCES

AEO Rearward takeoff distance (R1) -35 m (115 ft)

Rejected takeoff distance (D1) 70 m (230 ft)

Continued takeoff distance (D2) 240 m (790 ft)

Continued landing distance (D6) 60 m (200 ft)

Continued landing distance (D6-LDP) 125 m (410 ft)

Balked landing distance (D7-LDP) 210 m (690 ft)

Figure 38: VTOL short field takeoff and landing distances.

NOTE
For short field heliport, the runway length is understood to be measured
from the tail of the aircraft at initial takeoff point. Additional 10 m (33 ft) are
therefore required compared to rejected takeoff distance D1. The runway
length does not include neither the rearward takeoff distance R1, nor the
rearward safety margins.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 52
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Subpart 5 - VTOL PROCEDURES

CONFINED HELIPORT
5.1 GENERAL DATA
This subpart provides information necessary for Category A operations at confined
heliports with a takeoff and landing area at least 80 m (264 ft) long, clear of
obstacles, and a takeoff and landing flight path clear of obstacles higher than 150 ft
(45 m). Obstacles of 50 ft (15 m) and 100 ft (30 m) are also considered.

5.1.1 DEFINITIONS
TDP . V1 = 0
. h1 = 240 ft (72 m) AHE

LDP . V1 = 30 kt (56 km/h)

. h1 = 240 ft (72 m) AHE
. ROD ≤ 300 ft/min.

R1 Horizontal distance from initial takeoff up to the extreme aft

Rearward takeoff point of the takeoff profile
distance

MO Minimum rearward safety margin between takeoff point and

Rearward safety rearward obstacle upon obstacle height:
margin . MO-50 : 50 ft (15 m) obstacle height
. MO-100: 100 ft (30 m) obstacle height
. MO-150: 150 ft (45 m) obstacle height

D6-LDP Horizontal distance from LDP up to the complete stop after

Continued landing engine failure at LDP
distance from LDP

DO Continued landing distances from an obstacle height of:

Continued landing . DO-50 : 50 ft (15 m) obstacle height
distances from . DO-100: 100 ft (30 m) obstacle height
obstacle . DO-150: 150 ft (45 m) obstacle height

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 53
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5.2 LIMITATIONS
(in addition to the limitations given in subpart 1 "general data").

5.2.1 CONFINED HELIPORT DATA

The surface of the heliport shall be solid to generate ground effect.
Takeoff and landing area minimum length: 80 m (264 ft).
Maximum surrounding obstacles height: 150 ft (45 m).

NOTE
For Category A confined heliport operations, the barometric altimeter is to be
used as source for LDP/TDP identification, according to the following
correspondence table (reference for barometric altimeter is QNH):

True Altimeter value True height Altimeter value

Takeoff Landing
height difference/QNH difference/QNH
90 ft (27 m) 70 ft (21 m) 90 ft (27 m) 100 ft (30 m)

IP 120 ft (36 m) 95 ft (29 m) IP 120 ft (36 m) 130 ft (39 m)

TDP 240 ft (72 m) 200 ft (60 m) TDP 240 ft (72 m) 240 ft (72 m)

5.2.2 MAXIMUM TAKEOFF AND LANDING WEIGHT

For maximum takeoff and landing weight refer to Figure 39.

NOTE 1
A height-velocity area to be avoided does not exist when:
- using an all up weight derived from chart Fig. 5-1 and,
- following the Category A VTOL normal takeoff and landing procedures.

NOTE 2
With current optional equipment installed, no weight penalty is to be taken
into account for Category A VTOL operations.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 54
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 39: Maximum takeoff and landing weight for VTOL operations

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 55
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5.3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

5.3.1 CONFINED HELIPORT TAKEOFF: ENGINE FAILURE PRIOR
TO TDP (before fuselage rotation)
1. Cyclic stick .................................. NOSE-DOWN ATTITUDE to reach landing
area (-5 to -15° upon height)
2. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST OEI MAX power and NR ≥ 365 rpm
• As soon as positive ground speed established (~15 kt/28 km/h):
3. Cyclic stick .................................. REDUCE NOSE-DOWN attitude (0 to -5°) to
reach landing area
• At height around 25 ft (7.5 m) AGL:
4. Collective pitch ........................... INCREASE continuously to cushion
touchdown
5. Cyclic stick .................................. REDUCE GROUND SPEED
• At height around 10 ft (3 m) AGL:
6. Cyclic stick .................................. CONTROL to establish minimum ground
speed at touchdown
7. Collective pitch ........................... INCREASE to max. pitch if necessary to
cushion touchdown
• After touch-down:
8. Collective pitch.............................. FULL LOW pitch
9. Engine shutdown .......................... PERFORM

Figure 40: VTOL Confined Heliport Rejected takeoff profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 56
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5.3.2 CONFINED HELIPORT TAKEOFF: ENGINE FAILURE AFTER OR AT

TDP (fuselage rotation started)
1. Cyclic stick .................................. NOSE-DOWN to -25°
2. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST OEI MAX power and NR ≥ 365 rpm
• As soon as 25 kt (46 km/h) IAS is reached:
3. Cyclic stick .................................. REDUCE NOSE-DOWN attitude
4. Collective pitch ........................... MAINTAIN OEI MAX power
• Once VTOSS (40 kt/74 km/h) is reached:
5. Cyclic stick .................................. INITIATE CLIMB at VTOSS
6. Collective pitch ........................... MAINTAIN OEI MAX power
• Upon reaching 200 ft (60 m) AHE:
7. Cyclic stick .................................. INCREASE SPEED to Vy
(55 kt / 102 km/h IAS)
• Upon reaching Vy:
8. OEI stop ....................................... SELECT OEI CONT
9. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST OEI CONT and NR ≥ 365 rpm
10. Climb ............................................ CONTINUE at Vy
11. Failed engine shutdown ................ PERFORM

Figure 41: VTOL Confined Heliport OEI Continued takeoff profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 57
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5.3.3 CONFINED HELIPORT LANDING: ENGINE FAILURE PRIOR TO LDP

NOTE
The pilot may decide to balk the landing or to continue the approach. If the
decision is to continue the approach, refer to § 5.3.4 "ENGINE FAILURE
AFTER LDP" of this subpart.
Heating and demisting systems must be off before final approach.
Balked landing procedure:
1. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST OEI MAX power and NR ≥ 365 rpm
2. Cyclic stick .................................. INCREASE IAS to VTOSS (40 kt / 74 km/h)
3. Cyclic stick .................................. INITIATE CLIMB at VTOSS
• Upon reaching 200 ft (60 m) AGL:
4. Cyclic stick .................................. INCREASE SPEED to Vy
(55 kt / 102 km/h IAS)
• Upon reaching Vy:
5. OEI stop ....................................... SELECT OEI CONT
6. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST OEI CONT and NR ≥ 365 rpm
7. Climb ............................................ CONTINUE at Vy
8. Failed engine shutdown ................ PERFORM

Figure 42: VTOL Confined heliport OEI Balked landing profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 58
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5.3.4 CONFINED HELIPORT LANDING: ENGINE FAILURE AFTER LDP

NOTE
The landing is mandatory if engine failure occurs after the LDP.

1. Collective pitch ........................... ADJUST if necessary to maintain

NR ≥ 365 rpm
2. Cyclic stick .................................. REDUCE GROUND SPEED smoothly
• Before touchdown:
3. Cyclic stick .................................. ESTABLISH landing attitude to minimise
ground speed
4. Collective pitch ........................... INCREASE to cushion touchdown
• After touch-down:
5. Collective pitch.............................. LOWER to full low pitch
6. Engine shutdown .......................... PERFORM

Figure 43: VTOL Confined heliport OEI continued landing profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 59
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5.4 NORMAL VTOL CONFINED HELIPORT PROCEDURES

5.4.1 STANDARD CONFINED HELIPORT TAKEOFF PROCEDURE
1. Maximum takeoff weight ............................ DETERMINE (Fig. 43)
2. Before takeoff checklist .............................. PERFORM
3. TDP height ................................................. DETERMINE:
For confined heliport, the barometric altimeter is to be used to identify
TDP.
Before starting confined heliport operations, the TDP should be defined as
follows:
Reference: the reference is the helicopter on the confined heliport with
engines at flight idle at full low pitch setting or before engines
started.
Procedure: Read the indicated barometric altitude and add 95 ft (29 m) to
obtain the IP (Intermediate Point) altitude and add 200 ft (60 m)
to obtain the TDP altitude for barometric altimeter indication.

NOTE
Ground running with high pitch setting or using IGE hover as reference
will lead to erroneous results.

4. Hover IGE at 5 ft (1.5 m) height ................. ESTABLISH

5. CWP and other warning lights ................... OFF
6. All parameters............................................ CHECK normal operating range
7. Vertical takeoff ........................................... INITIATE:
Establish ROC of ~200 ft/min and maintain front part of the takeoff area in the
lower part of lower chin window
• Reaching IP at 120 ft (36 m) AHE:
8. Cyclic stick ................................................. INITIATE REARWARD climb:
Maintain ROC of ~200 ft/min and keep the farthest part of the takeoff area in the
upper part of the lower chin window
• Reaching TDP at 240 ft (72 m) AHE:
9. Cyclic stick ................................................. Start nose down rotation.
Adjust pitch attitude at about 25 kt
(46 km/h) to achieve 30 kt (56 km/h)
in level flight

NOTE
Consider TDP is reached when initiating fuselage rotation.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 60
 FLIGHT MANUAL

• After TDP:
10. Airspeed .................................................... INCREASE to Vy (55 kt / 102 km/h)
11. Power ........................................................ AS REQUIRED

Figure 44: CONFINED HELIPORT AEO takeoff profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 61
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5.4.2 STANDARD CONFINED HELIPORT LANDING PROCEDURE

1. Maximum landing weight ........................... DETERMINE (Fig. 35)
2. Landing distances ...................................... DETERMINE according to obstacle
heights (Fig 49)
3. LDP/IP height............................................. DETERMINE:
For confined heliport, the barometric altimeter is to be used to identify
LDP and IP.
Before starting confined heliport operations, the TDP and IP should be defined
as follows:
Reference: Set the accurate local QNH of the landing area.
Procedure: Add 240 ft (72 m) to the confined heliport announced altitude to
obtain the LDP altitude and add 130 ft (39 m) to obtain the IP
(Intermediate Point) altitude for barometric altimeter indication.
4. Approach check-list ................................... PERFORM
5. Final approach:
Enter final approach at Vy then reduce speed gradually so as to clear 400 ft
(120 m) at IAS = 40 kt (74 km/h), reach LDP at 240 ft (72 m) AHE at IAS = 30 kt
(56 km/h) with a ROD ≤ 300 ft/min. then IP at ~15 kt (27 km/h) groundspeed
and 120 ft (36 m) height.
• After LDP :
6. Collective and cyclic controls ..................... ADJUST to maintain desired
trajectory, reduce speed
continuously up to a hover at 5 ft
(1.5 m) above landing point
7. Landing ...................................................... Slow vertical descent up to
touchdown

Figure 45: VTOL Helipad AEO landing profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 62
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5.5 VTOL HELIPAD PERFORMANCE DATA

5.5.1 MAXIMUM TAKEOFF AND LANDING WEIGHT

Figure 46: Maximum takeoff and landing weight for VTOL operations

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 63
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5.5.2 CLIMBOUT PERFORMANCE

The climbout flight path begins at the end of the "Continued takeoff distance" or
"Balked landing distance" at 35 feet (10.5 m) AOE or higher and VTOSS and is
divided into Segment 1, up to 200 ft (60 m) AOE, and Segment 2, from 200 ft (60 m)
to 1000 ft (300 m) AOE at Vy.
The flight planning has to take into account the existing obstacles along flight path;
the following charts should be used for determining the takeoff flight path:

1. Segment 1 distance (D3) ........................... Fig. 4 (refer to subpart 1)

2. Acceleration distance to Vy (D4)................ Fig. 7 (refer to subpart 1)
3. Segment 2 distance (D5) ........................... Fig. 6 (refer to subpart 1)

Figure 47: Confined Heliport OEI climbout profile.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 64
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5.5.3 VTOL CONFINED HELIPORT TAKEOFF AND LANDING DISTANCES

TABLE
CONDITIONS
- HEATING AND DEMISTING SYSTEMS OFF
- ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE AT TDP/LDP
VTOL
- OEI MAX POWER RATING CONFINED HELIPORT
- MAXIMUM TAKEOFF OR LANDING WEIGHT TAKEOFF AND LANDING
- RUNWAY LENGTH ≥ 80 m (263 ft)
- DISTANCES

AEO Rearward takeoff distance (R1) -105 m (345 ft)

Rearward safety margin from obstacles (MO)

. 50 ft (15 m) obstacle height : MO-50 -35 m (115 ft)
. 100 ft (30 m) obstacle height : MO-100 -60 m (200 ft)
. 150 ft (45 m) obstacle height : MO-150 -85 m (280 ft)
Rejected takeoff distance (D1) 70 m (230 ft)

Continued takeoff distance (D2) 240 m (790 ft)

Continued landing distance (DO)

. 50 ft (15 m) obstacle height : DO-50 95 m (310 ft)
. 100 ft (30 m) obstacle height : DO-100 140 m (460 ft)
. 150 ft (45 m) obstacle height : DO-150 200 m (660 ft)
Continued landing distance (D6-LDP) 300 m (1000 ft)

Balked landing distance (D7-LDP) 210 m (690 ft)

Figure 48: VTOL confined heliport takeoff and landing distances

NOTE
For confined heliport, the runway length is understood to be measured from
the tail of the aircraft at initial takeoff point. Additional 10 m (33 ft) are
therefore required compared to rejected takeoff distance D1. The runway
length does not include neither the rearward takeoff distance R1, nor the
rearward safety margin MO.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.1

15-18 Page 65
 FLIGHT MANUAL

FLIGHT MANUAL

AS 355 NP

SUPPLEMENT

IFR FLIGHT

IMPORTANT NOTE

The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given

in the basic flight manual and/or the supplements listed in section supplement 0.

The effectivity of the manual at the latest revision is specified on the list of effective
pages.

Airbus Helicopters D i r e c t i o n T e c h n i q u e S u p p o r t
Aéroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.2.P1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - EASA CERTIFICATION

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• A .................................. Specific to EASA
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

SECTION
PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)
or SUP.
SUP.2.P1 1 to 1 15-18

SUP.2.P5 1 to 2 15-18 A

SUP.2 1 to 11 15-18

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.2.P5

A 15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) EASA

ISSUE 1: NR 0 to NR 1:
EASA approval No. 10034224
NORMAL REVISION 1 - MAY 2010
on March 17th, 2011

ISSUE 2:
Approved on January 12, 2016 under
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 15-18
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J056
Title New issue
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.2.P5

A 15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1 GENERAL
This supplement is applicable for flights under IFR flight rules with single or dual pilot
configuration.

2. LIMITATIONS
The limitations specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual supplements
remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

2.1 MINIMUM EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR IFR FLIGHT

2.1.1 Single pilot configuration
The aircraft must be fitted with the minimum following equipment items and
installations:
- one dual DC and one dual AC electrical power supply system
- two radio-communication units
- two radio-navigation units
- an intercom system with two radio-com selectors
- two adequate transmitter/receiver headsets shall be on board the helicopter,
one effectively worn by the pilot at the controls, the spare one in direct reach
of the pilot
- two gyro-horizons: one of them fitted with a built-in side slip indicator and
supplied by an emergency battery, the other one being able to ensure the
Flight Director mode
- one gyro compass associated with an HSI
- an AFCS equipped with a failure monitoring unit and an upper modes coupler
(refer to SUP.16)
- an air data system including:
· a dual static pressure system
· a dual dynamic pressure system with an anti-icing device
· an air data module (BARAN) on the secondary static/dynamic air pressure
system sending air data to the AFCS
- one swivelling landing light
- a RH pilot's windshield wiper

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.2

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2.1.2 Dual pilot configuration

In addition to list above, the following equipment items must be installed on the LH
part of the instrument panel:
- one altimeter
- one airspeed indicator
- one gyro horizon
- one vertical speed indicator
- one gyro compass
- an AFCS monitoring panel
- a rotor speed indicator
- a LH pilot windshield wiper
In addition to these, the fully-equipped dual controls must be installed.

NOTE 1
Equipment items called for by the operational regulations concerned must be
approved, installed and serviceable.
Radio-communication and radio-navigation systems must be adapted to
ground installations and to operational regulations in force.

NOTE 2
In two-pilot configuration only, a takeoff to return to base for repair is
authorized with the sole basic AFCS mode in operation (i.e without failure
monitoring unit and/or coupler). One of the two pilots shall have hands on the
flight controls during the whole flight.

2.2 TYPES OF OPERATION APPROVED

Providing that the required equipment items are operative, the helicopter is approved
for day and night IFR flights except in icing conditions.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.2

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2.3 APPROVED IFR OPERATING ENVELOPE

- Maximum pressure altitude: 12000 ft (3658 m)
- Airspeeds:
· Minimum IFR speed = 55 kt (102 km/h)
· IFR recommended climbing speed = 65 kt (120 km/h)
- Rate of climb/Rate of descent:
Maximum vertical (climbing or descent) speeds: ≤ ± 1200 ft/min
- Maximum approach gradient:
Max approach angle on glide slope: 4.5°

2.4 LONGITUDINAL CG
- Forward CG:
 3.17 m (124.8 in.) when All Up Weight ≤ 2000 kg (4409 lb)
 Refer to graph below when All Up Weight > 2000 kg (4409 lb)
- Aft CG:
 3.49 m (137.4 in.) when All Up Weight ≤ 2100 kg (4625 lb)
 Refer to graph below when All Up Weight > 2100 kg (4625 lb)

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.2

15-18 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
The emergency procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

3.1 ENGINE FAILURE ON APPROACH

- Airspeed ................................................................. MAINTAIN above minimum IFR
speed (55 kt -102 km/h) until
VMC conditions
- Apply normal OEI landing procedure (refer to SECTION 3)

3.2 ELECTRICAL POWER FAILURE

3.2.1 Loss of one DC generator or one AC power supply system
The flight may be continued without any restriction as redundancy is ensured by the
second power supply equipment (2nd generator or 2nd static inverter).

3.2.2 Loss of both DC generators (refer to SECTION 3)

- Emergency lighting system .................................. ON (if necessary)
- [SHED BUS] 1 + 2 ............................................... SHED
- [OIL FANS] .......................................................... OFF
- [GENE RST] ........................................................ RESET if possible
- Landing lights....................................................... CHECK OFF
- Radio-communications ........................................ MINIMIZE
- [INV 1] .................................................................. OFF
- Radio-com and radio-nav systems
not required to continue the flight ......................... OFF
- [A/COL LT] and [POS LT] ................................... OFF
- [COPIL HORIZ] (if installed) ................................ OFF
- [COPIL GYRO] (if installed) ................................. OFF
- AFCS coupler ...................................................... OFF
- [FUEL XFEED] (unless necessary) ..................... OFF
- All unnecessary equipment .................................. OFF

LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE

Exit IMC conditions as soon as possible if applicable.

NOTE
nd
If the loss of the 2 generator results from an engine failure do not attempt to
restart the failed engine.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.2

15-18 Page 4
 FLIGHT MANUAL

After strict observance of the above load shedding procedure, the maximum
endurance with a normally charged battery with the minimum required equipment
is : 30 min in IFR and/or Night conditions.

3.3 AFCS FAILURE (refer to Supplement 16)

3.3.1 Monitoring Unit Failure
Continue the flight with hands on the flight controls.

3.3.2 AFCS failures/malfunctions

In case of AFCS malfunctions (warnings, total failure or oscillations) leading to
manual recovery and flying by the pilot, the pilot shall refer to the stand-by horizon.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.2

15-18 Page 5
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4. NORMAL PROCEDURES
The normal procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

4.1 EXTERNAL CHECKS

Station 2
The check in LH cargo bay is to be supplemented as follows:
- LH cargo bay door ......................................... Open
- Loads and objects carried.............................. Stowed and secured
- Emergency battery ........................................ Attachment, condition,
connections, battery test green
light on (with [BAT/EPU #] and
[STD/BY HORIZ] set to ON)
- LH cargo bay door ......................................... Closed, locked
4.2 ENGINE PRESTART CHECKLIST
Stand-by horizon check:
- [BAT/EPU 1] + [BAT/EPU 2] ........................ OFF
- [S/BY HORIZ]................................................ ON. Check switch caution lights
on, horizon stabilizes and flag
disappears
- [BAT/EPU 1] + [BAT/EPU 2] ........................ ON. Check switch lights off
4.3 AFTER STARTING CHECKLIST
4.3.1 DC supply check
Check generators DC voltage and current:
- GEN 1 and GEN 2 voltage ............................ CHECK
- GEN 1 and GEN 2 current ............................. CHECK
4.3.2 AC supply check
Check 26 V and 155 V AC voltages in each one of the following three
configurations:
- [INV 1] ........................................................... OFF + [INV 2] ON:
Inverter 2 ....................................................... CHECK 26 and 115 AC voltages
- [INV 1] ........................................................... ON + [INV 2] OFF:
Inverter 1 ....................................................... CHECK 26 and 115 AC voltages
- [INV 1] ........................................................... ON + [INV 2] ON:
Inverter 1 and 2 ............................................. CHECK 26 and 115 AC voltages
4.4 CRUISING FLIGHT
- IFR recommended climbing speed: 65 kt (120 km/h)
- Avoid flight in thick vertically-building clouds and in lightning hazard areas
- Avoid abrupt maneuvers at IAS < 65 kt (120 km/h) as well as turns with a bank
angle greater than 30°
- Check landing lights off

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.2

15-18 Page 6
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.5 APPROACH
Recommended airspeed without AFCS coupler mode:
- Min. IFR speed (55 kt) ≤ IAS ≤ VNE
Recommended airspeed with AFCS coupler modes in operation:
- 80 kt (148 km/h) ≤ IAS ≤ 120 kt (222 km/h)
NOTE
Avoid ILS approach with AFCS coupler engaged at IAS < 80 kt.
Max. approach angle on glide slope = 4.5°.

5. PERFORMANCE DATA
The performance data specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

5.1 RATE OF CLIMB

IFR recommended climbing is 65 kt (120 km/h) AEO or OEI.
- Refer to Figures 2 and 4 of this Supplement for corresponding rates of
climb
- Reduce the performance data by 8% when the sliding door(s) is (are) in
the open position

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.2

15-18 Page 7
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 1: Weight index.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.2

15-18 Page 8
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 2: Rate of climb AEO at 65 kt MCP.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.2

15-18 Page 9
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 3: Weight index.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.2

15-18 Page 10
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 4: Rate of climb OEI at 65 kt OEI CONT.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.2

15-18 Page 11
 FLIGHT MANUAL

FLIGHT MANUAL

AS 355 NP

SUPPLEMENT

INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPERATIONS IN COLD WEATHER

IMPORTANT NOTE

The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given

in the basic flight manual and/or the supplements listed in section supplement 0.

The effectivity of the manual at the latest revision is specified on the list of effective
pages.

Airbus Helicopters D i r e c t i o n T e c h n i q u e S u p p o r t
Aéroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.4.P1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - EASA CERTIFICATION

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• A .................................. Specific to EASA
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

SECTION
PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)
or SUP.
SUP.4.P1 1 to 1 15-18

SUP.4.P5 1 to 2 15-18 A

SUP.4 1 to 4 15-18

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.4.P5

A 15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) EASA

ISSUE 1: NR 0 to NR 1:
EASA approval No. 10034224
NORMAL REVISION 1 - MAY 2010
on March 17th, 2011

ISSUE 2:
Approved on January 12, 2016 under
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 15-18
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J056
Title New issue
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.4.P5

A 15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1 GENERAL
This supplement details the procedures to be followed when the aircraft is operated in
cold weather (OAT ≤ 0°C) and/or when aircraft is or could be exposed to falling or
blowing snow.
Aircraft servicing does not require any special tools or routine replacement.

2 LIMITATIONS
The limitations specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual supplements
remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

2.1 ENGINE STARTING ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS

• - 30°C with 3 cSt (0.156) engine oil.
• - 40°C with 3 cSt (0.148 - 0.150) engine oil.
(Refer to SECTION 2)
2.2 ENGINE STARTING TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE
LIMITATIONS
• - 20°C with 0.155 gearbox oil.
• - 40°C with 0.148 or 0.150 gearbox oil.
(Refer to SECTION 2)

3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
The emergency procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable.

4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
The normal procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

4.1 GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS

For safe and rational operation of the aircraft in cold weather and snow, carry out the
following basic operations:
- Remove ice or snow accumulations from the whole of the aircraft, particularly at
hinges and on all parts of the dynamic and control systems (main rotor, rotor mast,
tail rotor drive and tail rotor, flight controls, engine controls).

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.4

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

- When the aircraft has been subject to very low temperatures, it is recommended:
• either to perform regular ground runs every two hours for temperatures of
around - 20°C or every hour for lower temperatures.
• or to preheat the engine, transmission assemblies and cabin before engine
starting (even if it is possible to start the engine at temperatures down to
- 40°C).

4.2 USE OF BATTERIES FOR STARTING

During long periods on the ground it is recommended to store the battery in a warm
area.
If a ground power unit is not available, startup may be carried out using the aircraft
battery or two aircraft batteries connected in parallel.
The starting envelope is related to the temperature and is indicated in the following
chart.

STARTING ENVELOPE FOR 15 AH BATTERY

OAT (°C)  -40°

-35°
-30°
-25°
-15°

Start-up on 1 cold, charged

battery and oil 0.156 in the 1 BATT
engines.
Start-up on 1 warm (20°C),
charged battery and oil 1 BATT
0.156 in the engines.
Start-up on 1 warm (20°C)
battery and oil 0.148 in the 1 BATT
engines.
Start-up on 2 cold, charged
batteries and oil 0.156 or 2 BATT
0.148 in the engines.
Start-up on 2 warm (20°C),
charged batteries and oil, 2 BATT
0.148 in the engines.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.4

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.3 PREFLIGHT CHECK

WARNING

ICE OR SNOW ACCUMULATIONS THAT REMAIN IN OR AROUND THE ENGINE

AIR INTAKE MAY BE INGESTED AND CAN CAUSE A SUDDEN IN-FLIGHT
ENGINE FAILURE.
In addition to the inspections specified in the basic flight Manual, perform the
following operations and inspections:
- Main rotor blades .............................. : Remove snow and ice.
- Main rotor hub and mast ................... : Check for absence of ice on the
swashplates, the scissors, the servo
controls and the rotor head spring
antivibrator.
- Engines ............................................. : • Remove the engine air intake and
exhaust nozzle blanking covers only
after removal of snow from the aircraft
surface.
• Remove snow and ice accumulations
around the air intakes and on either side
of the screens.
• Check for absence of snow and ice
accumulations inside the air intakes.
- Drains and
air pressure probes ........................... : Inspect fuel drains, check for absence of
snow and ice on all ventilation and drain
pipes as well as on static ports and pitots.
- Tail rotor ............................................ : • Check for absence of ice on the tail rotor
assembly.
• Manually rotate the tail rotor so that the
main rotor performs at least a complete
turn:
- Check free rotation,
- Check freewheel operation.
- Cabin ................................................ : • Remove the cabin cover just before
engine starting to prevent windscreen
icing.
• Check that the windshield wiper is not
stuck on the canopy.

NOTE

In falling or blowing snow conditions the engine air intake should be checked
at the end of the exterior checks. The further checks before engine starting
should then be performed without major delay.

- Fuel System Bleeding ....................... : • Do not bleed the fuel system for an
OAT ≤ -10°C where valve seals may
become inefficient.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.4

15-18 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.4 ENGINE START-UP

Engine start-up when EOT ≤ -30°C:
- Engine start-up: • Move FFCL onto the rear retractable stop (do not
retract)
• Perform normal procedure
• When EOT ≥ 0°C, move the FFCL smoothly forward
into the FLIGHT gate

Same procedure for the 2nd engine.

After starting the two engines, switch on the demisting and cabin heating systems.

4.5 RUN-UP CHECK

- After 2nd engine start-up: • NR ................................................ CHECK
• Engine CWP lights ........................ CHECK OFF
• EOP .............................................. CHECK

NOTE
Power shall only be applied when EOT ≥ +10°C on both engines.

- Yaw pedals: • Move about 50% of their travel on either side of the mid-
position

4.6 AFTER LAST FLIGHT OF THE DAY

The normal procedures described in the basic flight manual are to be supplemented
by the following:
- When the rotor stops turning, position the cyclic pitch stick close to the neutral
position and the collective pitch lever locked at full low pitch, with tail rotor blades
in the horizontal position
- Do not leave doors open
- Install the air intake cover and exhaust nozzle blank
- When the aircraft is parked in an unsheltered area, it is recommended to apply
anti-icing products and to carry out aircraft blanking and mooring

5 PERFORMANCE DATA
The performance data specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.4

15-18 Page 4
 FLIGHT MANUAL

FLIGHT MANUAL

AS 355 NP

SUPPLEMENT

ENGINE FAILURE TRAINING PROCEDURES

(TRAINING MODE)

IMPORTANT NOTE

The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given

in the basic flight manual and/or the supplements listed in section supplement 0.

The effectivity of the manual at the latest revision is specified on the list of effective
pages.

Airbus Helicopters D i r e c t i o n T e c h n i q u e S u p p o r t
Aéroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.6.P1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - EASA CERTIFICATION

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• A .................................. Specific to EASA
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

SECTION
PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)
or SUP.
SUP.6.P1 1 to 1 15-18

SUP.6.P5 1 to 2 17-38 A

SUP.6 1 to 16 17-38

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.6.P5

A 17-38 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) EASA

ISSUE 1: NR 0 TO NR 2:
EASA approval No. 10034224
NORMAL REVISION 2 - MAY 2010
on March 17th, 2011

ISSUE 2:
Approved on January 12, 2016 under
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 15-18
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J056
Title New issue
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information
Approved on March 20, 2018 under the
NORMAL REVISION 1 date code 17-38
authority of EASA DOA No. 21J700
Title Procedure improvement
Revised
SUP.6 .P5 pages 1 and 2, SUP.6 page 5
information
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.6.P5

A 17-38 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1 GENERAL
The information provided in this supplement relates to OEI training procedures.

1.1 PRINCIPLE
The "Training mode" system enables OEI procedures to be practiced using non-
damaging power levels with helicopter weight reduced accordingly.
To this end, when the Engine Starting Switch is set to "TRNG", the system
simultaneously:
- Simulates an engine power loss by governing the N2 to 355 equivalent NR rpm (N2
Training Idle)
- Sets the FADEC N1 stops on the other engine to OEI Training levels

1.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS

The training mode is activated via the engine starting selector
(OFF/TRNG/FLT) switches on the upper panel:

From a normal flight phase, respectively selecting the ENG.1 (ENG.2) starting selector
to "TRNG" position results in the following:

• Setting ENG 1 (ENG.2) to N2 Idle (N2 = equivalent to 355 rpm NR)

• Arming the N1 OEI MAX stop on ENG.2 (ENG.1), (except if OEI CONT
wrongly preselected in AEO mode)

• TRNG + DIFF PWR on the CWP + triple "GONG"

• Setting the FLI in OEI mode with corresponding OEI MAX stop indication
associated with the training mode activated symbol:
T + OEI MAX

Return to normal flight mode is achieved by returning the ENG.1 (ENG.2) starting
selector to "FLT" position.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.6

17-38 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

During the simulated engine failure, indications are the same as for a real engine
failure:

• DIFF PWR + "Triple Gong"

• FLI switches to OEI mode with the selected OEI stop indication but with the
training mode activated symbol: T

• FLI needle is set to a position representative of an actual failure position

(FLI limit indications for torque and N1 are artificially offset to match OEI
MAX and OEI CONT training power ratings)

NOTE

The digital N1, TRQ and TOT indications correspond to the ACTUAL parameters.
Torque limits are to be controlled by the pilot.

1.3 FUNCTIONAL SAFETY DEVICES

In addition to the use of non-damaging engine limitations, safety devices are available
at the same time as the Training mode is in use:

In the event of a missed exercise, as soon as NR drops below 355 rpm, the "idled"
engine provides power according to demand, up to the actual OEI rating
corresponding to the rating selected by the pilot during the exercise, and in any case
the actual OEI MAX rating will be available as soon as NR ≤ 330 rpm.

NOTE

Should a real failure occur on the engine providing the power, there is no need to
reselect "FLT" on the "OFF/TRNG/FLT" selector of the engine whose power was
deliberately reduced, to obtain the OEI MAX power from this engine.
The selector shall be returned to "FLT" after landing.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.6

17-38 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2 LIMITATIONS
The limitations specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual supplements
remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

2.1 WEIGHT LIMITATIONS

- Maximum takeoff weight on clear area ....................... : refer to Figure 1
- Maximum takeoff weight for VTOL procedures ........... : refer to Figure 2

2.2 ENGINE LIMITATIONS

N1 (%)
POWER LIMIT FLI value TOT (°C) TRQ (%)
(see Note 1)
OEI CONT
12 98.7 749 81
Training
OEI MAX
13.2 100.0 773 90
Training

NOTE 1
For N1, limitations change according to Hp and OAT, above indicated limitations
values are absolute N1 limits.
The digital N1, TRQ and TOT indications correspond to the ACTUAL parameters.

NOTE 2
Torque limits are to be controlled by the pilot.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.6

17-38 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
The emergency procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following
emergency procedures:
NOTE
Normal operation can be obtained at any time by switching the "OFF/TRNG/FLT" selector
from "TRNG" to "FLT" position.

CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

Power loss on the OEI rating selector .............................. SELECT appropriate rating
engine supplying according to flight conditions.
the power.
LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE

The remaining engine NOTE

delivers the required The remaining engine will provide power up to the pilot selected
power according to OEI stop (actual OEI MAX or CONT rating) as soon as NR ≤ 355 rpm
demand up to the and automatically up to the actual OEI MAX if NR ≤ 330 rpm.
actual
OEI MAX rating.
Failure of the
OEI rating selector .............................. SELECT appropriate rating
engine running in
according to flight conditions.
"Training idle".
LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE

The engine supplying NOTE

the power delivers The engine supplying power will provide power up to the pilot
the required power selected OEI stop (Training OEI MAX or CONT rating).
according to demand Actual OEI MAX rating will be automatically available if
up to the Training NR ≤ 330 rpm.
OEI MAX rating.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.6

17-38 Page 4
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
The normal procedures specified in the basic Flight Manual and in the Flight Manual
Supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

4.1 AFTER STARTING CHECKLIST

If engine failure training procedures are intended during the flight, ADD:

For each engine (respectively):

- ENG.1 (2) selector ....................................... "TRNG"
• Check:
− Engine 1 (2) N1 decreases
− Engine 1 (2) N2 settles around NR 355 rpm
− Engine 2 (1) N1 increases
− CWP: TRNG
− FLI: T + OEI MAX

- ENG.1 (2) selector ....................................... "FLT"

• Check:
− Engine 1 (2) N1 increases
− Engine 1 (2) N2 aligns with engine 2 (1) N2
− CWP: TRNG
− FLI: T + OEI MAX

4.2 OEI TRAINING PROCEDURE

- In flight, to begin the training:
1. Engine selectors safety device ....CHECK SET.
2. ENG. # selector ..........................."TRNG".
Engine failure training procedure shall be conducted as described in
SECTION 3 or as in Supplement SUP.1 "Equivalent Category A OEI
procedures and performance".

- To end the training:

3. Collective pitch ............................REDUCE POWER.
4. ENG. # selector ..........................."FLT".

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.6

17-38 Page 5
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5 PERFORMANCE DATA
5.1 MAXIMUM WEIGHT ON CLEAR HELIPORT

Figure 1: Training mode -

Maximum takeoff and landing weight on clear heliport.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.6

17-38 Page 6
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5.2 MAXIMUM WEIGHT FOR VTOL OPERATIONS

Figure 2: Training mode -

Maximum takeoff and landing weight for VTOL operations.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.6

17-38 Page 7
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5.3 WEIGHT INDEX

Figure 3 : Weight index.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.6

17-38 Page 8
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5.4 RATE OF CLIMB IN TRAINING MODE AT VTOSS

Figure 4: Training mode – Rate of climb at VTOSS.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.6

17-38 Page 9
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5.5 WEIGHT INDEX

Figure 5: Weight index.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.6

17-38 Page 10
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5.6 RATE OF CLIMB IN TRAINING MODE AT VY

Figure 6: Training mode – Rate of climb at VY.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.6

17-38 Page 11
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5.7 TRAINING MODE - "CATEGORY A" TRAINING PROCEDURES

5.7.1 Clear heliport training mode performance
With the actual procedures and TDP/LDP parameters as per SUPPLEMENT 9-1:
- Takeoff distances:
D1 - Rejected takeoff distance................. : 300 m (1000 ft)
D2 - Continued takeoff distance .............. : 500 m (1640 ft)
- Segment 1
D3 - 35 to 200 ft AGL/VTOSS.................. : Refer to Fig. 7
- Acceleration segment:
D4 - From VTOSS to Vy .......................... : 600 m (2000 ft)
- Segment 2
D5 - 200 ft to 1000 ft AGL/Vy................... : Refer to Fig. 8
- Landing distances:
D6 - Continued landing distance.............. : 350 m (1150 ft)
D7 - Balked landing distance ................... : 350 m (1150 ft)

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.6

17-38 Page 12
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5.7.2 VTOL OPERATIONS TRAINING PERFORMANCE

With the actual procedures and TDP/LDP parameters as per supplement SUP.1:
R1 : Rearward takeoff distance
MO : Rearward safety margins versus obstacle height
D1 : Rejected takeoff distance
D2 : Continued takeoff distance
DO : Continued landing distances versus obstacle height
D6/LDP : Continued landing distance
D6 : Continued landing distance
D7/LDP : Balked landing distance

Heliport / Helipad Surface level helipad

Short field heliport Confined heliport
characteristics Elevated helipad
R1 -35 m (115 ft) -35 m (115 ft) -105 m (345 ft)
MO-50 ft -35 m (115 ft)
MO-100 ft - - -60 m (200 ft)
MO-150 ft -85 m (280 ft)
Within pad
D1 70 m (230 ft) 70 m (230 ft)
dimensions
D2 240 m (790 ft) 240 m (790 ft) 240 m (790 ft)
DO-50ft 95 m (310 ft)
DO-150ft - - 140 m (460 ft)
DO-100ft 200 m (660 ft)
D6/LDP 210 m (690 ft) 125 m (410 ft) 300 m (1000 ft)
D7/LDP 210 m (690 ft) 210 m (690 ft) 210 m (690 ft)
D6 120 m (400 ft) 60 m (200 ft) 60 m (200 ft)

NOTE
For short field and confined heliports, the runway length is understood to be
measured from the tail of the aircraft at initial takeoff point. Additional 10 m
(33 ft) are therefore required compared to rejected takeoff distance D1. The
runway length does not include neither the rearward takeoff distance R1, nor
the rearward safety margin MO.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.6

17-38 Page 13
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 7: Training mode - Segment 1 : ΔH for 100 m (330 ft) / D3.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.6

17-38 Page 14
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 8: Training mode – segment 2 : ΔH for 100 m (330 ft) / D5.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.6

17-38 Page 15
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5.8 TRAINING MODE OEI CRUISE FLIGHT CEILING

Figure 9: Training mode - Cruise flight service ceiling.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.6

17-38 Page 16
 FLIGHT MANUAL

FLIGHT MANUAL

AS 355 NP

SUPPLEMENT

FADEC FAILURE TRAINING PROCEDURE

IMPORTANT NOTE

The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given

in the basic flight manual and/or the supplements listed in section supplement 0.

The effectivity of the manual at the latest revision is specified on the list of effective
pages.

Airbus Helicopters D i r e c t i o n T e c h n i q u e S u p p o r t
Aéroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.7.P1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - EASA CERTIFICATION

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• A .................................. Specific to EASA
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

SECTION
PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)
or SUP.
SUP.7.P1 1 to 1 15-18

SUP.7.P5 1 to 2 15-18 A

SUP.7 1 to 3 15-18

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.7.P5

A 15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) EASA

ISSUE 1: NR 0 to NR 2:
EASA approval No. 10034224
NORMAL REVISION 2 - MAY 2010
on March 17th, 2011

ISSUE 2:
Approved on January 12, 2016 under
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 15-18
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J056
Title New issue
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.7.P5

A 15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1 GENERAL
1.1 PRINCIPLE
This training procedure allows FADEC failure training by simulating a major governing
failure on one engine.

To this end, when the guarded [AUTO-MAN] selector of one engine is set to "MAN",
the metering valve of the corresponding engine is frozen at the current fuel flow rate
value as in an actual FADEC failure.

1.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS

The simulated FADEC failure is induced via the engine FADEC
[AUTO-MAN] selectors on the upper panel:

From a normal flight phase, respectively selecting one FADEC selector to "MAN"
position results in the following:

• FADEC # on the CWP + "GONG"

• FADEC FAIL appears on VEMD and TRQ value is boxed in yellow

if TRQ ≠ 40% ± 2

• Corresponding engine FFCL red warning lights up

Return to normal flight mode is achieved by returning the FADEC selector to "AUTO"
position and FFCL to neutral gate.

2 LIMITATIONS
The limitations specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual supplements
remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:
- Performing engine FADEC failure training on both engines simultaneously is
prohibited

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.7

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
The emergency procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following
emergency procedures:
- In case of any emergency:
[AUTO-MAN] ............................................... "AUTO"

NOTE
It is possible to switch back to the automatic fuel control mode at any time and for
any NR by resetting the selector to "AUTO" and by resetting the FFCL into the
neutral gate.

4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
The normal procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

4.1 AFTER STARTING CHECKLIST

ADD:
For each engine, one at a time:
- [AUTO-MAN] # ............................................ "MAN"
• Check:
− FADEC # + "GONG"

− FADEC FAIL on VEMD

− FFCL # red light ON

− NR remains steady

- [AUTO-MAN] # ............................................ "AUTO"

• Check:
− FADEC #
− FADEC FAIL on VEMD

− FFCL # red light OFF,

− NR remains steady.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.7

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.2 FADEC FAILURE TRAINING PROCEDURES

- In steady flight, to begin the training:
1. [AUTO-MAN] # ............................"MAN"
2. Collective pitch ............................KEEP steady
3. CWP, VEMD, FFCL .....................CHECK:
− FADEC # + "GONG"

− FADEC FAIL on VEMD

− TRQ ### % if TRQ value ≠ 40% ± 2

− FFCL # red light ON

Apply procedure SECTION 3.6 § 1.4

NOTE
Manual governing does provide protection against surging and flame-out
however FFCL must be adjusted slowly.

- To end the training:

1. [AUTO-MAN] # ............................"AUTO"
2. FFCL # ........................................Neutral gate, check:
− FADEC # , GOV

− FADEC FAIL on VEMD

− FFCL # red light OFF

5 PERFORMANCE DATA
The performance data specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.7

15-18 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

FLIGHT MANUAL

AS 355 NP

SUPPLEMENT

SKIS INSTALLATION
"SURFAIR"

IMPORTANT NOTE

The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given

in the basic flight manual and/or the supplements listed in section supplement 0.

The effectivity of the manual at the latest revision is specified on the list of effective
pages.

Airbus Helicopters D i r e c t i o n T e c h n i q u e S u p p o r t
Aéroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.10.P1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - EASA CERTIFICATION

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• A .................................. Specific to EASA
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

SECTION
PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)
or SUP.
SUP.10.P1 1 to 1 15-18

SUP.10.P5 1 to 2 15-18 A

SUP.10 1 to 1 15-18

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.10.P5

A 15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) EASA

ISSUE 1: NR 0:
EASA approval No. R.C.02426
NORMAL REVISION 0 - JANUARY 2007
on June 05th, 2007

ISSUE 2:
Approved on January 12, 2016 under
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 15-18
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J056
Title New issue
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.10.P5

A 15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1 GENERAL
The skis installation allows landing or takeoff on/from snow-covered ground.
The skis are secured to the landing gear skids by means of clamps. With the SURFAIR
skis, specific attachment devices can be used to carry four pairs of personal alpine skis
attached to the SURFAIR skis.

2. LIMITATIONS
The limitations specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual supplements
remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

Maximum permissible internal weight: 2540 kg (5600 lb).

3. EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
The emergency procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable.

4. NORMAL PROCEDURES
The normal procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable.

NOTE
Tail rotor ground clearance shall be monitored carefully when landing in deep
snow.

5. PERFORMANCE DATA
The regulatory performance data specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight
manual supplements remain applicable.

For complementary performance data refer to SECTION 5-2.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.10

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

FLIGHT MANUAL
AS 355 NP

SUPPLEMENT

EXTERNAL LOAD TRANSPORT

"CARGO SWING" 1134 kg (2500 lb)

With "ON BOARD" release unit (P/N 528-023-51)

IMPORTANT NOTE

The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given

in the basic flight manual and/or the supplements listed in section supplement 0.

The effectivity of the manual at the latest revision is specified on the list of effective
pages.

THIS SUPPLEMENT MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE FLIGHT MANUAL WHEN

THE EQUIPMENT MENTIONED ABOVE IS INSTALLED ON THE AIRCRAFT.

Airbus Helicopters D i r e c t i o n T e c h n i q u e S u p p o r t
Aéroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.11.P1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - EASA CERTIFICATION

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• A .................................. Specific to EASA
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

SECTION
PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)
or SUP.
SUP.11.P1 1 to 1 15-18

SUP.11.P5 1 to 2 17-24 A

SUP.11 1 to 7 17-24

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.11.P5

A 17-24 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) EASA

ISSUE 1: NR 0 to NR 1:
EASA approval No. 10027529
NORMAL REVISION 1 - JULY 2009
on October 07th, 2009

ISSUE 2:
Approved on January 12, 2016 under
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 15-18 the authority of EASA DOA No.
21J056
Title New issue
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information
EASA approval No. 10064360
NORMAL REVISION 1 date code 17-24
on January 17, 2018
Modification of the operating limitation and normal procedure for the
Title
cargo hook
Revised
SUP.11.P5 pages 1 and 2, SUP.11 pages 1 to 2 and 4 to 7
information
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.11.P5

A 17-24 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1 GENERAL
The "CARGO SWING" external load installation (Figure 1) enables the aircraft to carry
external loads. The installation is composed of:
- A suspended pyramid frame (1) equipped with a bumper ring (P/N: 232-155-00) (2)
and a "ON-BOARD" release unit (P/N: 528-023-51) (3) allowing electrical and
mechanical cargo hook opening.

Figure 1: Cargo swing components

- A load indicator (Figure 2) with a zero setting control (1) and lighting (2) on the RH
door pillar

Figure 2: External load indicator

- Electrical and mechanical controls for the pilot (Figure 3), including:
. A mission selector (1) located on the upper front panel, for switching on the
installation
. A release pushbutton (2) on the cyclic grip (electrical mode)
. A release handle (3) located under the collective (mechanical mode)

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.11

17-24 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 3: Cargo swing controls

- Electrical system protections including:

. A fuse or breaker for the load indicator on the RH overhead fuses or circuit breakers
panel
. A fuse or breaker for the electrical release circuit on the vertical RH overhead fuses or
circuit breakers panel
. A fuse or breaker for the mission selector on the LH overhead fuses or breakers panel

2 LIMITATIONS
The limitations specified in the basic Flight Manual and in the Flight Manual
Supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

2.1 WEIGHT LIMITATION

- Maximum authorized swing load weight ................ 1134 kg (2500 lb)
- Maximum all up weight with an external load ......... 2800 kg (6173 lb)
or the maximum authorized all up weight allowing AEO hovering flight out of
ground effect (the lowest of the two values).

CAUTION

The maximum weight without external load remains limited to the maximum
weight specified in the limitations section of the basic Flight Manual.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.11

17-24 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2.2 LONGITUDINAL CG
With an external load, the longitudinal limits are defined according to the weight as
per graph below:

2.3 AIRSPEED LIMITATION

- Absolute maximum permissible
indicated airspeed with external load .............................. 80 kt (148 km/h)

NOTE
The pilot is responsible for determining the limit speed according to the load
and sling length. Particular care must be exercised when bulky loads are
carried on the sling.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.11

17-24 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2.4 OPERATING LIMITATIONS

The cargo hook system is approved for lifting external load which is jettisonable and
lifted free of land or water during rotorcraft operation.
Operation with an external load which remains in contact with land, water or any fixed
structure is not demonstrated by the manufacturer. These operations shall not be
conducted without approval from the responsible authority in accordance with the
applicable operational regulations.
The external loads are limited to Non Human External Cargo (NHEC) only.
Flight with an empty net or unballasted sling as an external load is prohibited unless
approved operational limits and procedures provided by the operator allow for such
an operation.
Two placards visible to the ground operator and located on the lower fairing near to
the hook indicate:
- The maximum sling load
- The cargo hook rigging

Figure 4: Cargo hook rigging placard

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.11

17-24 Page 4
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
The emergency procedures specified the basic Flight Manual and in the Flight Manual
Supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

3.1 ENGINE FAILURE WITH EXTERNAL LOAD

- IN CRUISE FLIGHT
According to the circumstances, all up weight and terrain configuration, the pilot
may either jettison the load or continue the flight with the load.
- IN HOVER
1. Collective ................................................... LOWER according to the height
2. External load .............................................. RELEASE as soon as possible
4. Cyclic ......................................................... FORWARD to gain forward speed
according to the height and power
required

NOTE
In case of a failure during the hooking phase, the pilot shall move the aircraft
away to the right. Ground personnel are to be forewarned that in the event of
an engine failure they have to move away to the left of the helicopter.

3.2 ELECTRICAL LOAD JETTISONING FAILURE

Collective mechanical release ............................ ACTUATE

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.11

17-24 Page 5
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
The normal procedures specified in the basic Flight manual and in the basic Flight
Supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:
- Carrying heavy loads is a delicate operation due to the possible effects of a swinging
load on the flight behavior of the helicopter. Consequently, pilots are advised to train
with gradually increasing sling loads before undertaking heavy or bulky load carrying
operations.
- The length of the sling cable must be determined in accordance with the type of
mission. To carry a compact load, it is recommended to use the shortest possible
cable.
- Operation with no or low load on a sling cable or in a net must be performed in such a
way as to ensure that the trailing sling cable or net does not come close to the tail
rotor.
- For permissible load attachment ring size refer to SECTION 9 of this Flight Manual.
WARNING
1- THE USE OF A LOAD ATTACHMENT RING WITH INCORRECT DIMENSIONS
MAY LEAD TO LOSS OR JAMMING OF THE LOAD.
2- IN WET WEATHER, THE OPERATORS HANDLING THE HOOK AND LOADS
SHOULD WEAR THICK RUBBER GLOVES. DISCHARGE STATIC ELECTRICITY
BY PLACING AN ELECTRICAL CONDUCTOR CABLE OR TUBE BETWEEN THE
GROUND AND THE CARGO RELEASE UNIT (HOOK).

4.1 CHECK OF THE INSTALLATION

- [SLING] ........................................................................... ON
- Load indicator ................................................................. ZERO
- Correct opening of the hook (both in
electrical and mechanical control modes) ....................... CHECK
- Rotation of the retaining latch ......................................... FREE
- Return spring operation of the retaining latch ................. CHECK

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.11

17-24 Page 6
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.2 TAKEOFF CHECK AND PROCEDURE WITH EXTERNAL LOAD

1. External load ..........................................HOOK and SECURE
2. Collective ...............................................INCREASE very smoothly while
maintaining the aircraft vertically above
the load
3. Cables tightened ....................................Dwell briefly before raising the load
4. Lift off the load .......................................Vertically
5. Load indication .......................................CHECK
6. Take-off path ..........................................ADJUST to immediately adopt a forward
climb attitude
7. All parameters ........................................CHECK

4.3 MANEUVERS
All control movements should be made very gently, with very gradual acceleration
and deceleration, and only slightly banked turns.

4.4 APPROACH AND LANDING WITH EXTERNAL LOAD

- Perform approach at minimum rate of descent
- Establish zero translational ground speed sufficiently high to ensure that the load
is not dragged along the ground
- Then descend vertically until the load is on the ground
- Load ................................................................................ RELEASE
- Effective load release...................................................... CHECK
- All parameters ................................................................. CHECK

NOTE

If the load is not released, actuate the mechanical release system.

5 PERFORMANCE DATA
When no external load is carried on the hook, the performance data specified in the
basic Flight Manual and in the Flight Manual Supplements remain applicable.
- Hover out of ground effect performance is shown in Figure 7 of SECTION
5.1 § 7 of the basic Flight Manual
- Hover and climb performance may be affected when carrying bulky loads

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.11

17-24 Page 7
 FLIGHT MANUAL

FLIGHT MANUAL

AS 355 NP

SUPPLEMENT

SAND FILTERS

IMPORTANT NOTE

The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given

in the basic flight manual and/or the supplements listed in section supplement 0.

The effectivity of the manual at the latest revision is specified on the list of effective
pages.

Airbus Helicopters D i r e c t i o n T e c h n i q u e S u p p o r t
Aéroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14.P1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - EASA CERTIFICATION

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• A .................................. Specific to EASA
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

SECTION
PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)
or SUP.
SUP.14.P1 1 to 1 15-18

SUP.14.P5 1 to 2 15-18 A

SUP.14 1 to 38 15-18

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14.P5

A 15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) EASA

ISSUE 1: NR 0 to 2:
EASA approval No. 10034224
NORMAL REVISION 0 - MAY 2010
on March 17th, 2011

ISSUE 2:
Approved on January 12, 2016 under
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 15-18
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J056
Title New issue
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14.P5

A 15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1 GENERAL
The sand filters installation is intended to protect the engine from sand ingestion, during
hovering flight or when flying in sand-laden atmosphere.

The installation consists essentially of:

- A filter fitted on each engine air intake, in the place of the protective grid

- A P2 bleed air supply system common to both engines

- An electrical control system

During engine operation, the ambient air flows through separator tubes (1) which form
the filter. The filtered air is guided towards the engine air intakes. The sand is evacuated
by scavenge tubes ventilated by P2 bleed air (2).

A [SAND-FILT] push-button on RH overhead panel (5α2) controls the electro-valve (3)

which opens and closes the P2 air bleed circuit. The push-button is lighted when the P2
air pressure circuit is open.

The electrical circuit is protected by the “SAND FILTER” fuse on RH overhead fuses or
breakers panel (7α2).

The P2 bleed is automatically closed by the FADECs if the N1 TOP limit of at least one
engine is exceeded by more than 0.3 % for 5 sec.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2 LIMITATIONS
The limitations specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual supplements
remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:
- The heating and demisting systems must be switched off when sand filter is active
- Flight under falling snow is prohibited

3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
The emergency procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

3.1 IN FLIGHT ENGINE RELIGHTING

Engine relighting is possible throughout the operating envelope as soon as engine oil
temperature is ≥ -30°C.
Depending on the type of failure, cause of the flame out or reason for engine
shutdown, engine restart may be attempted throughout the flight envelope:
1. Engine # selector .................................OFF
2. [FUEL P. #] ............................................CHECK ON
3. [SAND FILT] ..........................................CHECK OFF
4. Engine # selector .................................FLT
The relighting sequence will automatically be carried out as soon as N1 ≤ 17%.

NOTE
When setting the engine selector through TRNG position, transient hunting of
the FLI of the other engine may be observed.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3.2 VEMD MESSAGES

VEMD CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

Remains off.
Avoid flying the helicopter in sandy atmosphere.
The « P2 » air valve
fails to open.

Remains on.
CONTINUE FLIGHT
The « P2 » air valve
fails to close.

4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
The normal procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

4.1 FLIGHT IN SAND-LADEN ATMOSPHERE

- Heating and demisting systems ..................... OFF
- [SAND-FILT].................................................. ON

5 PERFORMANCE DATA
The performance data specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

5.1 ENGINE HEALTH CHECK

- [SAND-FILT]..........................................OFF
• Refer to SECTION 5.1 § 3 of the basic flight manual
• Use the table below to replace the charts given in the basic flight manual by the
following ones given in this supplement:

Basic FLM section 5 Supplement 14

Figure 1 Figure 1
Figure 2 Figure 2
Figure 3 Figure 3

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 1: TOT Check

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 4
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 2: Power Check Engine 1

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 5
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 3: Power Check Engine 2

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 6
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5.2 PERFORMANCE CALCULATION

- Refer to SECTION 5 of the basic flight manual
- Use the table below to replace the charts given in the basic flight manual by the
following ones given in this supplement:

Basic FLM section 5 Supplement 14

Figure 5 Figure 4
Figure 6 Figure 5
Figure 7 Figure 6
Figure 8 Figure 7
Figure 9 Figure 8
Reserved Figure 9
Figure 10 Figure 10
Figure 11 Figure 11
Figure 12 Figure 12
Figure 13 Figure 13
Figure 14 Figure 14

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 7
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 4: Height Velocity diagram

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 8
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 5: Twin Engine IGE Hover Performance

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 9
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 6: Twin engine OGE Hover Performance

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 10
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 7: Single Engine IGE Hover performance

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 11
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 8: Single Engine OGE Hover performance

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 12
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 9: Twin Engine Service Ceiling MTOP

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 13
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 10: Weight Index

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 14
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 11: Twin Engine Rate of climb

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 15
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 12: Weight Index

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 16
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 13: Single Engine Rate of Climb

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 17
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 14: Takeoff weights permitting OEI climb at 150 ft/min at 1000ft above
Ground

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 18
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5.3. EQUIVALENT CATEGORY A OPERATION

- Refer to SUPPLEMENT 1 of the flight manual supplements
- Use the table below to replace the charts given in the basic flight manual
supplement 1 by the following ones given in this supplement:

Supplement 1 Supplement 14
Figure 2 Figure 15
Figure 3 Figure 16
Figure 4 Figure 17
Figure 5 Figure 18
Figure 6 Figure 19
Figure 8 Figure 20
Figure 19 Figure 21
Figure 26 Figure 21
Figure 29 Figure 21
Figure 36 Figure 21
Figure 39 Figure 21
Figure 46 Figure 21

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 19
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 15: OEI Cruise flight service ceiling

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 20
 FLIGHT MANUAL

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 21
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 16: Weight index

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 22
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 17: Segment 1 Height gain for 100 m horizontal distance / D3

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 23
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 18: Weight index

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 24
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 19: Segment 2 Height gain for 100 m horizontal distance / D5

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 25
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 20: Cat A Clear heliport – Maximum takeoff and landing weight

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 26
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 21: VTOL procedures – Maximum takeoff and landing weight

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 27
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5.4. TRAINING MODE OPERATION.

- Refer to SUPPLEMENT 6 of the flight manual supplements
- Use the table below to replace the charts given in the basic flight manual
supplement 6 by the following ones given in this supplement:

Supplement 6 Supplement 14
Figure 1 Figure 22
Figure 2 Figure 23
Figure 3 Figure 24
Figure 4 Figure 25
Figure 5 Figure 26
Figure 6 Figure 27
Figure 7 Figure 28
Figure 8 Figure 29
Figure 9 Figure 30

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 28
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 22: Training mode - Maximum weight on clear area

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 29
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 23: Training mode - Maximum weight for VTOL operations

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 30
 FLIGHT MANUAL

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 31
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 24: Weight index

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 32
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 25: Training mode – Rate of climb at VTOSS

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 33
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 26: Weight index

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 34
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 27: Training mode – Rate of climb at Vy

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 35
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 28: Training mode-Segment 1 : ΔH for 100 m (330 ft) / D3

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 36
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 29: Training mode Segment 2 : ΔH for 100 m (330 ft) / D5

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 37
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 30: Training mode – Cruise flight service ceiling

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.14

15-18 Page 38
 FLIGHT MANUAL

FLIGHT MANUAL

AS 355 NP

SUPPLEMENT

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

SFIM 85 T 31 (3-axis)
WITH OPTIONAL COUPLER

IMPORTANT NOTE

The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given

in the basic flight manual and/or the supplements listed in section supplement 0.

The effectivity of the manual at the latest revision is specified on the list of effective
pages.

Airbus Helicopters D i r e c t i o n T e c h n i q u e S u p p o r t
Aéroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.16.P1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - EASA CERTIFICATION

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• A .................................. Specific to EASA
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

SECTION
PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)
or SUP.
SUP.16.P1 1 to 1 15-18

SUP.16.P5 1 to 2 15-18 A

SUP.16 1 to 14 15-18

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.16.P5

A 15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) EASA

ISSUE 1: NR 0 to 2:
EASA approval No. 10027733
NORMAL REVISION 2 - SEPTEMBER 2009
on February 16th, 2010

ISSUE 2:
Approved on January 12, 2016 under
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 15-18
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J056
Title New issue
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.16.P5

A 15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1 GENERAL
The SFIM 85 T 31 three axis Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) is intended to
hold the attitudes (pitch and roll channels) and the heading (yaw channel) set by the
pilot. Additional modes can provide:
- A/S : indicated airspeed hold
- ALT : altitude hold
- HDG : acquires and holds HSI selected heading
- T/C : automatic yaw/roll coordination during turns
As optional equipment, a module designated "Coupler (CPL)/Flight Director (F/D)" may
be provided to operate the above additional modes and the following additional modes
and navigation track paths:
- V/S : holds selected vertical speed
- VOR : acquires and holds VOR radial
- VOR/LOC : acquires and holds approach VOR radial or ILS localizer axis
- G/S : acquires and holds ILS glide slope
- G/A : Go-around mode, acquires and holds IAS = 65 kt (120 km/h)

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE INSTALLATION

The basic AFCS or Autopilot (AP) system includes the following items:
- An AFCS computer linked to following sensors:
· a vertical gyro
· a directional gyro and a flux valve associated with a HSI
· an air data unit (BARAN)
· a yaw pedal movement detector
· a lateral accelerometer (sideslip detector)

Figure 1: AFCS system components.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.16

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

- A yaw pedals friction adjustment control (in front of RH pilot's yaw pedals)
- Three series actuators (one per axis) associated with three galvanometers
indicating the actuator positions with 3 "channel disengaged" indicator lights

Figure 2: Series actuator galvanometers (on instrument panel)

- Two parallel trim actuators (on pitch and roll axis) associated with an artificial load
release system (trim release function)

Trim pushbuttons
(LH overhead panel)

Figure 3: AFCS and coupler* control pushbuttons

(on overhead panel and collective and cyclic grip)

- An AFCS/Coupler* monitoring panel

Figure 4: AFCS test and monitoring panel (on instrument panel)

* If installed

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.16

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

- A failure monitoring unit:

This module monitors at different levels the operations of the pitch and roll
channels by comparison of the output data from the vertical gyro and the
instrument panel gyro horizon:
· attitude sensors
· control inputs generating system
· control actuators
In case of discrepancy or abnormal operation, this unit warns the pilot and
disengages the faulty channel. It is switched on and off by a [MONIT] pushbutton
on the AFCS control panel
- An AFCS control panel

Basic modes: Additional modes when the AFCS coupler

is installed:

[P] : Pitch channel [CPL] : Coupler activated

[R] : Roll channel [F/D] : Flight Director mode
[Y] : Yaw channel [V/S] : Vertical speed hold
[ALT] : Altitude hold [VOR] : VOR capture and track
[A/S] : Airspeed hold [NAV] : NAV mode
[HDG] : Selected heading [B/C] : LOC back-course mode
[T/C] : Coordinated turn [V/L] : VOR (approach)/LOC mode
[MONIT] : Failure monitoring unit [G/S] : Glide Slope acquire and track

Pushbutton lights when a channel or a mode is : . engaged: ON

. armed: ARM
CAP
. captured: AM CAP

Figure 5: AFCS control panel

- One or two (optional for IFR version) static inverter(s) (115 and 26 VAC, 400 Hz)
for AC power supply with one (or two) 16 A fuse(s) or breakers(s) on the RH
vertical overhead fuses or circuit breakers panel
- Two 2.5 A fuses or breakers on the central overhead fuses or circuit breakers
panel

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.16

15-18 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2 LIMITATIONS
The limitations specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual supplements
remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:
2.1 AFCS/COUPLER* ENGAGEMENT
- When the aircraft is on ground, the AFCS must be disengaged except when
checks are to be performed
- Do not operate the AFCS if the Trim test is not satisfactory
- Do not engage the GLIDE mode when height ≥ 4500 ft (1350 m) AGL
- Switch off coupler* modes when height < 200 ft (60 m) AGL
* If installed

2.2 HEIGHT LIMITATION

- Minimum height for AFCS hands-off operation: 400 ft (120 m) AGL
2.3 LONGITUDINAL CG
- Rear CG limit: 3.52 m (138.6 in)

3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
The emergency procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

3.1 UNCOMMANDED AFCS INPUTS

If jerks or sudden movements independent of air turbulence are felt during the flight
with the AFCS engaged:
- AFCS ............................................................. Disengage
Anomaly disappears:

YES NO

- AFCS ...... Re-engage channels one at a time

Faulty channel identified AFCS not faulty

- AFCS ...... Disengage faulty channel Re-engage AFCS if required

re-engage other channels
as required

CONTINUE FLIGHT

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.16

15-18 Page 4
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3.2 RH HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FAILURE

- Apply RH hydraulic failure procedure (refer to SECTION 3)
- Disengage AFCS yaw channel
Apply same procedure in case of intentional yaw servo hydraulic cut-off.

3.3 VERTICAL GYRO FAILURE

WARNING CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

AP + AP Cyclic and collective controls ...............HANDS ON

(blinking for 10 sec.) Pilot horizon / Stand-by horizon ...........COMPARE
+ • Automatic disengagement of:
GYRO . Pitch channel
. Roll channel
+ . Monitoring Unit
[ P ], [ R ], [MONIT] : ON . HDG, ALT, A/S and all other coupler* modes
are inoperative
+ • Flight Director* modes remain operative
• Yaw channel remains operative

CONTINUE FLIGHT
(VMC conditions)
or
LEAVE IMC CONDITIONS
AS SOON AS POSSIBLE
* If installed

3.4 HARDOVER/AFCS CHANNEL FAILURE

WARNING CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

AP + AP Cyclic and collective controls .............. HANDS ON

(blinking for 10 sec.) Faulty channel .........................................Disengage (if
+ Monitoring Unit inoperative)
Automatic disengagement of
faulty channel if Monitoring NOTE
Unit operative Power reduction may be required to comply with
the limitations.
Altitude loss following an AFCS failure is not
Hardover to the faulty greater than 300 ft (90 m).
channel
CONTINUE FLIGHT

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.16

15-18 Page 5
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3.5 PILOT HORIZON FAILURE

WARNING CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

AP + AP Stand-by horizon .................................... REFER TO

(blinking for 10 sec.) • AFCS remains operative but without failure
+ monitoring device
flag on pilot horizon • Flight Director* is inoperative
+
CONTINUE FLIGHT
[MONIT] : ON
* If installed
3.6 GYRO COMPASS FAILURE
WARNING CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

AP + AP • Automatic disengagement of:

(blinking for 10 sec.) - yaw channel
+
- HDG mode
HDG flag on HSI
+ Pedals.............................. FEET ON
[ Y ] and [T/C] : ON - Yaw control by the pilot
Y + - HDG mode and yaw channel are inoperative
light illuminates - Pitch and roll channel remain operative
+
[HDG] ON + HDG * CONTINUE FLIGHT
(if HDG mode engaged)

3.7 TRIM FAILURE

WARNING CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
Flight controls....................... HANDS ON
TRIM
Cyclic trim release .................. PRESS, time to:
(illuminates for 10 sec.) or .................. PRESS faulty trim
+ pushbutton
Automatic disengagement of AFCS ...................................... Re-engage
faulty parallel trim (safety NOTE
device) The AFCS faulty channel continues to operate
without being automatically trimmed.
Faulty channel........................... Center galvanometer via
Before automatic
cyclic trim release as
disengagement, the cyclic
required
tends to move in failure
direction CONTINUE FLIGHT

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.16

15-18 Page 6
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3.8 ARTIFICIAL LOAD SYSTEM SEIZURE

WARNING CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
Cyclic stick seizure in Cyclic trim release .............................PRESS
one direction Seizure disappears:

One trim parallel NO YES

actuator is seized ............ PRESS, check lights
on
Apply a force of 10 daN (22 lb) on the corresponding cyclic
channel to break the trim mechanical fuse
CONTINUE FLIGHT
(VMC conditions)
or
LEAVE IMC CONDITIONS AS SOON AS POSSIBLE

3.9 ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY FAILURE

3.9.1 Single inverter AC power supply failure (VFR version)
WARNING CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

AP + AP AFCS disengages automatically:

(blinking for 10 sec.) Controls..............................................HANDS ON
+ [ INV # ]................................................CHECK ON
INV.# Affected inverter ..................................RESET, if possible
Inverter failure CONTINUE FLIGHT

3.9.2 Dual inverter* AC power supply failure (IFR version)

WARNING CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

INV.# Same procedure as above but AFCS doesn't disengage.

CONTINUE FLIGHT
Inverter failure
NOTE
The other inverter takes over and automatically supplies the
whole AC circuit.
* If installed
3.9.3 Complete electrical AC and/or DC power supply failure
In the event of total AC or DC power supply failure, AFCS disengages automatically
and cannot be re-engaged.
LEAVE IMC CONDITIONS AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.16

15-18 Page 7
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
The normal procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:
4.1 RUN-UP CHECK
ADD:
1. ....................................... CHECK released
2. Cyclic friction................................................ APPLY a low friction. To reduce the
friction do not completely unscrew
the ajustment nut
3. Yaw pedals friction....................................... APPLY a moderate high friction
4. + * ............................................. ON, INV.1 , INV.2 *
5. HSI............................................................... No HDG flag
6. Gyro horizon(s) ............................................ No flag

NOTE

A too high cyclic friction and/or a too low pedal friction can lead to a
malfunction of the AFCS.
* If installed

4.1.1 AFCS test

1. Test selector switch (Figure 4)..................... SET to "LTS", CHECK:
• AFCS control panel lights on
(2.5 sec. time delay)
• CPL panel lights on
• "TEST" light on
2. Test selector switch set to "0" ...................... All AFCS and CPL lights off
3. Pitch, roll, yaw channels ............................. ENGAGE and CHECK:
• [ P ], [ R ], [ Y ], [MONIT]: ON
• Galvanometer lights off
4. Cyclic beep trim .......................................... CHECK action on cyclic stick in the 4
directions and that relevant
galvanometer pointer moves
accordingly
5. AFCS ........................................................... Switch OFF via pilot's cyclic
AP and AP blink for 10 sec.,
check all channels and mode ON
6. Repeat (3.) to (5.) for copilot cyclic (if installed)

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.16

15-18 Page 8
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.1.2 Failure monitoring unit test

- Pitch channel test:
1 Pilot's horizon .......................................... Check no flag
2. Pitch channel ........................................... Engage:
[ P ], [MONIT], check ON
3. Cyclic beep trim ...................................... Actuate in pitch:
• cyclic moves in relevant direction
4. Test selector switch (Figure 4)................. Set to "MONIT":
• AP and AP blink for 10 sec.
• GYRO ,
• cyclic stops moving
• galvanometers re-center, light
comes on
• [MONIT] ON light flashes then
goes off
• [ P ] pushbutton check ON

5. Test selector switch ................................. Set to "0"

- Roll channel test:
Same procedure as pitch channel

4.1.3 Trim test

CAUTION
Do not operate the AFCS if TRIM light does not come on or remains on
during trim tests.
- Pitch channel test:
1. Pitch channel ........................................... Engage:
[ P ], [MONIT] check ON
2. Test selector switch (Figure 4)................. Set to "TRIM":
• TRIM lights up after 2 sec. delay
then
• cyclic steps backward while TRIM
blinks
3. Test selector switch ................................. Set to "0"
4. Pitch channel ........................................... Disengage:
• [ P ] pushbutton, check ON
- Roll channel test:
Same procedure as pitch channel with left cyclic movements during test.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.16

15-18 Page 9
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.1.4 Coupler* test

1. Move HDG bug on HSI to the right of present heading
2. Select a ROC = 500 ft/min. on the VSI
3. Engage respectively
[ P ], [ R ], [HDG], [V/S], [F/D] ...................... CHECK HDG + VS and:
• F/D pointers indicate to fly up
and right
[CPL]............................................................ CHECK:
• Cyclic moves backward and right
4. Disengage CPL on cyclic grip
and F/D on control panel.............................. CPL blinks for 10 sec. and
HDG and VS
5. Cyclic stick ................................................... CENTER
6. Test selector ................................................ SET to "EXC. DEV", check 2
light up on CPL panel
7. Test selector ................................................ SET back to "0", check 2
on CPL panel
8. AFCS ........................................................... OFF

* If installed

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.16

15-18 Page 10
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.2 BEFORE TAKEOFF CHECK

ADD:

CAUTION

Do not keep the AFCS on with helicopter on the ground as trim may unwind,
thus causing the cyclic stick to move up to the stops.
1 Test selector switch ..................................... Check set to "0"
2 Pitch, roll, yaw channels .............................. Engage
• [ P ], [ R ], [ Y ] and [MONIT]
check ON
• galvanometer lights off
3 Coupler* and Flight Director* ....................... ENGAGE as required, check:

CPL and F/D

* If installed
4.3 IN FLIGHT AFCS OPERATION
4.3.1 Basic modes
Pitch, roll, yaw and turn coordination: [ P ], [ R ], [ Y ], [T/C] engaged.
4.3.1.1 Pitch and roll channel flying modes
- "Hands Off" ................................................ AFCS holds attitudes
- Cyclic stick trim released ........................... AFCS operates as a damper
- Through artificial loads............................... Trim actuators are inhibited
series actuators counteract within
limits of their authority
- Through cyclic beep trim ............................ Attitude reference is changed
4.3.1.2 Yaw channel flying modes
- "Feet Off " .................................................. AFCS holds present heading within
its authority limits
- Operating yaw pedals ................................ Heading reference is changed
- Heading change......................................... Pilot must bring the helicopter to the
desired heading, as soon as rate of
turn is < 1.5 °/sec., present heading
is captured. The pilot may then fly
"feet off" so that yaw channel can
hold new heading

NOTE 1
Yaw channel is efficient when some yaw friction is applied to the pedals. It is
therefore recommended to apply effective friction on the pedals.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.16

15-18 Page 11
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.3.1.3 Coordinated turns, T/C mode

MODE OPERATING ENVELOPE
T/C
- Airspeed greater than 50 KIAS (92 km/h)
Yaw channel
- Angle of bank > 7°
coordinates the turn

NOTE
On each pitch or roll channel, only one additional mode may be engaged at a
time.
When an additional mode is engaged on a channel, the cyclic trim button is
inhibited on the corresponding axis.
4.3.2 Additional modes (without optional coupler)
When the coupler is not installed, the three HDG, ALT and A/S modes are
incorporated in the basic AFCS ([CPL] pushbutton inoperative).
MODE OPERATING ENVELOPE
HDG
IAS ≥ 50 kt (92 km/h).
HSI selected heading
NOTE
capture and hold via
T/C mode provides turn coordination.
roll channel
ALT IAS ≥ 60 KIAS (111 km/h)
Altitude hold via pitch Engagement with ROC ≤ 1000 ft/min (5 m/s)
channel Excessive deviation warning flashes when
altitude > ±120 ft/engagement altitude
A/S IAS ≥ 50 KIAS (92 km/h)
Airspeed hold via Excessive deviation warning flashes when
pitch channel airspeed > ±12 kt/engagement airspeed

4.3.3 Additional modes (with optional coupler)

These modes will effectively be operative when [CPL] pushbutton is engaged on the
AFCS control panel.

CAUTION
Significant power changes may affect coupler operation.
When IAS and/or power are modified, the pilot must check the sideslip angle
and operate the yaw pedals to restore helicopter roll attitude and neutralize the
yaw actuator.
During approach, switch off coupler modes below 200 ft (60 m) AGL.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.16

15-18 Page 12
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Same additional modes as for basic AFCS plus the following modes:

MODE OPERATION ENVELOPE

V/S
VSI selected IAS ≥ 60 KIAS (111 km/h)
vertical speed
capture and hold
(via pitch channel)
80 kt (148 km/h) ≤ IAS ≤ 120 kt (222 km/h)
G/S
Excessive deviation warning flashes when
Glide slope beam
aircraft position > ±1.2 point/glide axis
capture and hold
NOTE
(via pitch channel)
Testing the radar altimeter disengages the mode.

G/A G/A mode captures an IAS = 65 kt (120 km/h)

Go-around mode. Apply power as required to obtain a ROC > 0.

VOR 80 kt (148 km/h) ≤ IAS ≤ 120 kt (222 km/h)

HSI selected
VOR radial NOTE
capture and hold In case of poor VOR reception, VHF radio interferences
(via roll channel) may affect operation of this mode.

V/L 80 kt (148 km/h) ≤ IAS ≤ 120 kt (222 km/h)

Approach VOR radial Excessive deviation warning flashes when
or aircraft position > ±1.7 point/LOC axis
Localizer beam NOTE
capture and hold The approach VOR mode can be engaged when the
(via roll channel) aircraft is close to the VOR station.

B/C
Localizer back-course
beam 80 kt (148 km/h) ≤ IAS ≤ 120 kt (222 km/h)
capture and hold
(via roll channel)

NAV Not used in basic coupler version

Optional mode

NOTE
A coupler safety feature on pitch channel will automatically maintain a radar altimeter
height of 80 ft (24 m) AGL at the end of a glide-slope coupled ILS approach if the pilot fails
to disengage the coupled mode below 200 ft (60m).

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.16

15-18 Page 13
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.3.4 Flight Director* modes

The Flight Director mode is activated as soon as [F/D] pushbutton is engaged on
the AFCS control panel. It is not necessary for the AFCS and the coupler to be in
operating for the F/D to be activated.
The Flight Director provides two basic functions:
- The monitoring of normal AFCS and coupler operations when additional modes
are engaged by monitoring the proper position of the F/D command bars on the
pilot's horizon
- In case of AFCS failure, the Flight Director helps the pilot to fly and steer the
helicopter manually along the desired selected path (VOR radial, ILS, etc.) by
following the F/D command bars
* If installed

4.4 AFTER LANDING

Disengage AFCS via the cyclic stick AFCS OFF pushbutton.
CAUTION
Do not keep the AFCS on with helicopter on the ground as trim may unwind,
thus causing the cyclic stick to move up to the stops.

5 PERFORMANCE DATA
The performance data specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.16

15-18 Page 14
 FLIGHT MANUAL

FLIGHT MANUAL
AS 355 NP

SUPPLEMENT

EMERGENCY FLOATATION GEAR

AERAZUR

IMPORTANT NOTE

The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given

in the basic flight manual and/or the supplements listed in section supplement 0.

The effectivity of the manual at the latest revision is specified on the list of effective
pages.

THIS SUPPLEMENT MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE FLIGHT MANUAL WHEN

THE EQUIPMENT MENTIONED ABOVE IS INSTALLED ON THE AIRCRAFT.

Airbus Helicopters D i r e c t i o n T e c h n i q u e S u p p o r t
Aéroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.17.P1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - EASA CERTIFICATION

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• A .................................. Specific to EASA
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

SECTION
PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)
or SUP.
SUP.17.P1 1 to 1 15-18

SUP.17.P5 1 to 2 15-18 A

SUP.17 1 to 5 15-18

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.17.P5

A 15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) EASA

ISSUE 1: NR 0 to NR 1:
EASA Approval R.A.01554
NORMAL REVISION 1 - APRIL 2008
on February 18th, 2009

ISSUE 2:
Approved on January 12, 2016 under
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 15-18
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J056
Title New issue
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.17.P5

A 15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1 GENERAL
The emergency floatation gear is designed to keep the rotorcraft afloat to permit safe
and orderly passenger evacuation in case of ditching on water.

1.1 DESCRIPTION
The emergency floatation gear installation consists of a landing gear assembly fitted
with:

- Two floatation units (floats) mounted in parallel along each skid of the aircraft
landing gear and composed of 5 water-tight separated compartments

- An inflation system for each float comprising one helium cylinder with a two-cap
firing head. The cylinders are fitted with a pressure indicator and allow the floats
to be inflated in less than 3 seconds

- An electrical control system with a FLOAT SYST. OFF/ARM switch on the

instrument panel to set the system to "Armed" when required. Two breakers are
located in the RH side of the rear cargo hold

- A floats firing pushbutton under the collective grip(s)

- An optional handle for the mechanically-operated floats firing control

Figure 1: Emergency floatation gear

1.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

Figure 2: Controls and indicators

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.17

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2 LIMITATIONS
The limitations specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual supplements
remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:
2.1 AIRSPEED
- Emergency floatation gear stowed and system not armed:
• No limitation
- Emergency floatation gear stowed armed or floats inflated:
• VNE power on................................................. : 135 kt (250 km/h)
• VNE power off (TRQ < 2 x 20%) ..................... : 100 kt (185 km/h)

2.2 ALTITUDE ENVELOPE

Maximum altitude for float inflation .................................... : 6600 ft (2000 m).
2.3 PROHIBITED OPERATIONS
This equipment is approved for emergency use only.
Take-off is prohibited after emergency landing on water.
2.4 CYLINDER PRESSURE
The limit values of pressure in the inflation cylinder, provided by the following tables
located near the cylinders, are applicable if the flight requires the emergency floatation
gear to be operational.

NOTE
The placard located adjacent to the cylinder provides the limit values.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.17

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
The emergency procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:
- With FLOAT SYST. switch set to "ARM":
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
Float inflation not possible

CONTINUE FLIGHT

Floatation system failure

Float inflation remains possible for
both floatation units:

CONTINUE FLIGHT

- DITCHING
In the event of engine failure or other urgent requirement to alight on water, check the
rotor speed then apply the following procedure:
1. IAS ................................................................. CHECK
2. FLOAT SYST. switch ..................................... SET to "ARM"
3. FLOAT SYST. switch lights 1 and 2 ............... CHECK ON
4. FLOAT FIRING pushbutton ............................ PRESS (recommended
IAS ≤ 80 kt/148 km/h)
5. Ditch with the lowest possible forward speed and rate of descent
NOTE
A deceleration with a pitch down movement can occur when firing the floatation
gear at a speed greater than 80 kt (148 km/h).
The helicopter should be presented parallel to the swell if the wind is light. In
case of strong wind, the helicopter should be presented mid-way between the
wind direction and the swell direction with the aircraft facing a headwind
quadrant.

- EVACUATION
1. Engines .......................................................... SWITCH OFF
2. Rotor brake .................................................... APPLY at NR ≤ 170 rpm
3. Door emergency handles ............................... PULL-UP, JETTISON forward doors
4. Unfasten seat belts and abandon aircraft
WARNING
ABANDON AIRCRAFT ONCE THE ROTOR HAS STOPPED.
FORWARD DOORS MUST BE JETTISONED WHEN THE AIRCRAFT IS AFLOAT.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.17

15-18 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
The normal procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

4.1 EXTERIOR CHECK:

ADD:
- Floatation units................................................. LOCK in the lower position
- Float protective covers condition...................... CHECK
- Pressure in the two inflation cylinders ............. CHECK
- Rear cargo bay float system breakers ............. CHECK IN
NOTE
The placard located adjacent to the cylinder provides the limit pressure values.

4.2 AFTER START CHECKLIST:

- Arming of the emergency floatation gear:
FLOAT SYST. switch ....................................... SET to "ARM"
FLOAT SYST. switch lights 1 and 2 ................. CHECK ON
- Disarming the emergency floatation gear:
FLOAT SYST. switch ....................................... SET to "OFF"
FLOAT SYST. switch lights 1 and 2 ................. CHECK OFF

4.3 BEFORE TAKEOFF AND LANDING CHECK:

It is recommended to set the emergency floatation system to "ARM" when takeoff or
landing phase is performed over water.
FLOAT SYST. switch ....................................... SET to "ARM"

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.17

15-18 Page 4
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5 PERFORMANCE DATA
The performance data specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

5.1 CLIMBING PERFORMANCE:

- All Engines Operative:
ROC is reduced by 50 ft/min (0.25 m/sec.)
- One Engine Inoperative:
ROC is reduced by 30 ft/min (0.15 m/sec.)

5.2 TAKEOFF WEIGHT

Takeoff weight given in SECTION 5.1 permitting climb at 150 ft/min (0.76 m/sec.) at
1000 ft (305 m) AGL OEI must be reduced by 25 kg (55 lb).

5.3 EQUIVALENT CATEGORY A OPERATION

Maximum takeoff and landing weight must be reduced by 25 kg (55 lb) during
Equivalent Category A operations.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.17

15-18 Page 5
 FLIGHT MANUAL

FLIGHT MANUAL

AS 355 NP

SUPPLEMENT

"AIR EQUIPMENT 76370" ELECTRICAL HOIST

136 kg (300 lb)

IMPORTANT NOTE

The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given

in the basic flight manual and/or the supplements listed in section supplement 0.

The effectivity of the manual at the latest revision is specified on the list of effective
pages.

THIS SUPPLEMENT MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE FLIGHT MANUAL WHEN

THE EQUIPMENT MENTIONED ABOVE IS INSTALLED ON THE AIRCRAFT.

Airbus Helicopters D i r e c t i o n T e c h n i q u e S u p p o r t
Aéroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.18.P1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - EASA CERTIFICATION

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
 Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
 A .................................. Specific to EASA
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
 Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
 XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

SECTION
PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)
or SUP.
SUP.18.P1 1 to 1 15-18

SUP.18.P5 1 to 2 16-27 A

SUP.18 1 to 7 16-27

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.18.P5

A 16-27 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) EASA

ISSUE 1: NR 0 to 2:
EASA Approval No. 10034224
NORMAL REVISION 2 - MAY 2010
on March 17th, 2011

ISSUE 2:
Approved on January 12, 2016 under
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 15-18
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J056
Title New issue
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information
Approved on June 06, 2019 under the
NORMAL REVISION 1 date code 16-27
authority of EASA DOA No. 21J700
Improvement of "Warning" about static electricity (electrostatic
Title
discharge device)
Revised
SUP.18.P5 pages 1 and 2; SUP.18 page 6.
information
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.18.P5

A 16-27 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1 GENERAL
The hoist installation is designed to raise or lower loads while the aircraft is hovering.
The helicopter can be equipped with the AIR EQUIPMENT 76 370 electrical type hoist.

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE INSTALLATION

The hoist installation comprises:
- A pivoting jib (2) provided with a locking device (3) (ferrying and hoisting position),
mounted on the LH side of the helicopter
- A drum-type hoist (1) fitted with a 40 m (130 ft) cable
- An electrical power supply and control circuit
- Functional safety devices:
 an "Up travel limit " detection which automatically switches off the
electrical power supply when the hook is fully up
 a "Down travel limit " detection which automatically switches off the
electrical power supply when 4 m (13 ft) of cable are left
 a mechanical safety pin stopping the hoist drum when 3 m (10 ft) of cable
are left in case of "Down travel limit" detection failure
- Two cable protections (8) secured to the LH landing gear skid
- A hand cable cutter stowed on the rear wall allows the hoist operator to sever the
cable, if necessary

The system is protected by:

- One 100 A fuse provided in the Electrical Master Box
- One 60 A circuit-breaker for the hoist supply circuit on the aft cabin wall (4)
- One 6.3 A fuse or breaker for the "Up-Down" control system on the LH overhead
fuses or breakers panel
- Two 2.5 A fuses or breakers protecting the "Emergency Release" circuit on the
center overhead fuses or breakers panel
- One 2.5 A fuse or breaker for the mission selector on the LH overhead fuses or
breakers panel

NOTE
The hoist is fitted with an emergency pyrotechnic cable cutter.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.18

16-27 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 1: Hoist installation and controls

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.18

16-27 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1.2 PILOT'S CONTROLS

- A mission selector (10) to enable hoist installation energizing when selected to
"HOIST"
- A guarded cable cutter pushbutton (9) on the collective pitch grip to sever the
cable in case of emergency
- An optional rocker switch on the cyclic grip to operate the hoist
1.3 HOIST OPERATOR'S CONTROLS
- The hoist operator's control grip is equipped with a rocker-switch (7) to control the
raising, lowering and stopping of the hook
- Hoist control lights:
- One green light on the hoist for "Hoist moving up"
- One red light on the hoist for "Up travel limit" micro switch test
- A hand cable cutter in case of emergency

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.18

16-27 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2 LIMITATIONS
The limitations specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual supplements
remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:
2.1 MINIMUM CREW
One pilot and one hoist operator.
2.2 WEIGHT LIMITATION
Maximum permissible load on hoist cable: 136 kg (300 lb)
2.3 OPERATING LIMITATION
Don't exceed 6 consecutive hoisting operations plus one descent with maximum load
and maximum cable reel-out or equivalent to avoid hoist motor overheating.

2.4 LANDING
Landing with a load suspended on the hoist cable is forbidden.

2.5 LOCATION OF CG
Left lateral CG location extended to 0.16 m (6.30 in) with a load on the hoist.

3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
The emergency procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

3.1 HOIST FAILURE

According to the load carried and the circumstances, the crew may either:
- Manually hoist the cable inside the aircraft if possible or,
- Return to base at reduced speed with the hoist cable slightly inclined with a VNE
of 60 kt or,
- Cut the cable if necessary: the cable may be severed by the pyrotechnic cable
cutter controlled by the guarded pushbutton mounted on the pilot's collective pitch
lever grip or by the mechanical cutter available to the hoist operator in case of a
total electrical failure.
3.2 ENGINE FAILURE
IN HOVER:
1. Collective pitch. ....................................... MAINTAIN NR > 360 rpm
2. Load ........................................................ RELEASE as soon as possible
according to circumstances
3. Cyclic stick ............................................... FORWARD to gain forward speed if
necessary and according to
circumstances

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.18

16-27 Page 4
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
The normal procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

4.1 EXTERIOR CHECK

ADD:
- Cable protections on landing gear ............. CHECK ON and SECURED
- Hoist jib and jib locking device ................... CHECK
- Hoist and cable .......................................... CHECK condition
- Hook, metallic stop and bumper ................ CHECK condition
If aircraft not fitted with LH sliding door:
- LH door and sub-door ................................ REMOVED

4.2 INTERIOR CHECK

ADD:
- ICS system ................................................ CHECK
- Hoist operator control grip ......................... CHECK installed
- Hoist operator safety belt (5) ..................... CHECK installed and secured
- Hoist operator's glove ................................ CHECK on board
- Manual cable cutter ................................... CHECK stowed in place
- Lateral CG computation ............................. CHECK within limits with the load on
the hook

4.3 RUN-UP CHECK

ADD:
1. Mission selector ....................................... SET to "HOIST"
2. Correct UP and DOWN operation ............ CHECK
3. Mission selector ....................................... SET to "0"

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.18

16-27 Page 5
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.4 HOISTING OPERATION

4.4.1 Before hoisting
- Hoist operator:
1. Safety belt................................................ FASTENED and SECURED
2. Hoisting glove .......................................... On the hand which guides the cable
- Pilot:
1. Pilot/Hoist operator ICS ........................... CHECK operative
2. LH door .................................................... OPEN at IAS  60 kt (111 km/h)
3. Heating and demisting ............................. OFF
4. Power margin available ........................... CHECK
5. All parameters ......................................... CHECK
4.4.2 Hoisting
WARNING

TO DISCHARGE POSSIBLE STATIC ELECTRICITY FROM THE AIRCRAFT,

THE HOOK SHALL HAVE GROUND CONTACT BEFORE THE CABLE IS
GRASPED.
IF AN ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE DEVICE SUCH AS A CABLE IS USED, IT
HAS TO BE REMOVED AFTER THE HOISTING PHASE.
IF THE HOOK COMES INTO CONTACT FORCEFULLY WITH THE UPPER
MECHANICAL STOP (FAILURE OF THE HOISTING AUTOMATIC STOP
SYSTEM), ABORT THE HOISTING MISSION.

CAUTION

Take all precautions to prevent the load being hoisted from hitting any part of
the helicopter.

- When helicopter stabilized above the hoisting site:

1. Hoist jib .................................................... SET in hoisting position
2. Mission selector ....................................... SET to "HOIST"

Hoist operator controls the hoist. To bring the load into the cabin, unlock the jib
and pivot it inwards.
If fitted, the hoist may be operated by the pilot, using the rocker switch on the
cyclic grip.
4.4.3 After hoisting operation
1. Hoist jib ........................................................ SET in stowed position
2. Mission selector ........................................... SET to "0"
3. Door closing ................................................. As required (check VNE with door
open SECTION 2)

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.18

16-27 Page 6
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5 PERFORMANCE DATA
Hoist jib in stowed position and cable fully reeled-in, the performance data specified in
the basic flight manual and in the flight manual supplements remain applicable and are
supplemented or modified by the following:

5.1 RATES OF CLIMB

Reduce ROC performance data by:
- 100 ft/min (0.5 m/s) AEO
- 20 ft/min (0.1 m/s) OEI

5.2 TAKEOFF WEIGHT

Takeoff weight given in SECTION 5.1 permitting climb at 150 ft/min at 1000 ft AGL
OEI must be reduced by 15 kg (33 lb).

5.3 EQUIVALENT CATEGORY A OPERATION

Maximum takeoff and landing weight must be reduced by 15 kg (33 lb) during
Equivalent Category A operations.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.18

16-27 Page 7
 FLIGHT MANUAL

FLIGHT MANUAL
AS 355 NP

SUPPLEMENT

ELECTRICAL HOIST "BREEZE"

204 kg (450 lb)

IMPORTANT NOTE

The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given

in the basic flight manual and/or the supplements listed in section supplement 0.

The effectivity of the manual at the latest revision is specified on the list of effective
pages.

THIS SUPPLEMENT MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE FLIGHT MANUAL WHEN

THE EQUIPMENT MENTIONED ABOVE IS INSTALLED ON THE AIRCRAFT.

Airbus Helicopters D i r e c t i o n T e c h n i q u e S u p p o r t
Aéroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.19.1.P1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - EASA CERTIFICATION

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
 Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
 A .................................. Specific to EASA
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
 Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
 XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

SECTION
PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)
or SUP.
SUP.19.1.P1 1 to 1 15-18

SUP.19.1.P5 1 to 2 16-27 A

SUP.19.1 1 to 7 16-27

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.19.1.P5

A 16-27 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) EASA

ISSUE 1: NR 0 to 1:
EASA Approval No. R.A.01554
NORMAL REVISION 1 - APRIL 2008
on February 18th, 2009

ISSUE 2:
Approved on January 12, 2016 under
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 15-18
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J056
Title New issue
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information
Approved on June 06, 2019 under the
NORMAL REVISION 1 date code 16-27
authority of EASA DOA No. 21J700
Improvement of "Warning" about static electricity (electrostatic
Title
discharge device)
Revised
SUP.19.1.P5 pages 1 and 2; SUP.19.1 page 6.
information
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.19.1.P5

A 16-27 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1 GENERAL
The hoist installation is designed to raise or lower loads while the aircraft is hovering.
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE INSTALLATION
The hoist installation comprises:
- A pivoting jib (2) provided with a locking device (3) (ferrying and hoisting
position), mounted on the LH side of the helicopter.
- A drum-type hoist (1) driven by a variable speed electric motor and fitted with a
50 m cable.
- An electrical power supply and control circuit.
- An electronic control unit secured to the LH side cargo hold, providing:
 control of the hoist up/down speed,
 automatic deceleration before reaching the high and low travel limits,
 automatic stop at travel limit and in case of incorrect winding or unwinding of
the cable.
- Two cable protections (8) secured to the LH landing gear skid.
- A hand cable cutter stowed on the rear wall allows the hoist operator to sever
the cable, if necessary.

The system is protected by:

- One 130 A fuse provided in the Electrical Master box,
- Two 7.5 A circuit-breakers on the aft cabin wall (4), protecting the "Emergency
Release" circuit,
- One 100 A circuit-breaker on the aft cabin wall (4), for the hoist supply circuit,
- Two 2.5 A fuses or circuit-breakers on the overhead center fuses or breakers
panel, protecting the "Emergency Release" circuit,
- One 6.3 A fuse or breaker on the LH overhead center fuses or breakers panel
for the "Up-Down" control system.
- One 2.5 A fuse or breaker for the mission selector on the LH overhead fuses
or breakers panel.

NOTE
The hoist is fitted with an emergency pyrotechnic cable cutter.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.19.1

16-27 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 1: Hoist installation and controls

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.19.1

16-27 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1.2 PILOT'S CONTROLS

- A mission selector (12) to enable hoist installation energizing when selected to
"HOIST".
- A guarded cable cutter pushbutton (7) on the collective pitch grip to sever the
cable in case of emergency.
- An optional rocker switch on the cyclic grip to operate the hoist.

1.3 HOIST OPERATOR'S CONTROLS

The hoist operator's control grip (5) is equipped with:
- An intercom push-to-talk pushbutton (9).
- A knurled knob (11) to control the raising, lowering and stopping of the cable. The
cable winding speed is proportional to the displacement of the knurled knob.
- An unwound cable length indicator (10) in meters or a white light (10) which
indicates hoist installation energizing if the handle support bracket version is
installed.
- A hand cable cutter in case of emergency.

2 LIMITATIONS
The limitations specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual supplements
remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:
2.1 MINIMUM CREW
One pilot and one hoist operator.
2.2 WEIGHT LIMITATION
Maximum permissible load on hoist cable: 204 kg (450 lb).
2.3 LOCATION OF CG
Left lateral CG location extended to 0.16 m (6.30 in) with a load on the hoist.

2.4 LANDING
Landing with a load suspended on the hoist cable is prohibited.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.19.1

16-27 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
The emergency procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

3.1 HOIST FAILURE

According to the load carried and the circumstances, the crew may either:
- Manually hoist the cable inside the aircraft if possible or,
- Return to base at reduced speed with the hoist cable slightly inclined with a VNE
of 60 kt or,
- Cut the cable if necessary: the cable may be severed by the pyrotechnic cable
cutter controlled by the guarded pushbutton mounted on the pilot's collective pitch
lever grip or by the mechanical cutter available to the hoist operator in case of a
total electrical failure.
3.2 ENGINE FAILURE
- IN HOVER:
1. Collective pitch. ....................................... MAINTAIN NR > 360 rpm
2. Load ........................................................ RELEASE as soon as possible
according to circumstances
3. Cyclic stick ............................................... FORWARD to gain forward speed if
necessary and according to
circumstances

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.19.1

16-27 Page 4
 FLIGHT MANUAL

RR 2a

The paragraph 4.1 Exterior check and 4.3 Run-up check are superseded by the following
paragraph:

4.1 EXTERIOR CHECK

ADD:
- Cable protectors on landing gear ................... CHECK ON and SECURED
- Hoist jib and jib locking device ....................... CHECK
- Hoist and cable general condition .................. CHECK condition
- Hoist hook ...................................................... CHECK condition,free rotation, latch
functioning and UP position (on
STOP).
.

• If aircraft not fitted with LH sliding door:

- LH cabin door and sub-door ...................... REMOVED

4.3 RUN-UP CHECK

ADD:
1. Mission selector ............................................. SET to "HOIST"
2. Correct UP and DOWN operation .................. CHECK
3. Cable condition .............................................. CHECK, where crimped to the
bottom cup of the hook assembly

4. Hoist hook ..................................................... Up position ( on stop)

5. Mission selector ............................................. SET to "0"

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.19.1

20-28 *RR*
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
The normal procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

4.1 EXTERIOR CHECK

ADD:
- Cable protections on landing gear ................. CHECK ON and SECURED
- Hoist jib and jib locking device ....................... CHECK
- Hoist and cable .............................................. CHECK condition
- Hook: stop, rubber bumper and spring........... CHECK condition, spring not fully
compressed
If aircraft not fitted with LH sliding door:
- LH door and sub-door .................................... REMOVED

4.2 INTERIOR CHECK

ADD:
- ICS system..................................................... CHECK
- Hoist operator control grip .............................. CHECK installed
- Hoist operator safety belt (5) .......................... CHECK installed and secured
- Hoist operator's glove .................................... CHECK on board
- Manual cable cutter........................................ CHECK stowed in place
- Lateral CG computation ................................. CHECK within limits with the load on
the hook

4.3 RUN-UP CHECK

ADD:
1.Mission selector .............................................. SET to "HOIST"
2. Correct UP and DOWN operation .................. CHECK
3. Mission selector ............................................. SET to "0"

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.19.1

16-27 Page 5
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4.4 HOISTING OPERATION

4.4.1 Before hoisting
- Hoist operator:
1. Safety belt................................................ FASTENED and SECURED
2. Hoisting glove .......................................... On the hand which guides the cable
- Pilot:
1. Pilot/Hoist operator ICS ........................... CHECK operative
2. LH door .................................................... OPEN at IAS  60 kt (111 km/h)
3. Heating and demisting ............................. OFF
4. Power margin available ........................... CHECK
5. All parameters ......................................... CHECK
4.4.2 Hoisting
WARNING

TO DISCHARGE POSSIBLE STATIC ELECTRICITY FROM THE AIRCRAFT,

THE HOOK SHALL HAVE GROUND CONTACT BEFORE THE CABLE IS
GRASPED.
IF AN ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE DEVICE SUCH AS A CABLE IS USED, IT
HAS TO BE REMOVED AFTER THE HOISTING PHASE.
IF THE HOOK COMES INTO CONTACT FORCEFULLY WITH THE UPPER
MECHANICAL STOP (FAILURE OF THE HOISTING AUTOMATIC STOP
SYSTEM), ABORT THE HOISTING MISSION.

CAUTION

Take all precautions to prevent the load being hoisted from hitting any part of
the helicopter.

- When helicopter stabilized above the hoisting site:

1. Hoist jib .................................................... SET in hoisting position
2. Mission selector ....................................... SET to "HOIST"

Hoist operator controls the hoist. To bring the load into the cabin, unlock the jib
and pivot it inwards.
If fitted, the hoist may be operated by the pilot, using the rocker switch on the
cyclic grip.
4.4.3 After hoisting operation
1. Hoist jib ........................................................ SET in stowed position
2. Mission selector ........................................... SET to "0"
3. Door closing ................................................. As required (check VNE with door
open SECTION 2)

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.19.1

16-27 Page 6
 FLIGHT MANUAL

RR 2a

The paragraph 4.4.3 After hoisting operation is superseded by the following paragraph:

4.4.3 After hoisting operation

1. Hoist hook at the end of the hoisting
operation and throughout cruise flight .......... UP position ( on stop)
1. Hoist jib ........................................................ SET in stowed position
2. Mission selector ........................................... SET to "0"
3. Door closing ................................................. As required (check VNE with door
open SECTION 2)

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.19.1

20-28 *RR*
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5 PERFORMANCE DATA
Hoist jib in stowed position and cable fully reeled-in, the performance data specified in
the basic flight manual and in the flight manual supplements remain applicable and are
supplemented or modified by the following:

5.1 RATES OF CLIMB

Reduce ROC performance data by:
- 100 ft/min (0.5 m/s) AEO
- 20 ft/min (0.1 m/s) OEI

5.2 TAKEOFF WEIGHT

Takeoff weight given in SECTION 5.1 permitting climb at 150 ft/min at 1000 ft AGL
OEI must be reduced by 15 kg (33 lb).

5.3 EQUIVALENT CATEGORY A OPERATION

Maximum takeoff and landing weight must be reduced by 15 kg (33 lb) during
Equivalent Category A operations.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.19.1

16-27 Page 7
 FLIGHT MANUAL

FLIGHT MANUAL

AS 355 NP

SUPPLEMENT

TWO-PASSENGER FRONT SEAT

IMPORTANT NOTE

The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given

in the basic Flight Manual and/or the Supplements listed in section Supplement 0.

The effectivity of the manual at the latest revision is specified on the list of effective
pages.

THIS SUPPLEMENT MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE FLIGHT MANUAL WHEN

THE EQUIPMENT MENTIONED ABOVE IS INSTALLED ON THE AIRCRAFT.

Airbus Helicopters D i r e c t i o n T e c h n i q u e S u p p o r t
Aéroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.21.P1

17-23 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - EASA CERTIFICATION

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• A .................................. Specific to EASA
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

SECTION
PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)
or SUP.
SUP.21.P1 1 to 1 17-23

SUP.21.P5 1 to 2 17-23 A

SUP.21 1 to 1 17-23

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.21.P5

A 17-23 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) EASA

ISSUE 1: NR 0:
EASA Approval No. R.C.02426
NORMAL REVISION 0 - JANUARY 2007
on June 05, 2007

ISSUE 2:
Approved on January 12, 2016 under
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 15-18
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J056
Title New issue
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information
Approved EASA No. 10064298
NORMAL REVISION 1 date code 17-23
on January 11, 2018
- Deletion of the weight limitation for optional two-place seat,
Title
- Wording improvement.
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.21.P5

A 17-23 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1 GENERAL
Installed in place of the copilot's seat, the two-passenger front seat increases the total
seating capacity from six to seven people, including the pilot.

2 LIMITATIONS
The limitations specified in the basic Flight Manual and in the Flight Manual
Supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:
- Maximum number of occupants
(including flight crew) ................................................................... Seven,

- Dual controls (optional) shall be removed to install the two-passenger seat.

3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
The emergency procedures specified in the basic Flight Manual and in the Flight
Manual Supplements remain applicable.

4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
The normal procedures specified in the basic Flight Manual and in the Flight Manual
Supplements remain applicable. Special attention shall be paid to CG computation.

NOTE

Flying with seven people on board then with one pilot only presents a very
significant change in the CG position. Each configuration must be carefully
checked.

5 PERFORMANCE DATA
The performance data specified in the basic Flight Manual and in the Flight Manual
Supplements remain applicable.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.21

17-23 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

FLIGHT MANUAL
AS 355 NP

SUPPLEMENT

LONG AND SHORT "DART" FOOTSTEPS

IMPORTANT NOTE

The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given

in the basic flight manual and/or the supplements listed in section supplement 0.

The effectivity of the manual at the latest revision is specified on the list of effective
pages.

THIS SUPPLEMENT MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE FLIGHT MANUAL WHEN

THE EQUIPMENT MENTIONED ABOVE IS INSTALLED ON THE AIRCRAFT.

Airbus Helicopters D i r e c t i o n T e c h n i q u e S u p p o r t
Aéroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.22.P1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - EASA CERTIFICATION

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• A .................................. Specific to EASA
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

SECTION
PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)
or SUP.
SUP.22.P1 1 to 1 15-18

SUP.22.P5 1 to 2 15-18 A

SUP.22 1 to 1 15-18

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.22.P5

A 15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) EASA

ISSUE 1: NR 0:
EASA Approval No. R.C.02426
NORMAL REVISION 0 - JANUARY 2007
on June 05, 2007

ISSUE 2:
Approved on January 12, 2016 under
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 15-18
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J056
Title New issue
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.22.P5

A 15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1 GENERAL
The long footsteps (P/N D. 350-591-111-a) on the high landing gear facilitate cabin
access and inspection of the transmission and engine decks.
The short footsteps (P/N D. 350-591-113) on the high landing gear facilitate cabin
access.

2 LIMITATIONS
The limitations specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual supplements
remain applicable.

3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
The emergency procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable.

4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
The normal procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable.

5 PERFORMANCE DATA
The performance data specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight
manual supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the
following:

Climbing performance OEI AEO are decreased by:

- 2.5 % for ROC > 400 ft/min (2 m/sec.).

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.22

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

FLIGHT MANUAL

AS 355 NP

SUPPLEMENT

FREON AIR CONDITIONER

IMPORTANT NOTE

The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given

in the basic flight manual and/or the supplements listed in section supplement 0.

The effectivity of the manual at the latest revision is specified on the list of effective
pages.

THIS SUPPLEMENT MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE FLIGHT MANUAL WHEN

THE EQUIPMENT MENTIONED ABOVE IS INSTALLED ON THE AIRCRAFT.

Airbus Helicopters D i r e c t i o n T e c h n i q u e S u p p o r t
Aéroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.23.P1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - EASA CERTIFICATION

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• A .................................. Specific to EASA
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

SECTION
PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)
or SUP.
SUP.23.P1 1 to 1 15-18

SUP.23.P5 1 to 2 15-18 A

SUP.23 1 to 3 15-18

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.23.P5

A 15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) EASA

ISSUE 1: NR 0:
EASA Approval No. R.C.02426
NORMAL REVISION 0 - JANUARY 2007
on June 05th, 2007

ISSUE 2:
Approved on January 12, 2016 under
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 15-18
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J056
Title New issue
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.23.P5

A 15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1 GENERAL
The air conditioning system is designed to lower the ambient temperature within the
cabin and includes:
• one belt-driven compressor engaged by an electro-mechanical clutch,
• one condenser with fan,
• two evaporators with ventilation fans: one in the cockpit for crew ventilation
cooling and one in the MGB compartment for rear passenger ventilation
cooling,
• one control unit with air conditioning system fuses for the crew and one fan
speed selector for the rear passengers,
• one 2.5 fuse on the left overhead panel for the air conditioning control
system.

1.1 PILOT'S CONTROLS

The system includes one of the pilot's control units illustrated below:

No Description Function
1 Rocker switch : • OFF (neutral) : Stops system operation
• FAN engaged : Switches on ventilation
• A/C engaged : Switches on ventilation and air
conditioning
2 Rocker switch : • LOW (neutral) : Slow ventilation
• HI engaged : Fast ventilation
• MED engaged : Medium ventilation
3 Protection fuses for condensers and
fan blowers.
Figure 1: Pilot's control unit

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.23

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1.2 PASSENGER'S CONTROLS

A [HI-LOW-MED]-rocker switch located on or near the rear bulkhead allows rear
passenger ventilation adjustment.

2 LIMITATIONS
The limitations specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual supplements
remain applicable.

3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
The emergency procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

3.1 AIR CONDITIONING FAILURE

- Air conditioning system .................................. SWITCH OFF

3.2 ENGINE FAILURE

- Air conditioning system .............................. SWITCH OFF within 30 sec.

4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
The normal procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

4.1 SYSTEM OPERATION

- Set rocker switch (1): . to "FAN" for cabin ventilation,
. to "A/C" for air conditioning.
- Select ventilation rate using rocker switch (2).
- If the control unit is fitted with a rotary potentiometer (4), the ambient temperature
may be adjusted.

4.2 SYSTEM SHUTDOWN

- Set rocker switch (1) to "OFF" (neutral position).

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.23

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5 PERFORMANCE DATA
The performance data specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

5.1 TAKEOFF WEIGHT

When the air conditioning system is set to on:
- Reduce IGE or OGE hovering performance by 20 kg (44 lb).
- Reduce takeoff weight given in SECTION 5.1 permitting climb at 150 ft/min at
1000 ft AGL OEI by 30 kg (66 lb).

5.2 RATES OF CLIMB

When the air conditioning system is set to on, reduce ROC performance data by:
- 20 ft/min (- 0.1 m/sec.) AEO
- 35 ft/min (- 0.175 m/sec.) OEI

5.3 EQUIVALENT CATEGORY A OPERATION

When the air conditioning system is set to on, reduce Maximum Takeoff and Landing
Weight by 30 kg (66 lb) during Equivalent Category A operations.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.23

15-18 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

FLIGHT MANUAL
AS 355 NP

SUPPLEMENT

SPECTROLAB SEARCHLIGHT

355 A 08 5129

IMPORTANT NOTE

The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given

in the basic flight manual and/or the supplements listed in section supplement 0.

The effectivity of the manual at the latest revision is specified on the list of effective
pages.

THIS SUPPLEMENT MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE FLIGHT MANUAL WHEN

THE EQUIPMENT MENTIONED ABOVE IS INSTALLED ON THE AIRCRAFT.

Airbus Helicopters D i r e c t i o n T e c h n i q u e S u p p o r t
Aéroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.26.P1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - EASA CERTIFICATION

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• A .................................. Specific to EASA
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

SECTION
PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)
or SUP.
SUP.26.P1 1 to 1 15-18

SUP.26.P5 1 to 2 15-18 A

SUP.26 1 to 3 15-18

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.26.P5

A 15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) EASA

ISSUE 1: NR 0 to 1:
EASA Approval No. 10034224
NORMAL REVISION 1 - MAY 2010
on March 17th, 2011

ISSUE 2:
Approved on January 12, 2016 under
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 15-18
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J056
Title New issue
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.26.P5

A 15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
The 1.6 kW SPECTROLAB searchlight is designed to facilitate specific missions
(search, rescue, surveillance) where a high intensity search light is required.
It is located below the tail boom/main structure junction.
The searchlight controls are located on a portable unit which can be used by the crew
members either in the cockpit or in the cabin.
The searchlight system includes:
- a ventilated optical assembly (lamp and reflector) with FOCUS control,
- a gimbal system with azimuth and elevation motors,
- a junction box,
- a green LIGHT indicator light on the CWP. This advisory light comes on when
the searchlight is switched on.

Figure 1: SPECTROLAB searchlight installation

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.26

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1.2 SEARCHLIGHT CONTROLS UNIT

ON-OFF: stable positions

to switch the system ON and
1. Searchlight Master Switch OFF.
START: unstable position to
switch on the lamp.

Adjust the focus of the light

2. FOCUS pushbutton
beam.

Light beam direction control.

3. UP/DOWN/LEFT/RT joystick Simultaneous displacement on
both axes is possible.

NOTE
To prevent premature damage to the searchlight and to the lamp, release
the switch as soon as the searchlight is illuminated and avoid long series
of flashes.

1.3 RECOMMENDED PROCEDURE FOR OPTIMUM LAMP LIFE

It is recommended to leave the light on for at least 20 minutes once it has been
switched on.
This 20-minute period enables the lamp electrodes to be "regenerated".
This prevents erosion and premature wear of the lamp.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.26

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2 LIMITATIONS
The limitations specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual supplement
remain applicable.

3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
The emergency procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable.

4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
The normal procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented by the following:
4.1 EXTERNAL CHECKS
Visually check support brackets, attachment fittings, safety devices and wiring.

4.2 OPERATION
NOTE
It is not recommended for pilot at the controls to operate the searchlight by
himself.
CAUTION
The searchlight beam is extremely intense and radiates a lot of heat. Therefore:
- Do not activate the searchlight on ground before takeoff.
- Do not expose to persons closer than 100 ft (30 m).
- Do not direct the beam towards flammable materials when the aircraft is
flying at less than 25 ft (8 m) above them.
- Do not direct the beam towards the landing gear skids or the emergency
floatation gear floats.

4.3 PRELANDING CHECK

NOTE
When landing in areas covered with dry grass, the light should be turned off
before or immediately after landing, unless it can be pointed above the grass or
to a bare area.

5 PERFORMANCE DATA
The performance data specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remains applicable.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.26

15-18 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

FLIGHT MANUAL

AS 355 NP

SUPPLEMENT

CAMERA CARRYING
INSTALLATION

IMPORTANT NOTE

The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given

in the basic flight manual and/or the supplements listed in section supplement 0.

The effectivity of the manual at the latest revision is specified on the list of effective
pages.

THIS SUPPLEMENT MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE FLIGHT MANUAL WHEN

THE EQUIPMENT MENTIONED ABOVE IS INSTALLED ON THE AIRCRAFT.

Airbus Helicopters D i r e c t i o n T e c h n i q u e S u p p o r t
Aéroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.52.P1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - EASA CERTIFICATION

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• A .................................. Specific to EASA
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

SECTION
PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)
or SUP.
SUP.52.P1 1 to 1 15-18

SUP.52.P5 1 to 2 15-18 A

SUP.52 1 to 3 15-18

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.52.P5

A 15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) EASA

ISSUE 1: NR 0 to 1:
EASA Approval No. R.A.01554
NORMAL REVISION 1 - APRIL 2008
on February 18th, 2009

ISSUE 2:
Approved on January 12, 2016 under
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 15-18
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J056
Title New issue
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.52.P5

A 15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1 GENERAL
The installation permits the transportation of two external 24" or 16" ball-type cameras
for a helicopter equipped with high landing gear.

It is composed of:
- A cross beam supporting the cameras secured beneath the rear undercarriage
crosstube,
- One vertical support arm and one longitudinal rod connecting the main cross
beam to the airframe on each side.

Figure 1: Camera carrying installation.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.52

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2 LIMITATIONS
The limitations specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual supplements
remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

2.1 HELICOPTER CONFIGURATION

- High landing gear,
- Dual trailing edge tab on lower vertical fin.

2.2 CAMERA CONFIGURATION

Maximum camera size and weight:
- LH side: diameter: 24 in ± 2 and weight: 68 kg ± 2 kg.
- RH side: diameter: 16 in ± 2 and weight: 38 kg ± 2 kg.

2.3 TYPE OF OPERATIONS

"Equivalent Category A" operations are prohibited.

3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
The emergency procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable.

4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
The normal procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable.

5 PERFORMANCE DATA
The performance data specified in the basic flight manual in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

5.1 Performance in climb

Reduce the rate of climb according to the configuration:
24" CAMERA 24" + 16"
EMPTY BEAMS
(alone) CAMERAS
OEI - 5% - 10% - 20%

AEO - 4% - 7% - 12%

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.52

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

5.2 Non-approved performance data

The non-approved performance data specified in the basic flight manual in the flight
manual supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the
following:
- Performance in level flight:
24" CAMERA 24" + 16"
EMPTY BEAMS
(alone) CAMERAS
MAX. SPEED IN
-3% -5% -8%
LEVEL FLIGHT.

NOTE
The above corrections include the corrections related to the high landing gear.

6. WEIGHT AND BALANCE

LONGITUDINAL CG LATERAL CG
WEIGHT
INSTALLATION DISTANCE MOMENT DISTANCE MOMENT
kg (lb)
m (in) m.kg (in.lb) m (in) m.kg (in.lb)
EMPTY
29 (64) 4.256 (168) 123 (10724) 0 0
BEAMS.

Examples of weight and balance of different types of camera installations are given in
the table below:
LONGITUDINAL CG LATERAL CG
WEIGHT
INSTALLATION DISTANCE MOMENT DISTANCE MOMENT
kg (lb)
m (in) m.kg (in.lb) m (in) m.kg (in.lb)

WESCAM 24” 68 (150) 4.318 (170 ) 294 (25500) 1.315 (51.8) 89 (7770)

WESCAM 16” 38 (84) 4.318 (170 ) 164 (14280) 1.315 (51.8) 50 (4351)

FLIR 2000 HP
40 (88) 4.318 (170 ) 173 (14960) 1.315 (51.8) 53 (4558)
SAFIRE

FLIR CHLIO 39 (86) 4.318 (170 ) 168 (14620) 1.315 (51.8) 51 (4455)

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.52

15-18 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

FLIGHT MANUAL

AS 355 NP

SUPPLEMENT

GPS
GARMIN GNS 430 / 430W

IMPORTANT NOTE

The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given

in the basic flight manual and/or the supplements listed in section supplement 0.

The effectivity of the manual at the latest revision is specified on the list of effective
pages.

THIS SUPPLEMENT MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE FLIGHT MANUAL WHEN

THE EQUIPMENT MENTIONED ABOVE IS INSTALLED ON THE AIRCRAFT.

Airbus Helicopters D i r e c t i o n T e c h n i q u e S u p p o r t
Aéroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.55.2.P1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - EASA CERTIFICATION

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• A .................................. Specific to EASA
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

SECTION
PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)
or SUP.
SUP.55.2.P1 1 to 1 15-18

SUP.55.2.P5 1 to 2 15-18 A

SUP.55.2 1 to 7 15-18

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.55.2.P5

A 15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) EASA

ISSUE 1: NR 1:
EASA Approval No. R.C.03151
NORMAL REVISION 0 - DECEMBER 2008
on February 12, 2009

ISSUE 2:
Approved on January 12, 2016 under
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 15-18
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J056
Title New issue
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.55.2.P5

A 15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1 GENERAL
NOTE

This supplement is not an authorization for operational use.

The “GNS 430/430W” includes a VHF COM transceiver, a VOR/ILS receiver and a GPS
navigation system.
The GARMIN “GNS 430/430W” GPS system complies with the requirements as a
supplement to VFR navigation.
Abbreviations
- BRG : Bearing to waypoint.
- CDI : Course Deviation Indicator.
- DTK : Desired Track.
- DIS : Distance to waypoint.
- ETE : Estimated Time En-route.
- GS : Ground Speed.
- HSI : Horizontal Situation Indicator.
- OBS : Omni Bearing Selector.
- RAIM : Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring.
- TRK : Track.
- XTK : Cross Track error, the cross track error has a manual or an automatic
adjustable scale on the CDI.

2 LIMITATIONS
The limitations specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual supplements
remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

2.1 PILOT'S GUIDE

2.1.1 GNS 430 pilot's guide
The Pilot's Guide operating manual (Part number 190-00140-00, Rev.F dated July
2000 or later revision) must be on board the aircraft and readily available to the
pilot.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.55.2

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2.1.2 GNS 430W pilot's guide

The Pilot's Guide operating manual (Part number 190-00356-00, Rev.C dated
March 2008 or later revision) must be on board the aircraft and readily available to
the pilot.
2.2 SOFTWARE VERSIONS
2.2.1 GNS 430 software versions
The GNS 430 must be loaded with the following or later approved software
versions:

GNS 430 sub-system Software version

Main 4.00
GPS 3.00
COMM 5.00
VOR/LOC 3.01
G/S 2.03
The main software version is displayed on the GNS 430 self-test page 5 seconds
after power-on. The other system software versions can be checked on the AUX
group sub-page 2:
SOFTWARE/DATABASE Ver.
From main software version 5.01, a TAWS (TERRAIN) function has been added to
the GNS 430. USING THE TAWS FUNCTION OF THE GPS IS PROHIBITED.
Consequently, this function is de-activated by configuration and shall remain so.
2.2.2 GNS 430W software versions
The GNS 430W must be loaded with the following or later approved software
versions:

GNS 430W sub-system Software version

Main 3.10
GPS 3.1
COMM 7.00
VOR/LOC 5.02
G/S 4.00

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.55.2

15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

The main software version is displayed on the GNS 430W self-test page 5 seconds
after power-on. The other system software versions can be checked on the AUX
group sub-page 2:
SOFTWARE/DATABASE Ver.
USING THE TAWS FUNCTION OF THE GPS IS PROHIBITED. Consequently, this
function is de-activated by configuration and shall remain so.
The GPS receiver is capable of tracking SBAS (WAAS, EGNOS) satellites. USING
THE SBAS MODE OF THE GPS IS PROHIBITED. Consequently, SBAS (WAAS,
EGNOS) operation is de-activated in set-up sub-group page 2 and shall remain so.
2.3 OPERATION
All the navigation means required for each route phase of the intended flight must be
available and serviceable. For IFR flight and in BRNAV area, the equipment specified
in SUP 9-2 "IFR Flight" of the present flight manual must be available and
serviceable.
As database is not guaranteed, the crew shall check, before the flight if possible, the
validity and the accuracy of the database information by reference to the official
documentation.
Before starting the navigation, the crew must check all the GNS 430/430W self-test
messages to ensure that all necessary validities are acquired.
2.3.1 Helicopter approved for day and night VFR
The GPS part of the GNS 430/430W complies with the requirements for use as a
supplement to VFR navigation.
GPS navigation is restricted to VFR flight.
2.3.2 Helicopter approved for IFR
The GPS part of the GNS 430/430W complies with the requirements for use:
− in VFR day or night as a navigation supplement,
− in IFR as a supplemental navigation source for "En Route" phase,
− in BRNAV.

• BRNAV and "En Route" IFR navigation

BRNAV and "En Route" IFR navigation is allowed only if the crew has
checked the database update and each selected waypoint data with the
official documentation.
When a flight in BRNAV airspace is scheduled, the crew shall confirm
RAIM availability for the intended route and flight time slot.

• Terminal Area IFR navigation

Use of GPS for SIDs and STARs is prohibited.

• Instruments approach
Use of GPS for approaches is prohibited.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.55.2

15-18 Page 3
 FLIGHT MANUAL

2.4 PLACARDS
2.4.1 Helicopter approved for day and night VFR
GPS OPERABLE IN VFR GPS UTILISABLE EN VFR
CONDITIONS ONLY UNIQUEMENT

Location: Next to the GNS 430/430W on the instrument panel.

2.4.2 Helicopter approved for day and night IFR
USING GPS FOR L'UTILISATION DU GPS POUR
INSTRUMENTs APPROCHES DES APPROCHES AUX INSTRUMENTS
AND SIDs/STARs IS PROHIBITED ET SIDs/STARs EST INTERDITE

Location: Next to the GNS 430/430W on the instrument panel.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.55.2

15-18 Page 4
 FLIGHT MANUAL

3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
The emergency procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:

3.1 GPS FAILURES

FAILURES CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

[MSG] key ......................... Press and check message.

NAV
1. GPS navigation data not available or invalid.
Flag on HSI 2. RAIM POSITION WARNING.
(or external CDI). In both cases, use remaining operational means of
+ navigation (GNS 430/430W VOR or any other available
means).
MSG
In BRNAV airspace, contact ATC to revert to conventional
navigation flight.

CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

[MSG] key ......................... Press and check message.
MSG
+ RAIM IS NOT AVAILABLE
INTEG Revert to other operational means of navigation (GNS
430/430W VOR or any other available means) approved
for the route and flight phase.
During En-route phase, GPS navigation can still be used
provided the position can be checked with other means of
navigation at least every 15 min.
In BRNAV airspace, if navigation consistency check is not
possible, contact ATC to revert to conventional navigation
flight.
If the aircraft is outside BRNAV airspace, BRNAV
airspace shall not be entered.
CONTINUE THE FLIGHT

NOTE

Bottom row key [MSG] is used on GNS 430/430W to display the message.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.55.2

15-18 Page 5
 FLIGHT MANUAL

4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
The normal procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:
4.1 OPERATING PROCEDURES
The detailed operating procedures are described in the Pilot's Guide referenced in
paragraph 2.1 of this supplement.

NOTE 1
Use of the VHF frequencies listed below may degrade GPS receiver operation
after 10 to 15 seconds of transmission time, returning to normal operation a
few seconds after transmission ends.
Frequencies = 121.150 / 121.175 / 121.200 / 131.200 / 131.250 / 131.275 and
131.300 MHz.

NOTE 2
Correct operation of the GPS is not guaranteed for cabin temperatures below
- 20°C.
4.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
The GNS 430/430W GPS navigation system provides the following information to the
pilot's HSI or external CDI:
- XTK,
- TO / FROM,
- Validity flag.

NOTE 1

XTK full scale deviation is the same for the HSI, or external CDI, and the
GNS 430/430W integrated CDI. Default setting is 5 NM (meaning that full
deviation is achieved when XTK reaches 5 NM) except within 30 NM range of
the departure/destination airfield. Within 30 NM of the destination airfield, the
full scale deviation gradually ramps from 5 to 1 NM. Likewise, upon departure,
default setting is 1 NM gradually increasing up to 5 NM beyond 30 NM from the
departure airfield.
XTK scale is also selectable by the pilot. However, the GNS 430/430W will
automatically select the lowest value between the default setting and the value
selected by the pilot. Current selected scale is displayed on either side of the
GNS 430/430W's CDI. Recommended full-scale value for helicopter "En-route"
navigation is 1 NM.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.55.2

15-18 Page 6
 FLIGHT MANUAL

NOTE 2
The HSI or CDI course is not automatically slaved to the desired track (DTK).
Consequently, when GPS navigation is selected,( GPS on GNS 430/430W
screen) as HSI or external CDI navigation source, the course pointer on the HSI
or course selector on the external CDI must be manually set to the DTK
indicated by the GNS 430/430W. Particular attention is required during
automatic navigation leg changes and subsequent change of DTK. However, if
the course selected on pilot's HSI or external CDI differs from the DTK by more
than 10°, the MSG annunciator will flash and the message Set course to xxx
will be displayed on the GNS 430/430W "MSG" page.

NOTE 3
Pressing the [CDI] key on the GNS 430/430W toggles HSI or external CDI
navigation source between GPS and VOR/ILS ( GPS or VLOC displayed
above [CDI] key).

NOTE 4
Pressing the [OBS] key on the GNS 430/430W toggles between manual mode
(OBS mode) and automatic sequencing of waypoints.
Activating OBS mode, indicated by the OBS annunciator above the [OBS] key,
holds current active waypoint as the navigation destination and prevents the
GNS 430/430W from sequencing to the next waypoint. In OBS mode, the DTK
to/from the active waypoint is controlled via the pilot's HSI course pointer or
external CDI course selector.

The "GNS 430/430W" GPS navigation system is also associated with a two-label
indicator on the pilot's instrument panel (If installed):

Waypoint Alert light

WPT

MSG
GNS 430/430W Message Alert

5 PERFORMANCE DATA
The performance data specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.55.2

15-18 Page 7
 FLIGHT MANUAL

FLIGHT MANUAL

AS 355 NP

SUPPLEMENT

ABSEILING INSTALLATION

IMPORTANT NOTE

The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the information given

in the basic flight manual and/or the supplements listed in section supplement 0.

The effectivity of the manual at the latest revision is specified on the list of effective
pages.

THIS SUPPLEMENT MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE FLIGHT MANUAL WHEN

THE EQUIPMENT MENTIONED ABOVE IS INSTALLED ON THE AIRCRAFT.

Airbus Helicopters D i r e c t i o n T e c h n i q u e S u p p o r t
Aéroport international Marseille-Provence 13725 Marignane Cedex - France

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.56.P1

15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LIST OF APPROVED EFFECTIVE PAGES - EASA CERTIFICATION

(1) AIRWORTHINESS EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• A .................................. Specific to EASA
(2) VARIANT OF STANDARD DEFINITION EFFECTIVITY:
• Without indication ........... Applicable to all aircraft
• XXX ................................ Specific to aircraft equipped with XXX

SECTION
PAGES DATE CODE (1) (2)
or SUP.
SUP.56.P1 1 to 1 15-18

SUP.56.P5 1 to 2 15-18 A

SUP.56 1 to 1 15-18

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.56.P5

A 15-18 Page 1
 FLIGHT MANUAL

LOG OF APPROVED NORMAL REVISIONS

BASIC RFM REVISIONS - EFFECTIVITY (1) (2) EASA

ISSUE 1: NR 0:
EASA Approval No. R.C.02426
NORMAL REVISION 0 - JANUARY 2007
on June 05, 2007

ISSUE 2:
Approved on January 12, 2016 under
NORMAL REVISION 0 date code 15-18
the authority of EASA DOA No. 21J056
Title New issue
Revised
All
information
Deleted
None
information

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.56.P5

A 15-18 Page 2
 FLIGHT MANUAL

1 GENERAL
The use of this installation is subject to the approval of the operational authorities
concerned.
This installation allows trained personnel to perform abseiling.
It consists of two rings secured to the cabin floor in front of the passenger seats and of a
protection for the lower rail of each sliding door.

2 LIMITATIONS
THE USE OF THIS TYPE OF INSTALLATION IS SUBJECT TO THE APPROVAL OF
THE APPROPRIATE OPERATIONAL AUTHORITIES.

The limitations specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual supplements
remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:
- Abseiling is limited to hover flight.
After completion of the abseiling operation, transition to forward flight or landing is
prohibited with the ropes extended.
- The load on the abseiling installation is limited to 120 kg (265 lb) per ring.
A placard located near to each ring indicates the maximum load.

3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
The emergency procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable.

4 NORMAL PROCEDURES
The normal procedures specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable and are supplemented or modified by the following:
- Before takeoff, determine the weight and CG conditions which will prevail during the
mission, knowing that the load on the abseil ropes is located at:
• 2.24 m (88 in) from the longitudinal datum.
• 1.09 m (43 in) from the aircraft centerline.

5 PERFORMANCE DATA
The performance data specified in the basic flight manual and in the flight manual
supplements remain applicable.

APPROVED 355 NP SUP.56

15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 5.2
ADDITIONAL PERFORMANCE DATA
CONTENTS

PAGE

1 WEIGHT INDEX ........................................................................................ 2

2 TAS/CAS IN FAST CRUISE ...................................................................... 3
3 WEIGHT INDEX ........................................................................................ 4
4 TAS/CAS IN RECOMMENDED CRUISE .................................................. 5
5 FUEL CONSUMPTION - ENDURANCE IN FAST CRUISE ....................... 6
6 FUEL CONSUMPTION - ENDURANCE IN RECOMMENDED
CRUISE ..................................................................................................... 7
7 FUEL CONSUMPTION - ENDURANCE AT
MINIMUM HOURLY FUEL CONSUMPTION ............................................. 8
8 EFFECT OF EQUIPMENT ITEMS ON PERFORMANCE DATA ............... 9
9 SAND FILTERS INSTALLED AND PROTECTION OF THE AIR
INTAKE AGAINST INDUCTION OF SNOW .............................................. 10

355 NP 5.2.P6
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 5.2
ADDITIONAL PERFORMANCE DATA

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

355 NP 5.2
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

1 WEIGHT INDEX

Figure 1

355 NP 5.2
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

2 TAS/CAS IN FAST CRUISE

Figure 2

355 NP 5.2
15-18 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

3 WEIGHT INDEX

Figure 3

355 NP 5.2
15-18 Page 4
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

4 TAS/CAS IN RECOMMENDED CRUISE

Figure 4

355 NP 5.2
15-18 Page 5
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

5 FUEL CONSUMPTION-ENDURANCE IN FAST CRUISE

Figure 5

355 NP 5.2
15-18 Page 6
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

6 FUEL CONSUMPTION-ENDURANCE IN RECOMMENDED

CRUISE

Figure 6

355 NP 5.2
15-18 Page 7
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

7 FUEL CONSUMPTION-ENDURANCE AT MINIMUM HOURLY

FUEL CONSUMPTION

Figure 7

355 NP 5.2
15-18 Page 8
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

8 EFFECT OF EQUIPMENT ITEMS ON PERFORMANCE DATA

Fast cruise Recommended cruise
Equipment installed Airspeed Hourly fuel Airspeed Hourly fuel
km/h kt consumption Range km/h kt consumption Range

Heating and demisting -8 -4 + 3% - 3% -8 -4 + 3% - 3%

systems *

Skis -2 -1 - - 1% -2 -1 - - 1%

Electrical hoist -6 -3 - - 2% -6 -3 - - 2%

Emergency floatation -4 -2 - - 1.5% -4 -2 - - 1.5%

gear

High landing gear -4 -2 - - 1.5% -4 -2 - - 1.5%

LOCATOR searchlight -3 - 1.5 - - 1.5% -3 - 1.5 - - 1.5%

Sand filters Refer to supplement SUP.14

* The airspeed reduction is to be applied only if MCP is limited by TOT.

355 NP 5.2
15-18 Page 9
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

9 SAND FILTERS INSTALLED AND PROTECTION OF THE AIR

INTAKE AGAINST INGESTION OF SNOW
9.1 SAND FILTERS NOT OPERATING
(protection against ingestion of snow)

- Determination of weight index (Figure 8)

- TAS-CAS in fast cruise (Figure 9)
- Determination of weight index (Figure 10)
- TAS-CAS in recommended cruise (Figure 11)
- Fuel consumption - Range / Endurance in fast cruise (Figure 12)
- Fuel consumption - Range / Endurance in recommended cruise(Figure 13)

9.2 SAND FILTERS OPERATING

The level flight performance data are modified as follows:

FUEL RANGE/ENDURANCE
CONSUMPTION
Fuel consumption-
endurance
in fast cruise +1% -1%
(Figure 12)
Fuel consumption-
endurance
in recommended +1% -1%
cruise
(Figure 13)
Fuel consumption-
endurance
at minimum hourly +1% -1%
fuel consumption
(Figure 14)

355 NP 5.2
15-18 Page 10
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

355 NP 5.2
15-18 Page 11
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

9.3 WEIGHT INDEX

Figure 8

355 NP 5.2
15-18 Page 12
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

9.4 TAS/CAS IN FAST CRUISE

Figure 9

355 NP 5.2
15-18 Page 13
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

9.5 WEIGHT INDEX

Figure 10

355 NP 5.2
15-18 Page 14
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

9.6 TAS/CAS IN RECOMMENDED CRUISE

Figure 11

355 NP 5.2
15-18 Page 15
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

9.7 FUEL CONSUMPTION-ENDURANCE IN FAST CRUISE

Figure 12

355 NP 5.2
15-18 Page 16
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

9.8 FUEL CONSUMPTION-ENDURANCE IN RECOMMENDED CRUISE

Figure 13

355 NP 5.2
15-18 Page 17
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

9.9 FUEL CONSUMPTION-ENDURANCE AT MINIMUM HOURLY FUEL

CONSUMPTION

Figure 14

355 NP 5.2
15-18 Page 18
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
CONTENTS

PAGE
6.1 WEIGHT AND BALANCE
1 GENERAL .................................................................................................... 1
2 WEIGHT AND BALANCE ............................................................................ 1

6.2 LONGITUDINAL CG LOCATION

1 DETERMINATION OF LONGITUDINAL CG LOCATION ............................ 1
2 LOADING DATA .......................................................................................... 2
3 CG CHARTS ................................................................................................ 5

6.3 LATERAL CG LOCATION

1 DETERMINATION OF LATERAL CG LOCATION ....................................... 1
2 LOADING DATA .......................................................................................... 2

6.4 WEIGHT AND MOMENT OF EQUIPMENT ITEMS

6.5 WEIGHING
1 PRELIMINARY ACTIONS ............................................................................ 1
2 WEIGHING PROCEDURES ........................................................................ 2

355 NP 6.0.P6
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 6.1
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
1 GENERAL
The purpose of this section is to provide data for use when evaluating a proposed
loading configuration or calculating the weight and center of gravity of an aircraft in
service.

2 WEIGHT AND BALANCE

2.1 WEIGHT - STANDARD DEFINITIONS
- Empty Weight (EW)
This corresponds to the sum of the weights of the permanent assemblies and
equipment:
• The vehicle and its power plant.
• Equipment common to all missions.
• Lubricants and hydraulic fluids.
• Unusable fuel.
EW then is constant for a given aircraft.

- Equipped Empty Weight (EEW)

This is the sum of:
• Empty weight (EW).
• Weight of the specific operational or mission equipment.
EEW varies according to the proposed mission.

- All-up Weight (AUW)

This is the sum of:
• Equipped empty weight (EEW).
• Crew weight.
• Payload.
• Usable fuel weight.
- Maximum Weight
Refer to limitations (SECTION 2).

355 NP 6.1
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

2.2 CENTER OF GRAVITY CONVENTIONAL TERMS

- The center of gravity is defined by dimensions measured perpendicular to the
three basic datum planes. These planes are as follows:
• A horizontal plane parallel to the cabin floor datum, the Z datum plane, located
2.60 m (102.3 in) above this datum.
• A vertical plane perpendicular to the cabin floor datum. This Y datum plane is
the aircraft plane of symmetry. Dimensions to the left (port) are negative,
dimensions to the right (starboard) are positive.
• A vertical plane perpendicular to the two mentioned above, situated 3.40 m
(133.8 in) forward of the center of the main rotor. This is the X datum plane,
from which the longitudinal reference stations and CG positions are measured.

Figure 1
- CG location limits are never to be exceeded. (Refer to Limitations SECTION 2).

CAUTION
A CG location which is correct on takeoff may vary during the mission, due to
fuel weight reduction or loading variation and therefore exceed acceptable
limits.

- Longitudinal CG must be monitored more closely.

- Lateral CG need be considered only in very asymmetrical loading configurations.

355 NP 6.1
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 6.2
LONGITUDINAL CG LOCATION
1 DETERMINATION OF LONGITUDINAL CG LOCATION
- Procedure
The distance from the aircraft center of gravity to the datum plane is obtained using
the formula:
Sum of moments
= CG ready for flight.
Sum of weights

- Example: Analysis for a passenger transport mission

• Before takeoff
1) Determine the maximum permissible takeoff weight.
2) Note the equipped empty weight and the moment.
3) Refer to the tables given below to determine loading conditions. Totalize
weights and moments.
4) Calculate the CG location.
5) Check that CG is within permissible limits.
Example:
kg m.kg lb in.lb
EEW 1600 5696 3527 494344
Front seats 160 248 353 21540
Rear seats 140 356 309 30897
Side cargo hold 50 160 110 13858
Front : 35% 202 654 449 57270
Fuel
Rear : 35% 202 778 449 68046
TOTAL 2354 7892 5189 685955

7892 685955
CG = = 3.352 m CG = = 132.19 in
2354 5189

Longitudinal CG is within the permissible limits.

• In flight or on landing:
Monitor fuel consumption, same procedure as above taking into account actual
fuel quantity.

355 NP 6.2
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

2 LOADING DATA
• Crew and passengers

Figure 1: Longitudinal location of seats

METRIC UNITS OTHER UNITS
WEIGHT MOMENT : m.kg WEIGHT MOMENT : in.lb
(kg) (A) (B) (C)* (lb) (A) (B) (C)*
60 93 152 102 100 6102 9999 6693
80 124 203 136 150 9153 14999 10040
100 155 254 170 200 12204 19998 13386
120 186 305 204 250 15255 24998 16733
140 217 356 238 300 18306 29997 20079
154 239 391 262 340 20717 33948 22713
160 248 406 350 21357 34997
180 279 457 400 24408 39996
200 310 508 450 27459 44996
220 341 559 500 30510 49995
240 372 610 550 33561 54995
260 660 600 59994
280 711 650 64994
300 762 700 69993
320 813 750 74993
340 864 800 79992
360 914 850 84992
380 965 900 89991
400 1016 950 94991
(*) Optional

355 NP 6.2
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

• Freight and baggage transport

Figure 2: Longitudinal location of loads

METRIC UNITS
WEIGHT MOMENT : m.kg
(kg) (A) (B) (C)* (D) (E)
10 15.5 22.5 27.6 32 46
20 31 45 55.2 64 92
50 77.5 112.5 138 160 230
70 108.5 157.5 193.2 224 322
80 124 180 220.8 256 368
100 155 225 276 320
120 186 270 331.2 384
136 210.8 306 375.4
150 232.5 337.5
200 450
250 562.5
300 675
310 697.5

OTHER UNITS
WEIGHT MOMENT: in.lb
(lb) (A) (B) (C)* (D) (E)
50 3051 4429 5439 6299 9055
100 6102 8858 10878 12598 18110
150 9153 13287 16317 18897 27165
176 10740 15590 19145 22172 31874
200 12204 17716 21756 25196
220 13424 19488 23932 27716
250 15255 22145 27195 31495
264 16109 23385 28718 33259
300 18306 26574 32634
330 20137 29231
400 35432
500 44290
600 53148
682 60412
(*) Optional

355 NP 6.2
15-18 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

• Fuel

Figure 3: Longitudinal location of fuel

NOTE
Fuel specific gravity: 0.79
METRIC UNITS
FUEL MOMENT: m.kg
FRONT TANK REAR TANK
% Liters kg
(A) (B)
55 401.5 317 1220
50 365 288 1109
45 328.5 260 842 1001
40 292 231 748 889
35 255.5 202 654 778
30 219 173 561 666
25 182.5 144 467 554
20 146 115 373 443
15 109.5 86 279 331
10 73 58 188 223
5 36.5 29 94 112
OTHER UNITS
FUEL MOMENT: in.lb
FRONT TANK REAR TANK
% US gal UK gal lb
(A) (B)
55 106.0 88.1 699 105933
50 96.4 80.3 636 96386
45 86.8 72.3 572 72959 86687
40 77.1 64.2 509 64923 77139
35 67.5 56.2 449 57270 68046
30 57.8 48.2 381 48597 57741
25 48.2 40.2 318 40561 48193
20 38.6 32.1 254 32398 38494
15 28.9 24.1 191 24362 28946
10 19.3 16 127 16199 19247
5 9.6 8.0 64 8163 9699

355 NP 6.2
15-18 Page 4
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

3 CG CHARTS
The following charts (metric and other units) are used to easily determine the aircraft
center of gravity. When the point obtained is close to the limits, it should be confirmed
by calculations.
Example (refer to Figure 4 or 5): Item on chart
- The weighing operation locates the CG
at 3.56 m (140.16 in) for a EEW of : 1600 kg (3527lb) : 1
- 2 front seats occupied : 160 kg (353 lb) : 2
- 1 rear seat occupied : 80 kg (176 lb) : 3
- Freight in side hold : 100 kg (220 lb) : 4
- Freight in rear hold : 50 kg (110 lb) : 5
- Cabin freight : 50 kg (110 lb) : 6
- ZERO FUEL WEIGHT : 2040 kg (4497 lb) : 7
- Forward tank fuel : 200 kg ( 441 lb) : 8
- Rearward tank fuel : 250 kg (551 lb) : 9
TOTAL WEIGHT : 2490 kg (5489 lb)

The longitudinal CG is within the permissible limits.

These figures are designed so that the variations in fuel weight make the CG move
along a vertical line, when the two tanks contain the same amount of fuel. Should the
contents of each tank be different, follow the "FWD tank and AFT" tank line to determine
CG location and evolution.
- The total weight is 2490 kg (5489 lb) with a center of gravity at 3.388 m (133.38 in).
During the flight, after consuming 100 kg (220 lb) of fuel on each tank (item 9 to 10 ),
the center of gravity will be 3.372 m (132.75 in).

The weight and CG limits are given in LIMITATIONS (SECTION 2) and may be modified
by the Supplements corresponding to the optional items installed.

355 NP 6.2
15-18 Page 5
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

LOADING CHART/ABAQUE DE CENTRAGE

2

Figure 4: Center of gravity

355 NP 6.2
15-18 Page 6
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

LOADING CHART/ABAQUE DE CENTRAGE

2

Figure 5: Center of gravity (cont'd)

355 NP 6.2
15-18 Page 7
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 6.3
LATERAL CG LOCATION
The tables below give the lateral CG positions for different weights and their moments with
respect to the Y plane (positive dimensions on the right, negative dimensions on the left).

1 DETERMINATION OF LATERAL CG LOCATION

The computation method is the same as that used for determining the longitudinal CG
location (SECTION 6.2 paragraph 1).
Add weights and moments to the aircraft empty weight and moment referring to the
preceding pages.
Lateral CG location values during the mission shall be within the permissible limits.

Example:

- During hoisting operation:

kg m.kg lb in.lb
EEW 1600 +32 3527 +2776
Front seat Pilot 80 +29 176 +2494
Hoist operator 80 -44 176 -3852
Hoist load 136 -210 300 -18236
Fuel 200 0 441 0
TOTAL 2096 -193 4620 -16868

-193 -16868
CG = = -0.09 m CG = = -3.65 in
2096 4620

Lateral CG is within the permissible limits.

355 NP 6.3
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

2 LOADING DATA
• Crew and passengers

Figure 1: Lateral location of seats

METRIC UNITS
WEIGHT MOMENT: m.kg
(kg) (A) (B) (C)* (D)* (E) (F)
50 18 25 10 30 10 31
60 22 30 12 36 12 37
70 25 35 14 42 14 43
80 29 40 16 48 17 50
90 32 45 18 54 19 56
100 36 50 20 60 21 62
120 43 59 24 72 25 74

OTHER UNITS
WEIGHT MOMENT: in.lb
(lb) (A) (B) (C)* (D)* (E) (F)
100 1417 1949 788 2350 815 2445
120 1700 2339 946 2820 978 2934
140 1984 2729 1103 3290 1141 3423
160 2267 3118 1261 3760 1304 3912
180 2551 3508 1418 4230 1467 4401
200 2834 3898 1576 4700 1630 4890
220 3117 4288 1734 5170 1793 5379
240 3401 4678 1891 5640 1956 5868
(*) Optional

355 NP 6.3
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

• Loads and stretchers

A = 0.360 m (14.17 in) E = 0.41 m (16.14 in)

B = 0.207 m (8.15 in) F = 1.54 m (60.63 in)
C = 0.620 m (24.45 in) G = 0.56 m (22.04 in)

Figure 2: Lateral location of stretchers and loads

METRIC UNITS
WEIGHT MOMENT: m.kg
(kg) (A) (B) (C) (E)* (F)* (G)
50 18 10 31 21 77 28
60 22 12 37 25 92 34
70 25 14 43 29 108 39
80 29 17 50 33 123 45
90 32 19 56 37 139 50
100 36 21 62 41 154 56
120 43 25 74 49 185 67
136 49 28 84 56 209
160 246
180 277
204 314

OTHER UNITS
WEIGHT MOMENT: in.lb
(lb) (A) (B) (C) (E)* (F)* (G)
100 1417 815 2445 1634 6079 2189
120 1700 978 2934 1961 7295 2627
140 1984 1141 3423 2288 8511 3065
160 2267 1304 3912 2614 9726 3502
180 2551 1467 4401 2941 10942 3940
200 2834 1630 4890 3268 12158 4378
220 3117 1793 5379 3595 13374 4816
240 3401 1956 5868 3922 14590 5254
260 3684 2119 6357 4248 15805 5691
300 4251 2445 7335 4902 18237
350 21277
400 24316
450 27356
(*) Optional

355 NP 6.3
15-18 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 6.4
WEIGHT AND MOMENT OF EQUIPMENT ITEMS
The following list covers the equipment items. It gives the approximate weight and moment
of the removable components.

WEIGHT ARM MOMENT

EQUIPMENT ITEM
kg lb m in m.kg in.lb
Aircraft ground tool kit 39.10 86.20 - - - -
355A 82 9037.06
• Twin handling wheels
• Helicopter hoisting ring

Aircraft tool kit 7.38 16.27 - - - -

355A 82 9037.06
• Static pressure port cover
• Pitot tube cover
• Tie-down rings
• Document bag
• Storage bag
• Main rotor blade socks
• Engine tail pipe cover
• Air intake slip cover
Air ambulance system
• Lower (with stretcher) 15.61 34.41 1.77 69.68 27.63 2397.69
350A 82 2016.01
• Upper (with stretcher) 17.20 37.92 1.91 75.20 32.85 2851.58
350A 82 2018.03
Abseiling installation RH or LH 3.13 6.90 2.31 90.94 7.23 627.49
Axe 350A 82 2093.00 1.18 2.60 1.75 68.90 2.07 179.23
Cabin fire extinguisher 2.10 4.63 1.55 61.02 3.26 283.00
Cable cutter
6.95 15.32 1.03 40.55 7.16 621.23
350A 82 2164.00
Camera carrying installation
355A MR 0530.02 21.56 47.53 4.32 170.08 93.14 8083.90
Cargo swing ON BOARD
355A 82 2160.03 13.00 28.66 3.32 130.70 43.20 3746.00

355 NP 6.4
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

WEIGHT ARM MOMENT

EQUIPMENT ITEM
kg lb m in m.kg in.lb
Doors
● Standard door
- On LH side 12.95 28.55 1.68 66.14 21.76 1888.30
350A 83 2080.11
- On RH side 12.88 28.40 1.68 66.14 21.64 1878.38
350A 83 2080.11
● Sliding and small door
- On LH side 16.51 36.40 2.38 93.70 39.29 3410.68
. Sliding door (fixed window) 8.67 19.11 2.38 93.70 20.63 1790.61
350A 82 2200.02
. Front door 7.84 17.28 2.38 93.70 18.66 1619.14
350A 82 2200.00
- On RH side 16.31 35.96 2.38 93.70 38.82 3369.45
. Sliding door (fixed window) 8.46 18.65 2.38 93.70 20.13 1747.51
350A 82 2200.03
. Front door 7.85 17.31 2.38 93.70 18.68 1621.95
350A 82 2200.01
Drip pan 11.27 24.85 2.86 112.60 32.23 2798.11
350A 82 8020.01
Dual controls 4.20 9.26 1.37 53.94 5.75 499.48
350A 82 7000.08
Electric hoist
● "AIR EQUIPEMENT" 38.23 84.28 2.80 110.24 107.00 9291.00
(136 kg – 300 lb).
350 A 82 8002.04
● "BREEZE" 51.87 114.35 2.68 105.51 139.01 12065.07
(204 kg – 450 lb).
355A 82 8035.00
Emergency floatation gear
● Floatation gear kit 66.8 147.27 3.36 132.25 224.45 19476.22
350A 82 8042.00
● Float (each item) 27.00 59.52 3.36 132.25 90.72 7872.12
● Cylinder (each item) 6.4 14.11 3.36 132.25 21.50 1865.98
704A 42 693 012
Footsteps
● "DART" short on high L/G 8.94 19.71 2.24 88.19 20.03 1738.22
350A 82 2192.00
● "DART" short on low L/G 8.54 18.74 2.24 88.19 19.13 1652.68
350A 82 2192.01
● "DART" long 11.48 25.31 3.35 131.89 38.46 3338.14
350A 82 2191.02
Ferry fuel tank 28.14 62.04 2.36 92.91 66.41 5764.10
● Ferry tank 26.12 57.58 2.34 92.13 61.12 5304.85
350A 82 2036.03
● Ferry complementary parts
350A 82 2036.02
2.02 4.45 2.65 104.33 5.35 464.27

355 NP 6.4
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

WEIGHT ARM MOMENT

EQUIPMENT ITEM
kg lb m in m.kg in.lb
Self-sealing fuel tank 22.19 48.92 3.50 137.80 77.67 6741.18
355A 82 2045.00
Ground mooring 0.78 1.72 2.70 106.30 2.11 182.84
350A 82 9014.01
Landing gear
• Low 42.90 94.60 3.39 133.58 145.43 12636.67
• High 57.77 127.36 3.35 131.89 193.53 16797.51
350A 82 4010.03
Mirrors RH external 2.63 5.80 0.46 18.11 1.21 105.04
350A 82 8070.01
Seats
• Energy absorbing front seat 25.11 55.36 1.79 70.47 44.95 3901.22
Standard 350A 82 2147.00
• Energy absorbing front seat 22.87 50.42 1.79 70.47 40.94 3553.10
Comfort 350A 82 2147.01
• High front seat 10.60 23.40 1.61 63.39 17.07 1483.33
• Low front seat 7.30 16.10 1.58 62.20 11.53 1001.42
• LH 2-place front seat 13.33 29.39 1.70 66.93 22.66 1967.07
350A 82 2129.00
• Two-passenger rear seat 21.10 46.52 2.59 101.97 54.65 4743.64
• Three-passenger rear seat 26.22 57.81 2.59 101.97 67.91 5894.89
(complete with armrests)
Spectrolab SX 16 searchlight
• With infra-red filter 30.65 67.57 4.90 192.91 150.19 13034.93
355P 08 4172.08
• Without infra-red filter 29.04 64.02 4.53 178.35 131.55 11417.97
355A 08 5129.05
SURFAIR skis 26.88 59.26 4.23 166.53 113.70 9868.57
350A 82 8031.00
Twin-engine extinguisher system
5.52 12.17 3.21 126.38 17.72 1538.04
355A 82 5060.02
Very-cold weather starting system
14.39 31.72 3.94 155.12 56.70 4920.41
(2nd battery) 350A 82 6500.02
Sand filters 19.22 42.40 4.30 169.5 82.7 7182
LOCATOR searchlight 10.1 22.3 0.92 36.3 9.3 809
WANDEL and GOLTERMANN 16.6 36.6 3.8 151.6 63.9 5548
Hailers
DATCON 0.14 0.31 1.1 43.3 0.15 13.43
(elapsed time indicator)

355 NP 6.4
15-18 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 6.5
WEIGHING
1 PRELIMINARY ACTIONS
- The weighing operation must be carried out in a closed shelter to avoid any errors
caused by the wind.
- Clean the aircraft carefully before weighing.
- Should the weighing operation be used to determine C.G. location, level the aircraft
before weighing (transmission deck set to 2°, nose down).
- In principle, all equipment items included in the aircraft's empty weight must be
installed. Make an inventory of those equipment items and include it in the weighing
record.
- All weighing instruments must be checked for correct "zero" setting before use. It is
important that the weighing instruments rest on suitably levelled ground for correct
measurement.
- Unless otherwise specified, the fuel cells must be drained.

NOTE

A certain quantity of fuel remaining in the system is defined by the

Airworthiness Regulations as the "unusable fuel", i.e. the quantity of fuel below
which anomalies in fuel supply begin to appear in certain aircraft attitudes
and/or flying maneuvers.
The weight (and moment) of the "unusable fuel" is indicated in the
specifications, airworthiness sheets, etc.

355 NP 6.5
17-38 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

2 WEIGHING PROCEDURES
The aircraft is weighed and the CG location is determined as follows:
- After the inventory has been made and the checks have been performed, level the
aircraft by means of the appropriate markings and using a clinometer, with the
landing gear off the ground.
- Check that the fuel cell is drained
- The distances of the jacking points are defined by the manufacturer when the aircraft
is assembled on the jig.
- Record the weight measured at each jacking point.
- Compute the moment by multiplying the weight by the distance of the corresponding
jacking point.
- Calculate the sum of the moments.
- Divide the total moment by the total weight to obtain the empty aircraft CG location.

The empty weight (and CG) must include the weight of unusable fuel.
As a general rule, these values are calculated from the "aircraft dry" weight.

355 NP 6.5
17-38 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

WEIGHING RECORD SHEET

AIRCRAFT /VERSION
SERIAL No
CUSTOMER No
DATE:

SIGNATURE REMARKS

ARM MOMENT
WEIGHT
JACK POINTS (m) or (in) (m.kg) or (lb.in)
(kg) or (lb)
X Y MX MY
LH FORWARD 2.31 m -0.3985 m
(A1) 90.94 in -15.689 in
RH FORWARD 2.31 m +0.3985 m
(A2) 90.94 in +15.689 in
TOTAL
LH.FWD +
RH FWD (A)
5.072 m
AFT (A3) 0
199.68 in
TOTAL
MX= MY=
WEIGHT
MX
LONGITUDINAL CG ............................ X = =
TOTAL WEIGHT

MY
LATERAL CG ...................................... Y = =
TOTAL WEIGHT

WEIGHING CORRECTIONS AND LONGITUDINAL CG CORRECTIONS

WEIGHT ARM MOMENT
EQUIPMENT ITEMS
(± kg) or (± lb) (m) or (in) (± m.kg) or (± lb.in)

EMPTY WEIGHT OF
EQUIPPED AIRCRAFT

CORRECTED WEIGHT
CORRECTED MOMENT
CORRECTED
LONGITUDINAL CG

355 NP 6.5
17-38 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

EXAMPLE OF INVENTORY AT TIME OF AIRCRAFT WEIGHING (Non exhaustive list)

FURNISHINGS RADIO COMMUNICATION
Aircraft tool kit RADIO NAVIGATION
First aid kit AVIONICS
Flight manual VHF/1
Fire extinguisher VHF/2
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT VHF/FM
Enlarged instrument panel U.H.F
Retractable right landing light VOR/1
Swivelling left landing light VOR/2
Battery Homing
2nd battery Marker
Cabin heating system ADF/1 Auto. Direction Finder
Dual controls Transponder
Sand filters ICS 2 lanes
Hailer installation Public Address System
Fuel flowmeter Encoding altimeter
Emergency floatation gear Radio altimeter
Cargo sling Gyro. horizon
Cargo swing Stand-by horizon
Rear-view mirror Gyro compass
Hoist DME
Sliding door (LH) HF/SSB
Sliding door (RH) Emergency locator
Searchlight LOCATOR Radar
Ambulance hooks Coupler
Cabin trimming (standard) IFF
Cabin trimming (comfort) Automatic pilot
Passenger seats 4 places NADIR
Carpet DOPPLER
Forward high seat + harness TACAN
Energy absorbing front seats Global position system (GPS)
Shielded seats
Two-place front seat
Flares (fixed parts)
Skis
Cable-cutter
High type landing gear
Low type landing gear
Ballast for balancing
3 main blades
Rear cargo hold net
Pilot windshield wiper
Co-pilot windshield wiper MISCELLANEOUS
Engine washing installation Fuel
Air conditioning system
Hourmeter

(0) : not fitted (1) : fitted (FP) : Fixed provisions

355 NP 6.5
17-38 Page 4
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 7
DESCRIPTION AND SYSTEMS
CONTENTS

PAGE
7.1 MAIN AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS
1 AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS ........................................................................... 1
2 DESCRIPTIVE DATA .................................................................................. 3

7.2 COCKPIT
1 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONSOLE ...................................................... 1

7.3 CENTRAL WARNING AND ANCILLARY SYSTEMS

1 CENTRAL WARNING SYSTEM .................................................................. 1
2 ANCILLARY SYSTEMS ............................................................................... 1

7.4 VEHICLE AND ENGINE MANAGEMENT DISPLAY (VEMD)

1 GENERAL .................................................................................................... 1
2 CHARACTERISTICS ................................................................................... 1
3 OPERATING MODES .................................................................................. 1
4 VEMD CONTROLS ...................................................................................... 2
5 OPERATION ................................................................................................ 3
6 AUTOMATIC PAGE MANAGEMENT AT POWER UP ................................ 3
7 DISPLAY ...................................................................................................... 4

7.5 FLIGHT CONTROLS

1 COLLECTIVE LEVER GRIP ........................................................................ 1
2 CYCLIC STICK GRIP .................................................................................. 2
3 OTHER CONTROLS ................................................................................... 3

355 NP 7.0.P6
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

PAGE
7.6 LIGHTING SYSTEM
1 INTERIOR LIGHTING .................................................................................. 1
2 EXTERIOR LIGHTING ................................................................................. 2
3 STORM LIGHTING ...................................................................................... 2

7.7 POWER PLANT

1 GENERAL .................................................................................................... 1
2 ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM .............................................................. 3
3 ENGINE CONTROLS .................................................................................. 4
4 ENGINE MONITORING ............................................................................... 7
5 AUTOMATIC GOVERNING SYSTEM ......................................................... 8

7.8 FUEL SYSTEM

1 FUEL TANKS ............................................................................................... 1
2 FUEL CROSSFEED SYSTEM ..................................................................... 1
3 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM ............................................................................. 1
4 BOOSTER PUMP FAILURE ........................................................................ 1
5 FUEL SYSTEM CONTROLS AND MONITORING ...................................... 1
6 SIMPLIFIED DIAGRAM OF THE FUEL SYSTEM ....................................... 2

7.9 POWER TRANSMISSION SYSTEM AND ROTORS

1 POWER TRANSMISSION ........................................................................... 1
2 ROTORS ..................................................................................................... 4

7.10 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

1 GENERAL.................................................................................................. 1
2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION........................................................................... 1
3 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM COMPONENTS .................................................... 2
4 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM CONTROLS AND MONITORING ......................... 4

355 NP 7.0.P6
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

PAGE
7.11 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS
1 DC ELECTRICAL POWER ........................................................................ 1
2 AC ELECTRICAL POWER ........................................................................ 12

7.12 AIR DATA SYSTEM

1 GENERAL.................................................................................................. 1
7.13 VENTILATION, HEATING AND DEMISTING
1 CABIN VENTILATION ............................................................................... 1
2 HEATING AND DEMISTING SYSTEM ...................................................... 2

7.14 RESERVED

7.15 FIRE DETECTION AND PROTECTION SYSTEM

1 MGB COMPARTMENT FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM ............................... 1
2 ENGINE FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM....................................................... 2
3 ENGINE FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM COMPONENTS .................... 2
4 ENGINE FIRE EXTINGUISHING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ..................... 3
5 FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM LOCATION .......................................... 4

355 NP 7.0.P6
15-18 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 7.1
MAIN AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS
1 AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS

(*) Add 0.20 m (0.65 ft) when aircraft is fitted with high landing gear.

NOTE
The values which vary according to weight are given at the maximum weight.

Figure 1: Three-view drawing

355 NP 7.1
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

CABIN
Area 2.60 m² (27.98 ft²)
3 3
LH HOLD Volume 3.00 m (105.94 ft ) RH HOLD
Area 0.43 m² (4.62 ft²) Area 0.35 m² (3.76 ft²)
3
Volume 0.235 m (8.29 ft )
3
REAR HOLD 3
Volume 0.200 m (7.06 ft )
3

Area 0.55 m² (5.92 ft²)

3 3
Volume 0.565 m (19.94 ft )

Figure 2: Access doors and compartments

355 NP 7.1
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

2 DESCRIPTIVE DATA
2.1 ENGINE
- Number :2 - Engine thermal reference power
(ISA at sea level)
- Manufacturer : TURBOMECA - All Engines Operating:
Max takeoff power(MTOP) : 343 kW
- Model : ARRIUS Maxi continuous (MCP) : 305 kW
- One Engine Inoperative:
- Type : 1A1 OEI max (2min. 30 sec.) : 415 kW
OEI continuous : 386 kW

2.2 MAIN ROTOR

- Type : STARFLEX - Diameter : 10.69 m (35.07 ft)
- Number of blades :3
- Nominal rotor
speed : 394 rpm

2.3 TAIL ROTOR

- Type : Flexible seesaw - Diameter : 1.86 m (6.10 ft)
- Number of blades :2
- Nominal tail rotor
speed : 2088 rpm

2.4 FUEL
- Total capacity : 736.7 l (582 kg) - Usable fuel: 730 l (577 kg)
: (194.6 US gal.) (192.9 US gal)

2.5 OIL
- MGB oil capacity - Engine oil capacity :9l
including filter : 6.5 l (2.37 US gal.)
(1.7 US gal.) - Hydraulic oil :3l
- TGB oil capacity : 0.33 l capacity for one (0.79 US gal.)
(0.09 US gal.) system

355 NP 7.1
15-18 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 7.2
COCKPIT
1 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONSOLE
1.1 VFR INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONSOLE

1 - FLOAT SYST. switch (*) 18 - VHF1/NAV1/GPS

2 – ELT control switch 19 - Electrical Control Unit
3 - Engine trim potentiometer 20 - RMI (*)
4 - Gyro slaving control 21 - Radio altimeter indicator (*)
5 - Caution and Warning Panel 22 - HSI
6 - Clock 23 - Vertical speed indicator
7 - DME (*) 24 - NAV1-NAV2-VOR1-
8 - VEMD GPS indication and
9 - Turn and bank or Standby NAV1-NAV2-VOR1-
Horizon indicator GPS selectors
10 - NR/N2 rpm indicator 25 - AFCS control panel (*)
11 - AFCS monitoring panel (*) 26 - ICS
12 - WPT/MSG indicator 27 - VHF2/NAV2
light 28 - Transponder
13 - VOR indicator (*) 29 - "AUTO RETRACT"
14 - Airspeed indicator switch (*)
15 - Horizon 30 - ADF (*) or "AUTO
16 - AFCS Galvanometers (*) RETRACT" switch (*)
17 - Altimeter 31 - KMD850 multi function
display (*) or Radio altimeter
indicator (*)
32 - Standby Horizon (*)

Figure 1: VFR Instrument panel and console

(*) If installed

355 NP 7.2
17-38 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

1.2 IFR INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONSOLE SINGLE PILOT

1 - FLOAT SYST. switch (*) 20 - AFCS Galvanometers

2 - ELT control switch 21 - Electrical Control Unit
3 - Engine trim potentiometer 22 - RMI
4 - Gyro slaving control 23 - Radio altimeter indicator
5 - Altimeter 24 - HSI
6 - Caution and Warning Panel 25 - Altimeter
7 - Clock 26 - Vertical speed indicator
8 - DME (*) 27 - VOR1-GPS indication and
9 - FLIR or RADAR (*) selector
10 - Spare or KMD850 mutli 28 - AFCS control panel
function display (*) 29 - ICS
11 - VEMD 30 - VHF2/NAV2
12 - Standby Horizon 31 - Transponder
13 - NR/N2 rpm indicator 32 - "AUTO RETRACT"
14 - AFCS monitoring panel switch (*)
15 - WPT/MSG indicator 33 - ADF
light 34 - HF (*)
16 – VHF1/NAV1/GPS 35 - NAT NPX 138 VHF/FM (*)
17 - VOR indicator 36 - "AUTO RETR" switch (*)
18 - Airspeed indicator (alternative position)
19 - ADI

Figure 2: IFR Instrument panel and console single pilot

(*) If installed

355 NP 7.2
17-38 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

1.3 IFR INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONSOLE DUAL PILOT

1 - Gyro slaving control 23 - VOR1-VOR2 indication

2 - FLOAT SYST. switch (*) and selector
3 - ELT control switch 24 - HSI
4 - Engine trim potentiometer 25 - Radio altimeter indicator (*)
5 - DME (*) 26 - VHF1/NAV1/GPS
6 - Altimeter 27 - Electrical Control Unit
7 - Caution and Warning Panel 28 - RMI
8 - Clock 29 - Radio altimeter indicator (*)
9 - ICS fail 30 - VOR1-GPS indication and
10 - AFCS monitoring panel selector
11 - NR rpm indicator 31 - AFCS control panel
12 - VEMD selector
13 - Standby Horizon 32 - ICS
14 - NR/N2 rpm indicator 33 - VHF2/NAV2
15 - WPT/MSG indicator 34 - Transponder
light 35 - "AUTO RETRACT"
16 - AFCS Galvanometers switch (*)
17 - ADI 36 - ADF
18 - Radar (*) or KMD850 37 - "AUTO RETRACT"
multi function display (*) switch (*)(alternative
19 - VOR indicator position)
20 - Airspeed indicator 38 - HF (*)
21 - Altimeter 39 - NAT NPX 138 VHF/FM(*)
22 - Vertical speed indicator 40 - Public address (*)

Figure 3: IFR Instrument panel and console dual pilot

(*) If installed

355 NP 7.2
17-38 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 7.3
CENTRAL WARNING
AND ANCILLARY SYSTEMS

1 CENTRAL WARNING SYSTEM

1.1 DESCRIPTION
Visual indicators are provided by a Caution and Warning Panel (CWP) which comprises
the following components:
- 16 red warning lights for alarms which require immediate action.
- 40 amber caution lights for alarms requiring action which can be deferred.
- 4 green lights indicating that the specific system is operating.

1.2 CHARACTERISTICS
The central warning system is supplied by a dual 28 VDC power supply and is protected
by fuses or circuit breakers.

Figure 1 : Caution and Warning Panel

2 ANCILLARY SYSTEMS
2.1 GENERAL
The VEMD Helicopter Interface Unit (VHIU) is an electronic equipment which
acquires signals coming from the helicopter systems and processes them in order to
be compatible with the VEMD inputs. The VHIU is composed of two similar but
segregated ancillary units (one per engine, fully independent and mechanically
separated). Each ancillary unit is segregated in the box in order to prevent a
complete loss of engines parameters.

355 NP 7.3
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

2.2 CHARACTERISTICS
The VHIU DC power supply is protected by 8 fuses located on the central overhead
panel 10α.

2.3 DESCRIPTION
The main signals processed by the VHIU are:
- NR signal (input and output signals).
- N2 sensor (input and output signals).
- Power supply of the torque sensors.
- TRQ signal adaptation (input and output signals).
- Engine oil pressure signal adaptation (input and output signals).
- Delta N1 signal adaptation (input and output signals).
- Fuel pressure power supply.
- Fuel pressure signal (input and output signals).
- Fuel quantity (input and output signals).
- RS 232 to RS 422 adaptation (input and output signals) for FADEC data.

The VHIU provides also signal adaptation for:

- Voltages and current conversion.
- Aural warning audio amplifier.
- NR high/low audio alarm.
- FLI audio alarm.

355 NP 7.3
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

2.4 VHIU LOCATION AND FAULT DESCRIPTION

Figure 2 : VHIU and LEDs location

LED lit Fault detected.

ALARM The audio alarm generation is fault or the level of the alarm signals is
too low.
NR The NR adaptation chain is fault.
DISCR The discret input adaptation chain is fault.
NTL The N2 adaptation chain is fault.
MUX Current, voltages, selector position discrete inputs are fault.
OIL The engine oil pressure adaptation chain is fault or the engine oil
pressure power supply generation is fault or fault connection between
VHIU and engine oil pressure sensors.
TQ The torque adaptation chain is fault or the torque sensor power supply
generation is fault or fault connection between VHIU and the torque
sensors.
FUEL QT The fuel quantity adaptation chain is fault.
FUEL PR The fuel pressure adaptation chain is fault or the fuel pressure sensor
power supply generation is fault or fault connection between VHIU and
the fuel pressure sensor.
NG The N1 adaptation chain is fault.

355 NP 7.3
15-18 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 7.4
VEHICLE AND ENGINE MANAGEMENT DISPLAY (VEMD)

1 GENERAL
The system, which comprises the VEMD multi-function screens, provides a display of
engine and vehicle parameters. The VEMD is located in the center of the instrument
panel and comprises:
- Two computing modules: LANE 1 and LANE 2,
- One "screen" module which comprises two screens and control pushbuttons.

2 CHARACTERISTICS
The VEMD is supplied with a dual 28 VDC power supply and is protected by fuses or
circuit breakers.

3 OPERATING MODES
Three operating modes are accessible:
- "FLIGHT" mode: by default, this mode constitutes the main operating mode of the
equipment. It contains the ENGINE, VEHICLE, FLIGHT REPORT and SYSTEM
STATUS pages,
- "CONFIG" mode: only accessible in ground condition, engine stopped. This mode
allows configuration of the VEMD.
1. Switch battery ON
2. Switch VEMD OFF, pressing [OFF1] and [OFF2] keys.
3. Simultaneously press and hold [SELECT] and [ENTER] keys.
4. Press the [OFF1] and [OFF2] keys to energize the VEMD.
5. Once the TEST IN PROGRESS and RELEASE KEY messages
are displayed, release the [SELECT] and [ENTER] keys.
- "MAINT" mode: only accessible in ground condition, engine stopped.
Same procedure as "CONFIG" mode except item 3 and 5. Maintain [SCROLL] and
[RESET] pressed while switching the VEMD on.

355 NP 7.4
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

4 VEMD CONTROLS

Figure 1: VEMD controls

1- [OFF1 / OFF 2] pushbuttons: 5- [ + / - ] pushbuttons:

. Switch ON/OFF processing . Increase/decrease the numerical
module 1/2 and the upper or values of the selected data.
lower screen.

2- [SCROLL] pushbutton: 6- [ENTER] pushbutton:

. Scrolling through the pages. . Validate the selected data.

3- [RESET] pushbutton: 7- [BRT +/-] pushbutton:

. Return to nominal display . Screen brightness control.
configuration.

4- [SELECT] pushbutton:
. Select a data field.

355 NP 7.4
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

5 OPERATION
The VEMD is switched on when the [BAT/EPU1] and [BAT/EPU2] switches are
engaged.
The equipment performs an initialization test which checks correct operation of each of
the two lines. During the test, the following message is displayed:
TEST IN PROGRESS
If the test result is incorrect, the following is displayed:
''LANE 1 FAILED'' or ''LANE 2 FAILED''
''PRESS OFF 1'' ''PRESS OFF 2''
The line concerned can be switched off by pressing the associated pushbutton ([OFF1]
or [OFF2]). This validates the initialization tests and switches the remaining line to
operating mode.
If the test is correct, the VEMD automatically goes to "FLIGHT" mode.

6 AUTOMATIC PAGE MANAGEMENT AT POWER UP

On completion of the test, the VEMD automatically changes to the "FLIGHT" mode. In
this mode, the following pages are displayed:
- ENGINE page on the upper VEMD screen.
- VEHICLE page on the lower VEMD screen.
POWER UP BUILT IN TEST AFTER CORRECT COMPLETION
OF TEST OF TEST

Figure 2: Automatic page management at power up

355 NP 7.4
15-18 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

7 DISPLAY

7.1 ENGINE PAGE - ALL ENGINES OPERATIVE MODE (AEO)

- Max. Continuous Power (1), left end of the yellow arc.
- Take-Off Power (2), yellow arc.
- Max. Take-Off Power (3), red index.
- Max. Transient Power (4), red triangle symbol.
- The FLI pointers left engine (6) and right engine (7) indicate the magnitude of the
engine or gearbox parameter that is closest to its limitation.
- Torque TRQ (11), in percent.
- T4.5 temperature TOT (9), in degrees Celsius.
- Gas generator speed N1 (8), in percent.
- A white symbol (5) is displayed for use of P2 air bleed.
- Each parameter is underlined yellow (10) when in TOP range and red if it's above
TOP.

Figure 3: VEMD ENGINE (AEO) page

355 NP 7.4
15-18 Page 4
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

7.2 ENGINE PAGE - ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE MODE (OEI)

- OEI Continuous Limitation (1), yellow dotted line.
- OEI Max. Limitation (2), red dotted line.
- OEI Transient Limitation (3), red dot.
- The selected OEI limit (OEI MAX/OEI CONT) is displayed (4) and also indicated by
a red diode symbol (2).
- The FLI pointers and TRQ, TOT, and N1 parameters have the same function as in
the All Engines Operative mode.
- When the OEI TRAINING mode is active, a yellow symbol (5) is displayed.

Figure 4: VEMD ENGINE (OEI) page

355 NP 7.4
15-18 Page 5
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

7.3 VEHICULE PAGE

Figure 5: VEMD VEHICLE page

(*) If installed

355 NP 7.4
15-18 Page 6
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

7.4 SYSTEM STATUS PAGE

FADEC Logic inputs and

SYSTEM STATUS outputs
Failures given by FADEC
XXXXXXXXXX MSG XXXXXXXXXX Ambient Pressure used by the
FADEC
XXXXXXXXXX FAIL XXXXXXXXXX Engine intake temperature
F F
A A used by FADEC
XXX P0 XXX mBAR
Anticipator position (collective
D D
XXX T1 XXX °C pitch and tail rotor blade pitch
E E position combination) read by
C XXX COL P XXX % C FADEC
1 2 TRIM read by FADEC
XXX TRIM XXX %
XXX N1 XXX % N1 read by FADEC

XXX ΔN1 XXX % DeltaN1 (N1 margin compared

to MTOP N1 limitation)
calculated by FADEC
Figure 6: SYSTEM STATUS page
List of messages displayed on System status page
(available in flight if necessary)

MSG Description Engine control system operating

TRAINING IN FADEC receives the order to activate the training mode
FLIGHT FADEC receives the order to activate the Flight mode
IDLE FADEC receives the order to activate the Idle (training) mode
STOP FADEC receives the order to activate the Stop mode
AUTO IN FADEC receives the order to activate the Automatic mode
MANUAL IN FADEC receives the order to activate the Manual mode
START OUT FADEC is in Start Mode / Start in progress
TRAINING OUT FADEC is in Training mode
MANUAL OUT FADEC is in Manuel mode
AUTO OUT FADEC is in Auto mode
OEI MAX OUT FADEC activated OEI MAX rating
OEI CONT OUT FADEC activated OEI CONT rating
MINOR FAIL FADEC announces a minor failure or a loss of redundancy
TOTAL FAIL FADEC announces a total control failure
MTOP EXCEED FADEC detects an MTOP exceedance

355 NP 7.4
15-18 Page 7
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

7.5 FLIGHT REPORT PAGE

This page is automatically displayed in the event of a change from flight state to stop
state. The FLIGHT REPORT page is displayed on a valid screen, normally on the
lower screen.
- Flight number (1).
- Flight duration (2):
. The counter starts at CLP > 25% and NR > 355 rpm (flight condition).
. The counter stops at CLP < 24% and NR < 157 rpm (ground condition).
- Number of cycles N1 during flight (9).
- Total number of cycles N1 (8).
- Number of cycles N2 during flight (9).
- Total number of cycles N2 (4).

Figure 7: VEMD FLIGHT REPORT page

The cumulative number of cycles is provided by VEMD. The flight time is measured
between ground/flight to flight/ground transition. The VEMD can display failures (6)
and overlimits (5) detected during flight. Duration of OEI MAX. power use (7). This
page is stored in the VEMD memory and can be displayed again in “MAINT” mode.

355 NP 7.4
15-18 Page 8
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 7.5
FLIGHT CONTROLS

1 COLLECTIVE LEVER GRIP

Figure 1: Collective lever grip

1 - Hydraulic pressure cut-off switch 7 - OEI stops selector (OEI MAX/OEI CONT)
2 - Hoist cable shearing switch (*) 8 - Go-around mode engagement
3 - VEMD page scroll 9 - (Spare)
4 - Swiveling landing light "ON-OFF 10 - Windshield wiper ON-OFF switch (*)
-RETRACT" switch (Pilot only) 11 - External load mechanical release (*)
5 - Swiveling landing light directional 12 - Emergency floatation gear (*)
control 13 - Retractable landing light control (*)
6 - Collective pitch locking device

(*) If installed

355 NP 7.5
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

2 CYCLIC STICK GRIP

Figure 2: Cyclic stick grip

1 - AFCS trim release (*) 6 - External load electrical release (*)
2 - AFCS trim (*) / VHF2 Frequency 7 - AFCS release (*)
channels controls (*) 8 - Camera (*) / VHF1 active\stand by
3 - AFCS coupler disengagement (*) frequency selector (*)
4 - Hoist up/down control (*) 9 - Radio/ICS push to talk switch
5 - Sling load lower hook release (*)

(*) If installed

355 NP 7.5
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

3 OTHER CONTROLS

Figure 3: Rotor brake – Fuel emergency shut-off

1 - LH engine fuel shut-off lever 5 - Safety catch
2 - LH engine emergency fuel 6 - RH engine emergency fuel
flow control flow control
3 - Governing failure red warning 7 - RH engine fuel shut-off lever
light 8 - Overrideable idle stop
4 - Rotor brake

Figure 4: Engine control selector

1 - Engine governing mode selector 2 - Engine starting selector :
(guarded): . FLT : automatic starting
. AUTO : automatic governing . TRNG : reduced rpm, used for
. MAN : manual governing training
. OFF : Shut down (guarded)

355 NP 7.5
15-18 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 7.6
LIGHTING SYSTEM
1 INTERIOR LIGHTING

1.1 GENERAL
Interior lighting is provided by:
- The instrument panel LED lighting plate and instrument interior lighting.
- Integral lighting for the VEMD controls, radio and radio-navigation controls
and overhead panels.
- LCD or LED displays on VEMD, radio and radio-navigation systems.
- CWP or other warning and advisory lights.
- Internal light for the stand-by compass.
Cabin lighting:
- Two adjustable spot lights in front of the overhead panel for the crew.
- Two adjustable spot lights on the rear cabin ceiling for passenger lighting.

1.2 COMMANDS AND CONTROLS

The instrument lighting system is supplied by two independent circuits controlled by
three pushbuttons, [INST LT] RH, [INST LT] LH(*) and [SYST LT]. Three
potentiometers serve for the instrument panel (pilot and copilot side), stand-by
compass, console, VEMD and equipment brightness controls.
- [INST LT] LH side (if installed): Switch for copilot instrument panel lighting.
- [INST LT] RH side: Switch for pilot instrument panel, compass, radio/radio
navigation, VEMD controls lighting.
- [SYST LT] : Switch for console and overhead panel lighting.
- The brightness can be adjusted by using the three lighting potentiometers COPIL
INST LT(*), SYST LT and PIL INST LT on the overhead panel.
- The brightness of the VEMD screens is adjusted by the VEMD brightness control
buttons.
- The forward adjustable spot lights have their own switch and potentiometer. They
are supplied by the direct battery bus (PP21). The spot lights are used as an
emergency light in case of total lighting failure.
- The two passenger adjustable spot lights have their own ON/OFF pushbuttons
nearby.

(*) If installed

355 NP 7.6
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

2 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
The basic external lighting comprises three position lights, one anti-collision light, one
swivelling and retractable landing light and one fixed landing light or retractable (*)
landing light.
The position lights, anti-collision light and fixed or retractable (*) landing light are
activated by the [POS LT], [A/COL LT] and [LAND LT] pushbuttons on the overhead
panel.
The swivelling and retractable landing light is controlled by the [ON-OFF-RETRACT]
switch and by the four-way switches on the pilot's and copilot's collective lever grips.
An [AUTO RETR] switch on the console controls retraction of the retractable landing
light (*).
A LIGHT advisory light indicates that at least one of the landing lights is on.

(*) If installed

3 STORM LIGHTING (if installed)

This optional installation is used to illuminate the instrument panel and thus reduce the
light contrast caused by the flashes of lightning. Lighting is obtained by means of a 20W
halogen flood light fitted on the cabin ceiling. The flood light is controlled by a
pushbutton located on overhead panel 5 α 2. The installation is protected by a fuse.

355 NP 7.6
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 1: Lighting commands and controls

355 NP 7.6
15-18 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 7.7
POWER PLANT
1 GENERAL
The engine system consists of:
- Two TURBOMECA ARRIUS 1A1 engines installed aft of the Main Gear Box, in
separate, drained, ventilated, fireproof bays.
- Two independent engine digital control systems (One Full Authority Digital
Engine Control "FADEC" per engine) located in the rear baggage compartment.
- Engine electrical and mechanical controls.
- Engine monitoring system (indications and alarms).
- A number of sensors.
- A lubrication system.
- A fuel system.
- An electrical starting system.
- Power supply device.
- An air bleed system (used for heating / demisting system and Sand Filters when
installed).

The TURBOMECA ARRIUS 1A1 is a free turbine turboshaft engine in the 350 kW class
(475 SHP). This engine is made up of an annular air intake, a centrifugal compressor
driven by a single stage turbine, an annular reverse flow combustion chamber, a single
stage free turbine with a through shaft driving a reduction gear unit located in front. The
reduction gear unit casing also includes the accessory gearbox driven by the gas
generator.

355 NP 7.7
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

The TURBOMECA ARRIUS 1A1 is made up of two modules:

- Module 1 consists of a reduction gear unit and accessories box assembly (front
part of the engine). The output shaft rotates clockwise, as seen from the rear, at
6016 rpm.
- Module 2 consists of the gas generator and free turbine assembly.

Figure 1: Engine view

355 NP 7.7
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

2 ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM

Each engine has a separate oil cooling system. The engine oil tanks, oil coolers and the
electrical fans are located in the Main Gear Box compartment.
In flight, both lubrication systems are monitored through the oil pressure and
temperature indications displayed on the VEMD.
A ENG P.1 or ENG P.2 warning light illuminates on the CWP in case of oil pressure
drop and a CHIP 1 or CHIP 2 warning light illuminates in case of chip detection in the
circuit.

Figure 2: Engine lubrication system

1 - Oil reservoir 12 - Chip detection warning light
2 - Magnetic plug 13 - Strainer
3 - Temperature probe 14 - Chip detector
4 - Oil temperature indicator (VEMD) 15 - Strainer and chip detector
5 - Oil/Fuel filter unit 16 - Scavenge pumps
6 - Filter pre-clogging magnetic contactor 17 - Pressurizing pump
7 - Low oil pressure switch 18 - Pressure relief valve
8 - Low oil pressure warning light 19 - Thermostatic valve
9 - Oil pressure transmitter 20 - Oil cooler
10 - Oil pressure signal adaption (VHIU) 21 - Fan
11 - Oil pressure indicator (VEMD) 22 - Thermal switch for oil cooling fans

355 NP 7.7
15-18 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

3 ENGINE CONTROLS
3.1 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS
- Three position starting selector (Refer to Figure 3, item 1)
OFF:
- Engine shutdown (switch guarded).
TRNG (training):
- Automatic starting of the engine to idle rating.
- Used for engine failure training.
- Free turbine speed governed at a lower value (355 rpm at zero power).
NOTE
At the same time, the other engine control system is automatically
limited to Training power ratings (Training OEI MAX or Training
OEI CONT).
When activated, the TRNG amber caution light comes on and the
training symbol is displayed on the VEMD engine page.

FLT (Flight):
- Normal position in flight.
- Automatic starting of the engine to flight rating.

- Governing system mode selector (Refer to Figure 3, item 2)

This selector can be used to simulate a failure of the governing system
(refer to the supplement SUP.6 for the conditions).
AUTO:
- Normal position in flight.
- Automatic engine governing
MAN:
- Manual governing.
-.When “MAN” governing is selected, the FADEC is switched to dormant
status. The metering unit will remain in the position it was in the
moment of switching from AUTO to MAN.
- The FADEC 1 or FADEC 2 light, on the CWP, for the engine FADEC in
manual mode comes on. The pilot must then use the fuel flow control
lever to vary the fuel flow (red indicator light on, the respective
emergency fuel flow control lever comes on).

355 NP 7.7
15-18 Page 4
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 3: Engine control selectors location

- Trim control and NR adjustment potentiometers

A potentiometer (1) supplies the FADEC Trim input with a command to increase
the power of one engine, and to reduce the power of the other one. This feature is
used to balance both engines, taking into account the parameter which is the
closer to the limitations (either Torque or N1).
A second potentiometer (2) is used for fine adjustment of the rotor speed, only for
maintenance purposes.

Figure 4: Trim control and NR location

- Anticipator system (automatic)

The anticipator system consists of:
- A dual collective potentiometer.
- A dual yaw pitch potentiometer.
- A dual channel electronic anticipator control box.

355 NP 7.7
15-18 Page 5
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

Depending on the collective pitch lever and yaw pedal positions, an electric signal
is sent to both engine control systems (FADEC) through the anticipator control
box.
This automatic function anticipates the power demand (engine dynamic response
improvement) and offsets the governor static droop and thus optimizes the NR
setting point.

- OEI MAX / OEI CONT ratings selection

At power on, the selected rating is automatically the OEI MAX rating (selected by
default by the FADEC).
An OEI MAX / OEI CONT pushbutton is mounted on both collective levers (Refer
to Section 7.5), without pilot-copilot priority, used to select the engine OEI stop.

- Engine dry cranking

Two pushbuttons [CRANK ENG #], on the overhead panel, control the starter of
the corresponding engine for the cranking operation.

3.2 MECHANICAL CONTROLS

(Refer to Section 7.5)
- Emergency fuel flow control levers (FFCL)
These levers, located on the overhead control quadrant, are mechanically linked to
an emergency fuel valve (located on the engine fuel control unit), bypassing the
fuel metering unit.
They are used, in an emergency, in case of a total governing system failure to
adjust the fuel flow rate of the engine.
Each lever has a red warning light indicating the FADEC failure (associated with
the FADEC # light on the CWP) or a lever position out of the neutral notch
(associated with the GOV light on the CWP).
When the lever is pulled rearwards so as to decrease the engine fuel flow, a
retractable stop provides engine flameout protection.
- Fuel shut-off control levers
Two fuel shut-off levers (one for each engine) are placed on the overhead control
quadrant. They operate the shut-off valves of the fuel system via flexball controls.
This control is used to stop the engine immediately in an emergency only.
The levers are secured by a snap wire.
- Rotor brake control lever
A lever, mounted on the overhead control quadrant and equipped with a
mechanical safety device (notch and trigger), operates the main rotor brake.
A switch in the electrical starting system prevents engine starting when the main
rotor brake is not fully released.

355 NP 7.7
15-18 Page 6
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

4 ENGINE MONITORING
4.1 ENGINE MONITORING PRINCIPLE
The engine parameters are displayed on the VEMD which computes and displays
different functions.
The ARRIUS 1A1 engine is controlled conventionally by N1 limits. Except in case of
an anomaly, compliance with the N1 limitations prevents the engine from exceeding
the TOT limitations.
These three main flight control parameters, TRQ, N1 and TOT, are processed into
the VEMD, through the First Limitation Instrument (FLI) concept.
For each defined power rating (AEO MCP, MTOP, OEI CONT and OEI MAX), the
TRQ and TOT limitations are constant in the flight envelope. They are independent of
OAT and Altitude parameters, contrary to N1 limitations.
In low altitude and cold conditions the first limit is conventionally the torque (MGB
limit) while at high altitude or in hot conditions the engine thermal limitation is reached
first (N1 limit).
Other engine monitoring parameters (Oil pressure and temperature, fuel pressure,
fuel quantity) are displayed on the lower screen of the VEMD.
Free turbine speed (N2) values and limitations are displayed on the NR/N2 rpm
indicator.

4.2 FIRST LIMITATION INDICATOR (FLI)

This indicator is computed with the three parameters, TRQ, N1 and TOT. It
represents the first limitation continuously. At any time, the FLI indicates the position
of the operating point in comparison with the limits (either mechanical or thermal).
The FLI calculation takes into account the variable engine N1 limitations, according to
OAT, Altitude and airspeed.
The raw digital data for the three primary parameters are also displayed on both
sides of the FLI.
Refer also to Section 7.4.
4.3 GOVERNOR OPERATING CONDITION MONITORING
The FADEC has three logic outputs to indicate to the crew the logic mode selected
by the control system (displayed on VEMD Engine page):
- OEI MAX / CONT selected
- Training mode selected
- AUTO/MANU mode selected

FADEC data
For troubleshooting or adjustment purposes, some FADEC data are displayed
continuously on the System Status page of the VEMD, available in flight. These data
come from the FADEC serial link RS232. This page gives:
- FADEC logic inputs and outputs (MSG line);
- Failures announced by the FADEC (FAIL line);
- Parameters used by the FADEC: P0, T1, COL P, TRIM, N1 and DeltaN1. (Refer to
Section 7.4)

355 NP 7.7
15-18 Page 7
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

5 AUTOMATIC GOVERNING SYSTEM

Figure 5: Automatic governing system diagram

5.1 CONTROL SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
The engine control system consists of:
- A single channel Electronic Engine Control Unit (EECU) so called FADEC for the
Full Authority characteristic of the system.
- A Manual back-up mode (FFCL).
- A Hydro-mechanical unit (made up of a low fuel pressure unit, a filtering unit, high
pressure and metering unit).
- An electronic overspeed protection.
5.2 FUEL FLOW CONTROL
The fuel flow is managed by the FADEC system, which maintains the free turbine
speed (N2) at a virtually constant value, independent of the engine power demand,
by automatically adjusting the gas generator speed (N1).
The FADEC provides fuel flow modulation via a stepper motor driving a metering
valve in the Hydro-mechanical unit.
The fuel flow is controlled by a N2 proportional governing loop which generates the
N1 datum for the N1 Control loop.
The anticipation signal (calculated from collective pitch position and yaw pedal
position) is used by the control system to improve the dynamic response of the
engine and to optimize main rotor rpm (static droop compensation).

355 NP 7.7
15-18 Page 8
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

5.3 FADEC FUNCTIONS

The FADEC provides the following functions:
- Automatic engine starting, preventing TOT exceedance.
- Proportional power turbine speed control with an optimized NR law.
- Protection against engine surge or flameout during transients or governing mode
transition.
- Acceleration and deceleration control.
- Management of engine limits and ratings (calculation and selection of effective N1
stop).
- Failure detection and indication.
- Protection against torque overlimit in OEI mode in transient phase.
- N1 and N2 cycles counting (calculated by the FADEC, displayed by the VEMD).
- Free turbine overspeed protection (See below).
- DeltaN1 calculation.
- Automatic P2 air bleed cut off for Sand Filters (if installed) in case of engine failure.
- Training mode management.
- Engine shutdown.

5.4 FREE TURBINE OVERSPEED PROTECTION

The free turbine overspeed protection device is located inside both FADECs.
The engine is automatically shut down if N2 > 441 rpm +/- 12 rpm (NR equivalent
speed), by actuating the fuel shut-off electrovalve.
The system also includes a cross inhibition function to prevent both engines being
simultaneously shut down by their overspeed protection system. When an overspeed
condition has occurred on one engine, the overspeed protection system of the other
engine is inhibited.
A test box is installed in the rear baggage compartment, used for testing the system.
Two three-position switches are used to:
- simulate an overspeed (TEST position)
- rearm the system after an overspeed protection activation (SET position)

Figure 6: Free turbine overspeed protection test box

When the FADECs are powered on, the "SET" lights are illuminated. Then they go off
during engine starting as soon as N2 reaches 100 rpm (NR equivalent speed).
In normal flight with both engines running, no lights are on.

355 NP 7.7
15-18 Page 9
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 7.8
FUEL SYSTEM
1 FUEL TANKS
There are two fuel tanks, one per engine. The fuel tanks are structural units and are
tandem-mounted below the MGB transmission deck, aft of the cabin bulkhead between the
baggage compartments. Forward fuel tank capacity is 330 liters and supplies engine 1
(LH engine); the rear fuel tank capacity is 400 liters and supplies engine 2 (RH engine).

2 FUEL CROSSFEED SYSTEM

A solenoid valve controls the transfer of fuel by gravity from one tank to the other:
[FUEL XFEED] pushbutton on the overhead panel. In flight, the fuel level in the two
tanks can therefore be balanced; in particular with one engine inoperative, the
crossfeed enables all the fuel to be used.
The [FUEL XFEED] pushbutton light is off when the valve is fully closed.

3 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM (Refer to Figure 1)

Both supply circuits are identical. The following items are successively mounted in the
direction of fuel flow:
- a booster pump (18) fitted on fuel tank bottom,
- a manual control fuel shut-off valve (11),
- a fuel pressure transmitter (9),
- a fuel filter (4) located on the engine between the low pressure pump and the high
pressure pump. It is associated with the engine oil filter, in order to warm up the fuel
and limit the use of anti-icing additive.
- a filter bypass (3) fitted with a pressure-switch (5) that indicates filter clogging.

4 BOOSTER PUMP FAILURE

The booster pump includes a bypass line with an inlet strainer. If one booster pump
fails, fuel is drawn out of the tank via the strainer by the engine low-pressure pump. The
strainer includes a non return valve to prevent the booster pump from discharging fuel
back through the strainer into the tank.

5 FUEL SYSTEM CONTROLS AND MONITORING

For each circuit, the following cockpit provisions are available to the pilot:
- a fuel shut-off lever that actuates the shut-off valve in the engine fuel supply system.
The levers are secured in forward position (valves opened),
- a fuel contents gauge (VEMD),
- a fuel pressure indicator (VEMD),
- a FUEL light that illuminates to indicate a low level in one of the two tanks,
- F.FILT 1 and F.FILT 2 lights that illuminate when the corresponding fuel filter is
clogged.

355 NP 7.8
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

6 SIMPLIFIED DIAGRAM OF THE FUEL SYSTEM

Figure 1: Fuel system diagram

1 - Flowmeter transmitter (*) 11 - Fuel shut-off valve
2 - High pressure fuel pump 12 - Fuel shut-off valve control lever
3 - Filter bypass with clogging indicator 13 - Forward and rear tank low level
indicator light
4 - Fuel filter 14 - Fuel contents indicator
5 - Differential pressure switch 15 - Fuel gauge transmitter
6 - Fuel filter pre-clogging indicator light 16 - Solenoid valve control pushbutton
7 - Low pressure fuel pump 17 - Crossfeed solenoid valve
8 - Calibrated orifice 18 - Booster pump
9 - Fuel pressure transmitter 19 - Strainer with non return valve
10 - Fuel pressure indication 20 - Booster pump control pushbutton

(*) If installed

355 NP 7.8
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 7.9
POWER TRANSMISSION SYSTEM AND ROTORS

1 POWER TRANSMISSION
The transmission system consists of:
- Engine / MGB couplings,
- Main gear box (MGB),
- Tail rotor drive shaft,
- Tail gear box (TGB).

• Engine / MGB couplings

They transmit the power of each engine to the MGB through a shaft and two
flexible couplings turning inside a coupling tube.

• Main gear box (MGB)

The MGB is intended to:
· Transmit the power of the engines to the main and tail rotors with a speed
reduction.
· Reduce the rotational speeds transmitted to the rotors.
· Drive the accessories:
˗ Oil pump
˗ Hydraulic pump
˗ NR sensor

• MGB lubrication system

The MGB gears and bearings are cooled and lubricated by a pressurized oil
system. The lubricating pump sucks the oil up from the MGB sump through a
strainer and delivers it through an oil cooler followed by the filter. The oil returns
to the sump by gravity.

355 NP 7.9
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 1: Main gear box lubrication system

1 - Oil inlet for 2 rotor mast bearings 11 - Oil overheating warning light
2 - Vent orifice 12 - Bimetallic thermal switch
3 - Low oil pressure warning light 13 - Pressure relief valve
4 - Low oil pressure switch 14 - Gear pump
5 - Flow restrictor orifice plate 15 - Strainer
6 - Filter bypass valve 16 - Self-sealing magnetic chip detector
7 - Oil filter 17 - Chip detector caution light
8 - Two oil coolers connected in parallel 18 - Vented oil filler neck
9 - Electrical cooling fans 19 - Thermal switch for oil cooling fans
10 - Oil level sight

355 NP 7.9
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

• Tail rotor drive shaft

The tail rotor drive shaft is composed of three shafts, a forward steel shaft, a
central shaft with bearing support and a long light rear shaft. The shafts are
connected to each other, to the MGB output and to the tail gear box by five
flexible couplings (2).
The long shaft is supported by six ball bearing/support assemblies (1) mounted
on elastomeric bushes which provide vibration damping.

Figure 2: Tail rotor drive shaft

• Tail gear box (TGB)

The TGB is a right-angle drive that steps the

rotational speed from 6125 down to 2088 rpm.
It is splash-lubricated and is provided with an oil
level sight and a chip detection device.

TGB CHIP caution light

Figure 3: Tail gear box

355 NP 7.9
15-18 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

2 ROTORS
- MAIN ROTOR
The main rotor head and shaft transmit MGB rotation and flying control movements to
the main rotor blades. Seen from the top, the main rotor turns clockwise.
The STARFLEX type semi-rigid main rotor head is made of new materials (resin
glass fibre, laminated thrust bearings, self-lubricating bearings) allowing all
conventional bearings and lubrication systems to be eliminated.
The three main rotor blades of a glass-resin laminate flexible construction, are
attached to the rotor hub through attach beams and a star. Pitch variation is achieved
through distortion of elastomer items.
The vibration dampening device mounted in the centre of the rotor head consists of a
weight oscillating between three springs mounted 120° apart.

- TAIL ROTOR
The two-blade tail rotor is see-saw mounted on the TGB.
The blades rotate anti-clockwise when seen from the RH side of the aircraft.

355 NP 7.9
15-18 Page 4
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 7.10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

1 GENERAL
The hydraulic systems make flying smoother by introduction of hydraulic power
assistance to the servo-controls which operate the flying controls.
Two separate hydraulic systems supply the servo-controls.
The hydraulic fluid used must comply with approved specification in SECTION 2 of the
present flight manual.
The total volume of fluid in each system is 3 liters (0.79 US Gal. - 0.66 UK Gal.) when
the reservoir is at max. level line.

2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
- LH system (Refer to figure 1: blue circuit)
The LH system which supplies the upper cylinder of the main servo-controls mainly
consist of :
- a gear pump (5) driven by the M.G.B. combiner unit on the LH side
- a regulation unit (6) secured to the LH side of the M.G.B.
including:
. a pressure regulation valve
. a low pressure switch
. a filter
- a hydraulic reservoir (4) that supplies the pump.
- RH system (Refer to figure 1: green circuit)
The RH system (1-2-3) supplies the lower cylinder of the main servo-controls and the
tail servo-control:
It is identical with the LH system but in addition includes:
- an electro-valve for cutting out hydraulic supply to the tail rotor servo-control.
- a load compensator comprising:
. a power actuator
. a check-valve
. an electro-valve for discharging the accumulator
. a hydraulic accumulator

355 NP 7.10
17-38 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

3 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Figure 1: Hydraulic system organization

1 - RH hydraulic regulator unit

2 - RH system reservoir
3 - RH system pump
4 - LH system reservoir
5 - LH system pump
6 - LH hydraulic regulator unit
7 - Main rotor servo controls

355 NP 7.10
17-38 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 2: Hydraulic system components diagram

1 - Hydraulic fluid reservoir 9 - Connecting rod
2 - Strainer on pump inlet and magnetic 10 - Compensator bellcrank
drain plugs 11 - Compensator actuator
3 - Constant flow-rate gear pump 12 - Accumulator
4 - Filter 13 - Calibrated orifice
5 - Pressure switch 14 - Check valve
6 - Regulating valve 15 - Pressure relief valve
7 - Tail rotor isolation solenoid valve 16 - Accumulator discharge solenoid
8 - Tail rotor hydraulic cut-off switches valve
(on collective pitch lever grips) 17 - "ACCU TST" pushbutton

355 NP 7.10
17-38 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

4 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM CONTROLS AND MONITORING

The hydraulic system is controlled by two switches:

- The hydraulic cut-off switch: guarded switch mounted on each collective with two
positions, ON and OFF.
Normally left in the ON position, allows the tail rotor servo to be powered when the
hydraulic system is operating normally. Selected to OFF following yaw control servo
jamming.
- The accumulator test pushbutton [ACCU TST] mounted on the overhead panel is
normally left in the OFF position.
Selected to the TEST position during pre-flight checks or emergency procedures, it
will open the yaw control servo solenoid valve, depressurizing the yaw load
compensator.
- On CWP, there are four caution lights related to the hydraulic system:
• HYD.1 and HYD.2 lights (one per system):
Indicating a loss of hydraulic pressure in the corresponding system.
• HYD.2 flashes if the yaw hydraulic cut-off switch on the collective grip is
OFF.
• SERVO light:
Indicating that a main servo unit slide valve is jammed.
• LIMIT light:
Indicating that the maximum permissible load is reached on the right-hand
roll servo which is the most heavily loaded.

355 NP 7.10
17-38 Page 4
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 7.11
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS
1 DC ELECTRICAL POWER
1.1 GENERAL
DC power is provided by two starter-generators (one per engine) and a 15 amp./hour
buffer-mounted battery.
A second battery identical with the first one can be installed as an option.
An external power receptacle mounted on the RH side of the aircraft supplies 28
VDC from a ground power unit.
Each generator supplies a primary bus and coupling is provided through a shed bus
and two contactors. Should one generator fail, the power supply is ensured by the
other generator.
1.2 GROUND POWER RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT
The ground power unit is coupled to the aircraft DC system through a contactor
when:
- Electrical power is available at the ground power receptacle,
- [EMERGENCY CUT OFF] switch is released,
- [BAT/EPU 1] and [BAT/EPU 2] pushbuttons are engaged.
Then:
- BAT.1 and BAT.2 caution lights are illuminated.
The battery and generators are isolated from the aircraft system until the ground
power unit is disconnected.
All three primary bus bars PP8-PP9-PP10 are supplied by ground power.
- The EECUs are supplied when the [DCT BAT] pushbutton is engaged.
1.3 BATTERY CIRCUIT
The battery is coupled to primary buses PP8-PP9-PP10 through contactors when:
- ground power unit is not plugged in,
- [EMERGENCY CUT OFF] switch is released,
- the [BAT/EPU 1] and [BAT/EPU 2] pushbuttons are engaged.
Then:
BAT.1 and BAT.2 lights are off and the aircraft systems are completely supplied
providing the BUS SHED switches are closed.
The battery can be uncoupled from the primary shed bus bars:
- either manually through the [EMERGENCY CUT OFF] and [BAT/EPU 1] and
[BAT/EPU 2] pushbuttons,
- or automatically through connection of the ground power unit.
The battery is protected by:
- a fuse connected to the BAT FUSE caution light indicating that the battery is isolated
from the DC circuit.
- BAT TEMP warning light indicates battery internal overheating.

355 NP 7.11
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

1.4 GENERATOR CIRCUIT

A generator is coupled to the primary buses through contactors when:
- ground power unit is not connected
- [EMERGENCY CUT OFF] switch is on,
- [CRANK ENG #] pushbutton is released,
- engine starter is not supplied,
- [GENE #] is engaged,
- voltage of the generator exceeds battery voltage by 0.5 volts.
A generator is automatically uncoupled when:
- generator voltage exceeds 31.5 volts,
- current reverses from the battery to the generator.

The [GENE RST] pushbutton allows resetting to be attempted.

Should the generators be uncoupled from the network, the GEN 1 and/or GEN 2
caution lights illuminate on the CWP.
1.5 SHEDDING CONTACTORS
These two contactors (normally cut in) energized through the
[SHED BUS 1] and [SHED BUS 2] switches, allow shed bus PP10 to be isolated
from the aircraft network.
1.6 DIRECT BATTERY SYSTEM
The direct battery system makes it possible, in the event of an electrical power
failure, to supply the vital power-consuming equipment (bus bar PP21) from the
battery.
Power supply from the battery to bus bar PP21 is achieved via the
[DCT BAT] pushbutton and indicated by illumination of the pushbutton light.
Consumers supplied by direct battery bus:
- Igniter engine 1 and 2 - Fire ext. engine 1 and 2
- FADEC 1 and 2 - Direct battery control indicator
- Fuel flow engine 1 and 2* light
- Pilot and copilot spot lights - Alticoder
- MGB fire detection circuit - Transponder
- Fuel jettison rear*
(*) If installed
1.7 DUAL BATTERY INSTALLATION (if installed)
In order to increase the available electric power, the electrical system may be
equipped with a second battery having the same specifications as the standard
battery. The addition of a second battery permits:
- self-contained engine starting in cold weather,
- extended range in IFR conditions after the loss of both generators.
With this arrangement, an unserviceable battery can be isolated and the remaining
"valid" battery kept connected to the system.
In this installation, the direct battery bus (PP21) is still supplied by the original
equipment battery.

355 NP 7.11
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

1.8 STANDBY ARTIFICIAL HORIZON CIRCUIT (If installed)

In the event of an electrical power failure, the standby artificial horizon can be
supplied from a standby battery. In this case, the [S/BY HORIZ] pushbutton
illuminates.

355 NP 7.11
15-18 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

1.9 DC POWER SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Figure 1: DC Power system components block diagram

355 NP 7.11
15-18 Page 4
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

ITEMS DESCRIPTION
1P Battery
SG1 LH starter generator
SG2 RH starter generator
8P External power receptacle
19P1-19P2 Battery contactors
20P External power contactors
21P1-21P2 Starting contactors
22P1-22P2 Generator contactors
23P1-23P2 Bus coupling or load-shedding contactors
29P Battery fuse
35P Direct battery contactor
PP8 RH primary bus
PP9 LH primary bus
PP10 Load-shedding primary bus
PP21 Direct battery bus
CRP1-CRP2 Regulation and protection PCBs

355 NP 7.11
15-18 Page 5
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

1.10 DC FUSE PANELS

Figure 2: Cockpit fuses on LH overhead panel 7α1

355 NP 7.11
15-18 Page 6
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 3: Cockpit fuses on RH overhead panel 7α2 and 8α

355 NP 7.11
15-18 Page 7
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 4: Cockpit fuses on central overhead panel 10α

355 NP 7.11
15-18 Page 8
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 5: Cockpit fuses on console panel 16α

355 NP 7.11
15-18 Page 9
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

1.11 CONTROLS AND MONITORING

1 - LH load-shedding contactor switch

2 - RH load-shedding contactor switch
3 - Coupled LH-RH system emergency cut off
switch
4 - Oil fans cut-off switch

Figure 6: Controls and monitoring

355 NP 7.11
15-18 Page 10
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

(*) If installed
Figure 7: Overhead panel

355 NP 7.11
15-18 Page 11
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

2 AC ELECTRICAL POWER
2.1 GENERAL
The AC power system is an optional installation required when the aircraft is fitted
with the automatic pilot and certain gyroscopic instruments. The alternating current is
provided by one or two inverters from the DC system. The static inverters mounted
underneath the cabin floor are identical and featured as follows:
- BASIC SPECIFICATIONS
· Input voltage ........................... 28 VDC
· Output voltages ...................... 115 V and 26 V
· Frequency............................... 400 Hz
· Power per output voltage ........ 150 VA at 26 V,
250 VA at 115 V,
max. combined power 250 W.
Each static inverter is provided with an under-voltage detector indicating the loss of
one or both AC power systems.
2.2 SINGLE AC SYSTEM
The static inverter is supplied from bus PP20 through a "INVERT 2" 16-Amp fuse on
panel 8 ALPHA and operated by the [INV 2] pushbutton on overhead panel 14
ALPHA.
Bus PP20 supplies the under-voltage detector through a 2.5-Amp. fuse on the
inverter.
Should one or both AC voltages drop or be lost, the detector causes the INV.2
caution light to illuminate on the CWP.
In association with the selector located on the overhead panel, the different voltages
can be checked on the VEMD.
Further to trip out, the inverter can be reset by releasing then re-engaging the [INV 2]
pushbutton.

2.3 TWIN AC SYSTEM (if installed)

The twin AC system is made up of two associated single AC systems.
Each of them is independent but should one fail, the other supplies all the consumers
via supply relays.
Each inverter is powered from bus PP19 or PP20 through the "INVERT 1" or
"INVERT 2" 16-Amp. fuse provided on panel 8 ALPHA and the [INV 1] or [INV 2]
pushbutton.
The buses also supply the under-voltage detectors and transfer relays through the
fuses on the inverters.
Should either AC voltage drop or be lost, the associated under-voltage detector
causes the INV.1 or INV.2 caution lights to illuminate on the CWP. The consumers
of the faulty system are automatically supplied.
The correspondant INV.# caution light remains on. In association with the selector
located on the overhead panel, the different voltages can be checked on the VEMD.
Further to trip out, the inverter can be reset by releasing then re-engaging the [INV 1]
or [INV 2] pushbuttons.

355 NP 7.11
15-18 Page 12
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

2.4 CONSUMERS SUPPLIED BY AC SYSTEM

- Panel 2x1(*):
Through bus bar 1XP10A:
. 115 VAC inverter protection
Through bus bar 1XP11A:
. 26 VAC inverter protection
- Panel 2x2(*):
Through bus bar 2XP10A:
. Radar . 115 VAC inverter protection
. Vertical gyro
Through bus bar 2XP11A:
. Pilot gyro horizon . Copilot gyro horizon
. AP coupler . Copilot gyro compass
. AP . Pilot gyro compass
. AP failure monitoring unit . RMI
. 26 VAC inverter protection

(*) If installed

355 NP 7.11
15-18 Page 13
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

2.5 AC FUSE PANELS (If installed)

Figure 8: Cockpit fuses on LH overhead panel 2x1

Figure 9: Cockpit fuses on LH overhead panel 2x2

355 NP 7.11
15-18 Page 14
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

2.6 AC POWER SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Figure 10: AC power system components block diagram

1 - Inverter control switches 7 - Voltmeter (26 VAC or 115 VAC

2 - Static inverters readings VEMD)
3 - 115 VAC undervoltage detector 8 - Voltmeter selector (26 VAC or
4 - 26 VAC undervoltage detector 115 VAC)
5 - Inverter failure warning lights K1 - Protection relay
6 - Relay K1 time delay K2 - Transfer relay

355 NP 7.11
15-18 Page 15
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 7.12
AIR DATA SYSTEM

1 GENERAL
Pitot tube(s), situated under the nose, pick up the total air pressure which is transmitted
to the airspeed indicators. The pitot tube(s) incorporate a resistor for heating. An amber
P.PITOT or A.PITOT (*) caution light on the CWP indicates that the respective
heating system is not operating or has failed.
Static pressure ports, on the tail boom junction frame, pick up the static pressure which
is transmitted to the conventional instruments (airspeed indicator, vertical speed
indicator, and altimeter) and to the VEMD for N1 limit determination via the 70 kt
pressure capsule.
A valve allows the static air pressure to be detected inside the cabin.

Figure 1: Pitot-static air data system

1 - Pitot tube(s) 6 - Drain and Emergency cabin static pressure
2 - 70 kt pressure capsule 7 - LH and RH Static pressure port
3 - Vertical speed indicator 8 - AFCS air data system (*)
4 - Airspeed indicator 9 - Standby altimeter (*)
5 - Altimeter

(*) If installed

355 NP 7.12
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 7.13
VENTILATION, HEATING AND DEMISTING

1 CABIN VENTILATION
Two separate circuits provide ventilation to the cabin.
- Cabin ceiling:
The cabin ceiling ventilation air is taken from outside the helicopter by a ram air
duct; this air duct is mounted on the cabin roof and its front face is equipped with a
scoop which ensures leak-tightness with the cooling air intake. The scoop includes
an internal water separator.
The junction between the ram air duct and the cabin air distribution is provided by a
duct also equipped with a water separator to drain the ceiling ventilation. The water
separator is equipped with a capsule which, according to its position, increases the
leakage flow in the MGB compartment and thus reduces the flow of fresh air in the
cabin (winter position).
The fresh air is then channeled into the cabin by polycarbonate structural
reinforcements of the canopy ceiling and four ventilation outlets.
- Cabin ventilation:
An air scoop, protected by a screen, located at the bottom of the canopy center
post, channels the air into a distribution unit. This unit is equipped with two outlets
which are connected to the instrument panel fairing which distributes the fresh air
inside the cabin.
The unit is also equipped with a water separator and a drain pipe which discharges
any water outside the helicopter at the canopy nose.
The air flow rate is controlled by a flap activated by a pull-knob beneath the pilots'
instrument panel.

355 NP 7.13
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

2 HEATING AND DEMISTING SYSTEM

Heating and demisting are achieved by mixing hot P2 air bled from the engine, with
outside air drawn from under the cabin floor.
The air mixture is ducted through two separate circuits to the heating outlets provided
under the front seats and to the demisting diffusers at the bottom of the front
windscreen.
Two manually operated valves mounted on the P2 lines and located on the cabin floor
are used to open and control warm air distribution.
P2 air bleed is indicated on the VEMD by a symbol.

Figure 1: Heating demisting system

1 - Demisting air diffusers 4 - P2 air ducts
2 - Demisting control valve 5 - Heating diffusers
3 - Heating control valve

355 NP 7.13
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 7.14

RESERVED

355 NP 7.14
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 7.15
FIRE DETECTION AND PROTECTION SYSTEM
1 MGB COMPARTMENT FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM
Two detectors are installed close to each other, and thus open simultaneously when the
temperature exceeds 160°C in the MGB compartment.
• FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM TEST:
- [BAT/EPU 1] + [BAT/EPU 2] ................................. ON
- [DCT BAT] ............................................................. ON
1st stage "Test light": when [TEST] pushbutton is pressed, all lights come on, on
caution and warning panel.
2st stage "Test line": FIRE 1 , FIRE 2 and MGB.FIRE warning lights remain on
for ≈ 2 seconds after the button is released; during this phase a fire line test is
carried out.

Figure 1: Location of system components

355 NP 7.15
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

2 ENGINE FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM

The system consists of two separate but identical detection systems. Each includes:
- Four temperature sensors
- A relay unit
- FIRE 1 and FIRE 2 warning lights
The two sensors in the front zone are set to 200°C.
The two sensors in the rear zone are set to 400°C.
These sensors monitor the temperature of the ventilation airflow around the engine and
in zones where a flammable liquid leakage hazard exists.

3 ENGINE FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM COMPONENTS

The fire extinguishing system includes:
- Two fire extinguishers and their distribution lines leading to a spray nozzle in
each engine compartment.
- A discriminating electric percussion circuit.
Each fire extinguisher can be discharged into either engine compartment as selected by
the pilot (direct or crossfeed delivery).

355 NP 7.15
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

4 ENGINE FIRE EXTINGUISHING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

Each fire extinguisher is equipped with two electric pyrotechnical cartridges (1) which
break a rupture disk (2) and release the fire extinguishing agent. Each distribution
system to the engine bay nozzles is connected to one percussion head of each fire
extinguisher by pipes with non-return valves (3) that isolate the extinguishers from each
other.
A pressure gauge (4) is provided to check extinguisher agent pressure before flight
On 5α1 panel:
- LH engine, first percussion:
Pressing pushbutton [FIRE EXT 1] discharges extinguisher 1 into the LH engine
bay.
- LH engine, second percussion:
Pressing pushbutton [FIRE EXT 2] discharges extinguisher 2 into the LH engine
bay.
On 5α2 panel:
- RH engine, first percussion:
Pressing pushbutton [FIRE EXT 1] discharges extinguisher 2 into the RH engine
bay.
- RH engine, second percussion:
Pressing pushbutton [FIRE EXT 2] discharges extinguisher 1 into the RH engine
bay.

Figure 2: Engine fire extinguishing distribution system

355 NP 7.15
15-18 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

5 FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM LOCATION

1 - Fire extinguisher
2 - Delivery tubes

Figure 3: Engine fire extinguishing system location

355 NP 7.15
15-18 Page 4
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 8
SERVICING
CONTENTS

PAGE
8.1 HANDLING
1 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED ............................................................................ 1
2 HANDLING .................................................................................................. 1

8.2 SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS

1 FUELS AND FUEL ADDITIVES ................................................................... 1
2 FUEL CAPACITY ......................................................................................... 1
3 LUBRICANTS .............................................................................................. 1
4 HYDRAULIC FLUIDS .................................................................................. 2
5 REFUELING ................................................................................................ 2
6 BATTERY CONNECTION ........................................................................... 4

8.3 TEST SHEETS

1 GENERAL .................................................................................................... 1
2 LIST OF TEST SHEETS .............................................................................. 1

355 NP 8.0.P6
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 8.1
HANDLING

1 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
- For moving the aircraft by hand:
• Single or twin handling (optional) wheels.
• Jacking lever.
- For towing the aircraft with a tractor:
The above-mentioned equipment, plus:
• A towing bar installation.

2 HANDLING
2.1 MOVING THE HELICOPTER BY HAND
On prepared ground
- Position the ground handling wheels on the mounting studs according to aircraft
balance,
- Install ground handling wheels (wheels outside skids, see detail B),
- Check that wheels are correctly locked (see detail A),
- Lift the aircraft onto its wheels using a jacking lever,
- Lock in this position with retaining pins.

On rough ground
- Use twin handling wheels,
- Install as described above,
- Proceed as before.

355 NP 8.1
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

2.2 TOWING THE HELICOPTER WITH A TRACTOR

Prepare the aircraft as above and attach the towing bar.
Elastic cords are wrapped around the undercarriage front crosstube.
NOTE
Handles at tail boom must always be used to guide the aircraft when towed.

Figure 1: Towing and manual positioning device

355 NP 8.1
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 8.2
SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS

1 FUELS AND FUEL ADDITIVES

The authorized fuels and fuel additives are given in SECTION 2 of the basic flight
manual.
The mixture obtained after incorporation of additive shall be homogeneous. It may be
added by means of approved equipment, generally supplied by the vendor of the
additive and in compliance with the vendor's instructions.
If there exists any doubt as to the concentration of additive in the contents of a fuel tank,
the fuel is to be drained from the tank and replaced by fuel containing a known
proportion of additive within the afore-mentioned limits, unless it is possible to measure
the concentration using a differential refractometer.
Instructions permitting the correct concentration of additive to be obtained are given by
the vendor.

2 FUEL CAPACITY
The fuel tank capacities are given in SECTION 4 of the basic flight manual.

3 LUBRICANTS
All capacities with tanks at MAXIMUM mark.
- Engine Oil System
Lubricants and Commercial Designations
• Authorized lubricants : Refer to SECTION 2 of the flight manual.
• Commercial designations : Refer to the TURBOMECA publications.
Engine oil system capacity : 9 liters (2.37 USgal, 1.98 UKgal).
(per engine)

- Transmission Components Oil Systems

• Authorized lubricants : Refer to SECTION 2 of the flight manual.

Capacities:
• Main gearbox : 6.5 liters (1.7 US gal, 1.4 UK gal).
(oil circuit included)
• Tail gearbox : 0.33 liter (0.09 U.S gal, 0.07 UK gal).

355 NP 8.2
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

4 HYDRAULIC FLUIDS
Authorized fluids : Refer to SECTION 2 of the flight manual.
Hydraulic Fluid capacities : 3 liters (0.79 US gal, 0.66 UK gal)
(per system)

5 REFUELING

Figure 1: Filler plugs and electrostatic connector location

355 NP 8.2
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

5.1 NORMAL REFUELING

- Place the helicopter on a level surface.
- Connect the bowser earth cable to the electrostatic balance connector (1) on the
helicopter.
- Check the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank on VEMD fuel indicator.
- Observe the following safety precautions:
• Ensure that the aircraft electrical power supply is switched off.
• Place a fire extinguisher near the work area.
• Strictly prohibit smoking in the safety area.
• Prohibit the use of any means of lighting not conforming to the safety rules.
• Ensure, during refueling (or defueling), that the bowser (or the defueling unit) is
connected to the aircraft by the electrostatic balance connectors (1).
• Strictly prohibit draining of fuel tanks, whether partially or totally, inside a hangar
or shop.
- Fill the tanks, monitoring the quantity of fuel delivered on the bowser flowmeter.
- Position and lock the filler plugs (2).
- Disconnect the bowser earth connector from the aircraft electrostatic balance
connector.
- Check that the differences in the aircraft fuel gauge readings after and before
refueling correspond to the quantity of fuel delivered and determine the
corresponding weight.

355 NP 8.2
15-18 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

5.2 REFUELING WITH ROTOR SPINNING

WARNING

REFUELING WITH ROTORS SPINNING IS PERMITTED ONLY AFTER PRIOR

APPROVAL IS GIVEN BY THE AUTHORITY CONCERNED AND IN COMPLIANCE
WITH OPERATIONAL REGULATIONS.

Observe the normal refueling safety precautions and strictly comply with the
additional instructions defined below:
- Set the aircraft on a firm surface,
- Head aircraft into forward wind sector ± 45° if wind above 15 kt (28 km/h),
- Lock the collective pitch lever in full low pitch position,
- Pilot must remain at the flight controls during all refueling operations with rotors
spinning,
- No radio transmission or operating of electrical switches,
- Limit refueling at 43% (forward tank) and 53 % (rearward tank) in order to prevent
any fuel spillage,
- The pilot must always have someone in view who can signal to the mechanic to
stop refueling,
- No one must approach the aircraft rotor disc unless acknowledged by the pilot,
- Closed and secured the filler plugs. Inform the pilot.

NOTE
Refueling operations with rotors spinning should be conducted with wind
velocity ≤ 15 kt (28 km/h) with gusts ≤ 5 kt (9 km/h) and should never be
conducted on an elevated helipad or other structure where a vertical
component of wind may be present.
Refueling with rotors spinning represents a potential hazard to the safety of the
helicopter, its occupants and third-parties.

6 BATTERY CONNECTION
Prior to connecting the main battery ground connection (heavy-duty wire), connect the
small test ground wire and check visually that no pushbutton are set to ON in the
cockpit.

355 NP 8.2
15-18 Page 4
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 8.3
TEST SHEETS

1 GENERAL
The test sheets are intended to sum up the checks to be carried out in flight or on the
ground, with rotors turning either after replacement of main components, or after
extensive work, or further to periodic inspections.
The test sheets are in the form of reproducible sheets which can be filled in directly by
the crew.

CAUTION

Since these checks do not form part of normal helicopter operation, they shall be
carried out only by qualified personnel under the operator's responsibility and in
compliance with the applicable operational regulations.

2 LIST OF TEST SHEETS

No. 0 FLIGHT REPORT
No. 1 VEMD CONFIGURATION
No. 2 GROUND RUN
No. 3 HOVER FLIGHT
No. 4 MCP LEVEL FLIGHT LOW ALTITUDE
No. 5 MAXIMUM TAKEOFF POWER CHECK
No. 6 MCP LEVEL FLIGHT HIGH ALTITUDE
No. 7 LOW PITCH SETTING
No. 8 HYDRAULIC CHECKS
No. 9 ELECTRICAL CHECKS

355 NP 8.3
18-43 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

TEST SHEETS APPLICABLE ACCORDING TO THE MAINTENANCE ACTION TAKEN

OR COMPONENT REPLACED.

TEST SHEETS No  0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MAINTENANCE ACTION OR
COMPONENTS REPLACED A B A B C D E F A B A B A B

ENGINE, FADEC OR
    /  / /   /     / / / /
ENGINE MODULE

MGB OR MGB MODULE  / /   / /    / /  /   / /

MAIN ROTOR HUB  / /   / / /    / /  /   / /

TAIL ROTOR  / /  / /  /  / / /  / / / / / /

TAIL ROTOR DRIVE  / /  / / /   / / / / / / / / / /

VEMD     / / / /  / /   / / / / / /

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM  / /  / / / /  / / / / / / / /  /

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM  / /  / /  / / / / / / / / / 

355 NP 8.3
18-43 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

355 NP 8.3
18-43 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

355 NP 8.3
18-43 Page 4
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

355 NP 8.3
18-43 Page 5
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

355 NP 8.3
18-43 Page 6
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

355 NP 8.3
18-43 Page 7
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

355 NP 8.3
18-43 Page 8
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

355 NP 8.3
18-43 Page 9
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

355 NP 8.3
18-43 Page 10
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

355 NP 8.3
18-43 Page 11
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

355 NP 8.3
18-43 Page 12
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

355 NP 8.3
18-43 Page 13
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

355 NP 8.3
18-43 Page 14
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

355 NP 8.3
18-43 Page 15
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

355 NP 8.3
18-43 Page 16
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

355 NP 8.3
18-43 Page 17
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

355 NP 8.3
18-43 Page 18
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

355 NP 8.3
18-43 Page 19
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

355 NP 8.3
18-43 Page 20
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

355 NP 8.3
18-43 Page 21
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

355 NP 8.3
18-43 Page 22
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 9
OPERATIONAL INFORMATION
CONTENTS

PAGE
9.1 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR CARGO SLING OPERATIONS
1 PERSONNEL TRAINING ............................................................................. 1
2 MANDATORY PRE-OPERATIONAL CHECKS ........................................... 1
3 AIRBORNE LOADS ..................................................................................... 2
4 IN-FLIGHT PRECAUTIONS......................................................................... 3
5 CARGO RING SIZE RULE .......................................................................... 4

9.2 Not used

9.3 EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (KANNAD INTEGRA AP-H)

1 GENERAL .................................................................................................... 1
2 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION .............................................................. 1
3 OPERATING PROCEDURE ........................................................................ 2

9.4 to 9.6 Not used

9.7 EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (KANNAD 406 AF,

406 AF-H OR 121 AF-H)
1 GENERAL .................................................................................................... 1
2 DESCRIPTION OPERATION ...................................................................... 1
3 OPERATING PROCEDURE ........................................................................ 2

9.8 MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY (KMD850)

1 GENERAL .................................................................................................... 1
2 DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................ 1
3 OPERATING PROCEDURE ........................................................................ 1

9.9 Not used

355 NP 9.0.P6
17-38 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

PAGE

9.10 LOCATOR SEARCHLIGHT

1 GENERAL.................................................................................................. 1
2 DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................... 1
3 OPERATION.............................................................................................. 2

9.11 HAILERS
1 GENERAL.................................................................................................. 1
2 DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................... 1

9.12 ADDITIONAL LANDING LIGHT, CONTROLLABLE IN ELEVATION

AND AZIMUTH
1 GENERAL.................................................................................................. 1
2 DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................... 1
3 OPERATION.............................................................................................. 1
4 PROTECTION OF THE CIRCUITS ........................................................... 2

PAGE
9.13 ADDITIONAL LANDING LIGHT, CONTROLLABLE IN ELEVATION
1 GENERAL.................................................................................................. 1
2 DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................... 1
3 OPERATING PROCEDURE ...................................................................... 1
4 PROTECTION OF THE CIRCUITS ........................................................... 2

9.14 AIR AMBULANCE INSTALLATION

1 GENERAL.................................................................................................. 1
2 DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................... 1
3 OPERATING PROCEDURE ...................................................................... 2

9.15 Not used

355 NP 9.0.P6
17-38 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

PAGE
9.16 SCHERMULY FLARES
1 GENERAL.................................................................................................. 1
2 OPERATING PROCEDURE ...................................................................... 1
3 PROTECTION OF THE CIRCUITS ........................................................... 1

9.17 Not used

9.18 NOISE REDUCTION

1 GENERAL.................................................................................................. 1
2 OPERATING IN SENSITIVE AREAS ........................................................ 1

9.19 Not used

9.20 RADIO ALTIMETER (AHV 16)

1 GENERAL.................................................................................................. 1
2 DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................... 1
3 OPERATION.............................................................................................. 3
4 TEST PROCEDURE .................................................................................. 4

9.21 INTERCOM SYSTEM (GMA 340 H)

1 GENERAL.................................................................................................. 1
2 INSTALLATION AND OPERATION DESCRIPTION ................................. 1

355 NP 9.0.P6
17-38 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 9.1
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR CARGO SLING OPERATIONS

1 PERSONNEL TRAINING
Cargo sling operations may only be conducted by pilots who already have considerable
experience with this type of aircraft.
No pilot should perform solo external load flights without first having accomplished such
operations with a qualified instructor.
Mechanics on ground duty must be fully informed by the pilot before each new
operation, in particular as regards:
- Their position on the ground considering the proposed flight path,
- The direction in which to move away,
- The hook-up operation,
- Hand signals to be used or radio instructions,
- Protective equipment: Helmets, gloves, goggles (if applicable),
- The number of round trips between refueling operations,
- The manner of retrieving slings and nets.

2 MANDATORY PRE-OPERATIONAL CHECKS

- Helicopter condition:
In addition to the normal helicopter pre-flight checks, the release unit must be
carefully inspected and the mechanism checked for correct release operation,
- Condition of sling equipment:
The nets, straps and slings must be examined thoroughly. Any worn or frayed
components are to be discarded.

- Preparation of loads:
Make sure that all participants are well aware of the weight of the loads.
Ensure that the method of suspension is understood.
- Condition of loading and unloading areas:
Remove or tie down all that might be displaced by the rotor downwash.
- Total weight of helicopter with load:
Define maximum acceptable load compatible with terrain configuration and
atmospheric conditions. The maximum all up weight of the aircraft is that at which
OGE hover can be held over the higher of the take-off or landing platforms.

355 NP 9.1
18-43 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

3 AIRBORNE LOADS
Heavy loads, such as bags of cement or drums of kerosene, which are carried in a net,
present no particular problem.
Special precautions must be taken in the case of bulky loads, which have a tendency to
oscillate and even to "float" during transport on the sling.
Permeability to air can have a stabilizing effect on a bulky load: For example, a cable-
car should be carried with its doors open.

Never carry an airfoil alone: There is a great risk of the airfoil flying up into the tail rotor.

If several cables are used to sling the load, they must be long enough to form an angle
of less than 45° between cables at the point of suspension under the helicopter;
experience shows that oscillation of the load is thus less likely to occur.

On the other hand, if the load is slung on a single sling cable, it is preferable that a fairly
short cable be used as there is then less risk of the load swinging, and it is easier to
judge the height of the load during approach.

For the retrieval of crashed helicopters, it is generally possible to use a lifting ring on the
rotor mast.
Airplanes are carried using straps passing under the fuselage or under the wings. The
cables must be attached in such a way that the airplane is in a slight nose-down
attitude when the helicopter is in hover.

355 NP 9.1
18-43 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

4 IN-FLIGHT PRECAUTIONS
After hooking on the load, the ground mechanic is to check the position of the sling
cables then move away. The pilot must then make sure that the mechanic has moved
clear and then be advised by signs that he may lift off the load.
Power must be applied slowly enough to allow the helicopter to center itself above the
load.
A vertical take-off must be made, avoiding dragging the load along the ground or
striking any obstacle.
If the load starts to swing, slowly reduce speed or make a gentle left turn.
Approach must be made head into the wind with gradual reduction in airspeed, and
transition into hover high enough above the ground to eliminate the risk of dragging the
load.
Set the load down, then reduce collective sufficiently to slacken the cables before
opening the release unit hook; this also allows the pilot to ensure that the load is
deposited. If the cables are long enough, move sideways a little before opening the
hook, to prevent the ring and tackle from falling onto the freight.
Even after the mechanic has signaled that the load is released, move away as if it were
not; this is an advisable precaution against possible misinterpretation of signals.
Never fly away with an empty net or an unballasted sling.

355 NP 9.1
18-43 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

5 CARGO RING SIZE RULE

- Care must be taken when hooking a load on the cargo hook.
- It is the responsibility of the operator to ensure that the cargo hook will operate
properly with each ring.
- A placard located on both sides of the A/C illustrates the following:
• Cables, straps, ropes, etc. must not be used directly on the cargo hook,
• Only one primary ring linked to a unique secondary ring shall be attached to the
cargo hook.
- Cargo hook ring size shall obey the following rules:

Figure 1: Cargo ring

Cargo Cargo
hook hook A B C E
manufacturer P/N
Onboard Not
528-023-51 > 50mm < 26mm > 55mm
Systems specified

355 NP 9.1
18-43 Page 4
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 9.3
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER
(KANNAD INTEGRA AP-H)

1 GENERAL
The KANNAD INTEGRA AP-H radio beacon is an emergency transmitter with built-in
GPS which is used to locate the helicopter in case of an emergency.
It transmits simultaneously on the international frequencies of 121.5 MHz and
406.025 MHz.
To avoid power consumption, the GPS receiver is not power supplied in "ARM" mode.
After a crash (automatic activation) or manual activation, the GPS will try to acquire a
position in continuous mode during one hour and by different sequences up to 24 hours
of transmission. If the GPS receiver acquires a valid position, then the message will
contain the true position in the next 406.025 MHz burst. If the GPS receiver does not
acquire a valid position, then the message will contain the default value (GPS position
not valid).
The transmitter starts operating automatically in case of impact. It may be switched on
manually via the switch located on the lower face of the transmitter or via the remote
control switch located on the instrument panel.

2 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

- Components and location:
• A transmitter (1), with an [ARM-OFF-ON] switch, attached to the structure inside the
rear cargo hold,
• An auxiliary antenna attached to the transmitter,
• An [ON-ARMED-RESET TEST] control switch located on the instrument panel (2),
• An external antenna on the left side (3),

355 NP 9.3
17-38 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 1: Remote control switch and emergency locator

KANNAD INTEGRA AP-H

3 OPERATING PROCEDURE
- Pre-flight check:
• On the transmitter, check that the switch is set to "ARM",
• On the instrument panel, check that the remote control switch is set to "ARMED".

- Functional test:

NOTE
Test procedure is to be conducted only once per month.
The self test mode is a temporary mode.
This mode is selected either:
• By switching the switch on the ELT from "OFF" to "ARM",
• By selecting "RESET TEST" on the remote control panel (provided that the switch
on the ELT is in the "ARM" position).

The buzzer operates during the self test procedure.

NOTE
It is strictly prohibited to test the ELT by transmitting.

355 NP 9.3
17-38 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

- Post-flight check:

After landing, set the VHF receiver to 121.5 MHz to ensure that the emergency
locator transmitter has not accidentally been switched on.

NOTE
If the aircraft is to be grounded for a long time, set the switch on the ELT to the
"OFF" position.

- Automatic operation:

The transmitter is activated automatically in the event of an impact, providing the

switches are set to "ARMED".

NOTE
The "RESET TEST" position stops locator transmitting and resets the impact
detector.

- Manual operation:

The unit may be activated manually by setting the control switch to "ON".

- Autonomous operation:

The transmitter may be used for self-contained operation on the ground as following:
• Remove the transmitter from its mounting bracket,
• Disconnect the coax from the aircraft antenna,
• Choose an unobstructed area,
• Connect the auxiliary antenna,
• Place the unit upright with the antenna upward,
• Switch on the transmitter by setting the [ARM-OFF-ON] switch to "ON".

355 NP 9.3
17-38 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 9.7
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER
(KANNAD 406 AF, 406 AF-H OR 121 AF-H)
1 GENERAL
The KANNAD 406 AF radio beacon is an emergency transmitter which is used to locate
the helicopter in case of an emergency.
It transmits simultaneously on the international frequencies on 121.5 MHz, 243 MHz
and 406.025 MHz; 406.025 MHz frequency is operative for the KANNAD 406 AF and
406 AF-H radio beacon only.
The transmitter starts operating automatically in case of impact. It may be switched on
manually via the switch located on the lower face of the transmitter or via the remote
control switch located on the instrument panel.

2 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

- Components and location:
• A transmitter (1), with an [ARM-OFF-ON] switch, attached to the structure inside the
rear cargo hold,
• An [ON-ARMED-RESET TEST] control switch located on the instrument panel (2),
• An external antenna on the left side (3),

Figure 1: Remote control switch and emergency locator

KANNAD 406 AF, 406 AF-H or 121 AF-H

355 NP 9.7
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

3 OPERATING PROCEDURE
- Pre-flight check:
Check the following on the transmitter:
• The switch is set to "ARM".
Check the following on the instrument panel
• The remote control switch is set to "ARMED".

- Functional test:

NOTE
Test procedure is to be conducted only once per month.
The self test mode is a temporary mode.
This mode is selected either:
• By switching the switch on the ELT from "OFF" to "ARM",
• By selecting "RESET TEST" on the remote control panel (provided that the switch
on the ELT is in the "ARM" position).

The buzzer operates during the self test procedure.

CAUTION

As the ELT transmits on emergency frequencies, the self-test should be carried

out only after authorisation by the control tower. If it is not possible to contact
a control tower, the self-test must be carried out in the first five minutes of
each hour.

NOTE
It is strictly prohibited to test the ELT by transmitting.

- Post-flight check:

After landing, set the VHF receiver to 121.5 MHz to ensure that the emergency
locator transmitter has not accidentally been switched on.

NOTE
If the aircraft is to be grounded for a long time, set the switch on the ELT to the
"OFF" position.

355 NP 9.7
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

- Automatic operation:

The transmitter is activated automatically in the event of an impact, providing the

switches are set to "ARMED".

NOTE
The "RESET TEST" position stops locator transmitting and resets the impact
detector.

- Manual operation:

The unit may be activated manually by setting the control switch to "ON".

- Autonomous operation:

The transmitter may be used for self-contained operation on the ground as follows:
• Remove the transmitter from its mounting bracket,
• Disconnect the coax from the aircraft antenna,
• Choose an unobstructed area,
• Extend the built-in tape antenna,
• Place the unit upright with the antenna upward,
• Switch on the transmitter by setting the [ARM-OFF-ON] switch to "ON".

355 NP 9.7
15-18 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 9.8
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY (KMD850)
1 GENERAL
The multi-function display KMD850 is used to display all information provided by the
radar ART 2000 and to control the modes of this radar. It can also be used to display
DMAP cartographic data, the helicopter position being provided by the GPS navigation
source.
The navigation database is stored in a PCMCIA card inserted beside the screen.

2 DESCRIPTION
Refer to the equipment manufacturer's technical publications for more detailed
information.
The KMD850 is located on the instrument panel.

KMD850

NAV data RT On/Off

GPS Radar
GNS430/430W ART 2000

Figure 10-8: Multi function display (KMD850)

3 OPERATING PROCEDURE
Correct operation of the MFD KMD850 is not guaranteed for an internal cabin
temperature below -20 °C.
NOTE
The radar ART 2000 is automatically switched to standby mode for ground speed
("G/S") below 30 kt (56 km/h).

355 NP 9.8
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 9.10
LOCATOR SEARCHLIGHT
1 GENERAL
The LOCATOR searchlight installation is intended to illuminate the ground using a
swivelling light beam in order to facilitate certain missions (search and rescue,
surveillance, etc.).

2 DESCRIPTION
This installation consists mainly of:
- A 450 W power light (Detail A) installed on the bottom, forward LH side of the lower
structure, comprising:
• A glass dome (3),
• A swivelling parabolic reflector (4),
• A fixed-arc lamp (5),
• A housing (2),
• A mount (1).
- A control handgrip (Detail B) which, when not used, is hooked onto a support located
between the two seats,
- An amber light near the control handgrip support, which comes on to indicate that the
searchlight is on.

Figure 1: Additional LOCATOR searchlight

355 NP 9.10
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

3 OPERATION
An ON/OFF pushbutton (6) located on the control grip is used to switch the LOCATOR
searchlight installation on and off.
Full brightness is obtained 15 sec. after the searchlight has been switched on. This is
confirmed by the amber indicator light which comes on.
A four-way button (7) is used to operate the reflector to direct the light beam in the
desired direction.

NOTE
To prevent any premature damage to the lamp it is advisable:
- After the searchlight has been switched on, to wait 15 sec. before switching it
off,
- After the searchlight has been switched off, to wait 30 to 60 sec. before
switching it on again.

355 NP 9.10
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 9.11
HAILERS
1 GENERAL
The hailers are intended to transmit either messages of a high sound level, or a
continuous or intermittent signal (siren).
The effect of this optional equipment on the complementary performance data is
negligible.

2 DESCRIPTION
The system mainly consists of:
- An amplifier located in the LH side baggage hold,
- A dual hailer mounted on the landing gear rear cross beam,
- A control unit (AA21) located on the instrument panel.

1 2 3 4 5

1- Volume level 4- INT position is not connected

2- Public address or radio mode 5- System ON switch with green
3- 3-position switch : Continuous indicator
or intermittent mode or OFF

Figure 1: Public address control unit

System operation:
- ICS .................................................... ON, set to "COM.3",
- control unit (AA21) ............................ ON.

NOTE

Switches 2 and 4 must be in position "PA" and "EXT" for the hailers to operate.

355 NP 9.11
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 9.12
ADDITIONAL LANDING LIGHT,
CONTROLLABLE IN ELEVATION AND AZIMUTH
1 GENERAL
The additional landing light, controllable in elevation and azimuth, is an optional
equipment designed for improving safety during approach and taxiing maneuvers.
This optional equipment is mounted on the underside of the lower structure, in the LH
side of the central fairing in front of the forward cross-tube of the landing gear.
Its power is 450 W.

2 DESCRIPTION
The installation comprises:
- A retractable and controllable light,
- A [ON-OFF-RETRACT] three position switch on RH pilot’s collective pitch grip. This
switch is used to switch the light on and off and to retract it automatically,
- A four-way switch on RH pilot’s collective pitch grip. This switch is used to control the
light in elevation and azimuth,
A LAND LT indicator light on CWP, which shows that one landing light is illuminated.

3 OPERATION
The landing light is switched on or off by means of the [ON-OFF-RETRACT] three-way
switch on the RH pilot's collective pitch grip:
- In the "ON" position, the landing light is switched on and the LAND LT indicator light
is illuminated.
- In the center "OFF" position, the landing light is switched off and the LAND LT
indicator is off.
- The spring-loaded "RETRACT" position is used to switch off and retract the landing
light automatically.
In this way, the landing light will always be switched off in the retracted
position.
The extension and orientation of the landing light are controlled by means of the four-
way switch.

355 NP 9.12
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

4 PROTECTION OF THE CIRCUITS

The circuits are protected by means of:
- Two 2.5 A fuse/breaker for the control circuits (located on the center overhead
fuses/circuit breakers 10α panel in the cockpit),
- A 20 A fuse/breaker for the lighting circuit (located on the vertical LH fuses/breakers
7α1 side panel in the cockpit).

355 NP 9.12
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 9.13
ADDITIONAL LANDING LIGHT,
CONTROLLABLE IN ELEVATION

1 GENERAL
This retractable landing light (replacing the RH basic fixed landing light), controllable in
elevation only, is an optional equipment designed for improving safety during approach
and taxiing maneuvers.
This equipment is mounted on the underside of the lower structure, in the RH side of the
central fairing in front of the forward cross-tube of the landing gear.
Its power is 450 W.

2 DESCRIPTION
The installation comprises:
- A retractable light.
- A [LAND LT] pushbutton on RH pilot side overhead panel. This pushbutton is used to
switch the retractable light on and off,
- A [RETRACT] pushbutton on the center console to automatically retract this additional
landing light.
- A two-way rocker switch on RH pilot’s collective pitch grip to control the retractable light
in elevation.
- A four-way switch on LH pilot’s collective pitch grip to control the retractable light in
elevation.
- A LAND LT indicator light on CWP, which shows that one landing light is illuminated.

3 OPERATING PROCEDURE
The retractable landing light is switched on and off by means of the [LAND LT] pushbutton
on RH pilot side overhead panel:
- In the depressed position, the landing light is switched on and the LAND LT indicator
light is illuminated.
- In the out position, the landing light is switched off and the LAND LT indicator is out (if
the swiveling landing light is also out).
- The [RETRACT] pushbutton is used to retract the additional landing light automatically.
The extension and orientation of the retractable landing light are controlled by means of the
two-way rocker switch of the RH pilot collective grip and/or the four-way switch on the LH
pilot side.

355 NP 9.13
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

4 PROTECTION OF THE CIRCUITS

The circuits are protected by means of:
- one 2.5 A fuses/breakers for the control circuit (located on the LH overhead
fuses/circuit breakers 7α1 panel in the cockpit).
- a 20 A fuse/breaker for the lighting circuit (located on the vertical RH fuses/breakers
8α side panel in the cockpit).

355 NP 9.13
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 9.14
AIR AMBULANCE INSTALLATION

1 GENERAL
The air ambulance duty version is intended to carry one or two stretcher patients
accompanied by one or two medical assistants seated on the RH rear bench seat.

2 DESCRIPTION
To be fitted out for the air ambulance role, it is necessary to remove the copilot’s seat,
the dual controls and if necessary the rear left hand bench seat.
The lower stretcher (6) rests on the cabin floor; it is secured with straps (3 and 5) to tie-
down rings and brackets.
The top stretcher (1) is held by supports (2) on the rear bulkhead, a frame (4) at the
front, and is secured by straps (7) to the floor-mounted tie-down rings.

Figure 1: Air ambulance installation

355 NP 9.14
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

3 OPERATING PROCEDURE
Three configurations are possible:

- 1 stretcher (upper or lower),

- 2 stretchers.
NOTE

If only one stretcher is to be used it will be save time to use the lower stretcher.

When not in service the stretchers are folded and stowed with their straps in the baggage
hold. The upper stretcher support frame folds down onto the cabin floor.
The stretchers are installed in the following order:
1. Lower stretcher (6),
2. Upper stretcher (1).
3.1 PREPARATION OF THE CABIN
Installation of the air ambulance duty version requires a number of preliminary cabin
alterations.
- Lower stretcher:
• Remove: Dual controls, copilot’s seat, seat cushions from LH rear passenger
seat,
• Fold up LH rear passenger seat against rear bulkhead.
- Upper stretcher:
• Remove: Dual controls, (tail rotor control pedals need not be removed), copilot’s
seat, seat cushions from LH rear passenger seat, LH carpeting,
• LH rear passenger seat remains open,
• Raise the support to vertical position and secure.
- Upper and lower stretchers:
• Remove: dual controls, copilot’s seat, LH rear passenger seat cushions and seat,
LH carpeting.
NOTE

For the “plush” version, both armrests of the LH rear passenger seat must be
removed.

355 NP 9.14
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

3.2 INSTALLING THE STRETCHERS

- Open the port side doors,
- Introduce the stretchers into the cabin forwards:
• Place the lower stretcher on the cabin floor,
• Place the upper stretcher on the support post.
- Engage the rear handles of the stretchers in the brackets on the rear bulkhead,
- Secure the retaining straps and hooks at the front and “PIP” pins at the rear.

CAUTION

The patients must be strapped to the stretchers and must be embarked feet
forwards, head towards the tail.

355 NP 9.14
15-18 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 9.16
SCHERMULY FLARES

1 GENERAL
SCHERMULY flares are used to illuminate the ground during night operations.
Two flares are carried on a support on the port side of the fuselage.

2 OPERATING PROCEDURE
The maximum altitude for firing the flares is 1500 ft (500 m).
For maximum effectiveness, the second flare should be fired at an altitude of at least
800 ft (250 m).
It should be noted, however, that firing the flares below 1200 ft (400 m) may be
dangerous if a fire hazard exists in the area to be illuminated.

Firing of the flares is controlled electrically.

The control system comprises:
- a [FLARES] pushbutton situated on the RH overhead control panel,
- a firing pushbutton on the pilot’s cyclic control grip.

3 PROTECTION OF THE CIRCUITS

The firing circuit is protected by a breaker located on the 31/32 α circuit breaker panel in
the cockpit.

355 NP 9.16
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 9.18
NOISE REDUCTION
1 GENERAL
- Adopt a trajectory as far as possible from sensitive areas; otherwise, fly alongside the
noisiest land routes (highways, railways),
- Fly at least at 1000 ft AGL,
- Fly if possible on the downwind side of sensitive areas,
- Maintain steady flight as far as possible avoiding large pedal movements or over-
control,
- Leave the sensitive areas as much as possible on the right side of helicopter.

2 OPERATING IN SENSITIVE AREAS

- Fly-over:
• Select IAS = 110 kt (204 km/h) for OAT = + 25°C,
• Increase IAS slightly if OAT is higher, and inversely,
• If possible, increase height to reduce the noise.

- Take-off and climbing from a helipad in a sensitive area:

• After the shortest possible acceleration phase, once Vy is reached, set to MCP
while maintaining Vy.

- Approach and landing on a helipad in a sensitive area:

• Select IAS = 60 kt (111 km/h), with a rate of descent close to 1000 ft/min (305
m/min.).

- Take-off from and landing on a helipad in a non sensitive area but adjacent to
neighboring sensitive areas (seaside areas for example):
• If possible choose a take-off path opposite to the sensitive area. Accelerate until
Vy is reached, then start climbing at this speed with MCP,
• If possible for landing, choose a path facing the sensitive area. Select Vy with a
rate of descent close to 500 ft/min (152 m/min.).

- Maneuvers near the ground (around hovering) in a sensitive area:

• Avoid unnecessary hovering,
• Avoid quick and repetitive pedal movements,
• Prefer right spot turns.

355 NP 9.18
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 9.20
RADIO ALTIMETER (AHV 16)
1 GENERAL
The radio altimeter:
- Provides an accurate measurement of the aircraft height relative to the ground,
regardless of the atmospheric conditions,
- Informs the crew when the aircraft descends below a decision height or below 100 ft*.

2 DESCRIPTION
2.1 COMPOSITION
The radio altimeter installation consists of:
- A transceiver,
- An indicator located on the instrument panel,
- A warning box,
- A transmission antenna,
- A reception antenna,
- A 2.5A circuit-breaker located on the cockpit fuses (on central overhead panel
10α). The location of this circuit breaker is given in section 7.
2.2 POWER SUPPLY
The system is powered by the aircraft 28 VDC power system.

(*) If installed

355 NP 9.20
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

Figure 1: Radio altimeter indicator

Item Description
1 "DH" selector: Decision height setting.
2 Scale 0 - 500 ft.
3 Height digital display (0 to 8000 ft).
4 "ON/OFF/TEST" selector.
"DH" indicator: The indicator flashes when the decision
5
height is reached.
Flag: The flag appears if:
6 - The system is faulty,
- In test mode,
- Above 8000 ft.
7 Decision height display.

2.3 CONTROL (ON SCU)

Push-button ............................................. DISENGAGED:

- Indicator light (1) : remains off, ("100 ft" audio alert is audible).
Push-button ............................................. ENGAGED:
- Indicator light (1) : comes on, ("100 ft" audio alert is muted).

355 NP 9.20
15-18 Page 2
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

3 OPERATION
3.1 GENERAL
The radio altimeter is switched on using the ON/OFF/TEST selector (4) on the
indicator.
The DH knob (1) is used to set the decision height.
A specific audio alert (800 Hz modulation chopped at 5 Hz) is produced when the
helicopter descends through the decision height.

NOTE
The DH audio alert is (re-)armed after the helicopter climbs at least 20 ft
above DH.
When hovering low or when landing with the radio-altimeter antenna(s) above
grass or plant cover, the radio-height may become invalid (flag appears). Such
invalidities are more likely to occur in the presence of wind.

3.2 "100FT" AUDIO ALERT (IF INSTALLED)

A specific audio alert (800 Hz modulation chopped at 15 Hz) is produced when the
helicopter descends through 100 ft.
For operations around 100ft where the recurrence of the "100 ft" alert may hamper
aircrew performance, the "100 ft mute" function may be used.
• "100 ft Mute" activation
[100ft Mute] ENGAGED, CHECK the lights come on.

• "100 ft Mute" de-activation

[100ft Mute] DISENGAGED, CHECK the lights go out.

NOTE
The "100 ft" audio alert is (re-)armed after the helicopter climbs above 120 ft.

355 NP 9.20
15-18 Page 3
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

4 TEST PROCEDURE
- Run-up checks:
Check the radio altimeter installation:
1. "ON/OFF/TEST" selector (4) .......................... ON,
2. "DH" selector (1) ............................................ CHECK, 0 < DH < 100 ft,
3. [100ft Mute] ................................................... DISENGAGED,
4. "ON/OFF/TEST" selector (4) .......................... TEST, and CHECK:
- Display of all front face segments,
(Test height, Flag, DH value),
- "100 ft" audio alert,
- "DH" audio alert.

355 NP 9.20
15-18 Page 4
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

SECTION 9.21
INTERCOM SYSTEM (GMA 340 H)

1 GENERAL
The Garmin GMA 340 H intercom system audio panel ensures the following main
functions:
- Intercommunications between pilot, copilot and passengers,
- Radio-communication microphone and audio selection,
- Radio-navigation audio selection,
- Links with other audio inputs (music, public address, etc.).
The GMA 340 H features a failsafe mode in case the power supply is lost or the unit is
inadvertently turned off.

2 INSTALLATION AND OPERATION DESCRIPTION

2.1 COMPONENTS AND LOCATION
- A panel located on the upper part of the center console with all necessary
switches for available modes and audio sources selection,
- Two 2.5A fuses/circuit-breakers located on the overhead fuses/circuit breakers
10α panel.

MKR ICS COM/NAV Other functions

1. MKR beacon lights 5. Pilot/Passengers volume (pull out 13. COM receiver selectors 17. Annunciator lights test
to adjust passenger volume) pushbutton
2. MKR audio/ mute 6. Pilot ICS squelch level (VOX) 14. COM transmitter 18. Locking screw access
selector selectors
3. MKR sensitivity 7. Copilot volume 15. Split COM selector 19. Photocell (automatic
indicator dimming)
4. MKR sensitivity 8. Pilot ICS squelch level (VOX) 16. NAV systems audio
selector selectors
9. Crew isolation mode
10. Pilot isolation mode
11. "Public Address" mode
12. "Speaker" mode

Figure 1: GMA 340 H audio panel

355 NP 9.21
15-18 Page 1
 COMPLEMENTARY FLIGHT MANUAL

2.2 OPERATING PROCEDURES

- Preflight check:
Check the following:
• GMA 340 unit .................ON (copilot volume control turned clockwise past the
click), pushbutton lights ON,
• ICS volume .....................SET for pilot, copilot and passengers,
• Radio channel .................SET upon request,
• Radio volume ..................SET by selected COM volume control.

NOTE

The RH inner knob (5) is used for two functions:

- IN position: pilot ICS volume setting,
- OUT position: passenger ICS volume setting.

• GMA 340 failure or ICS power supply failure:

- Turn off GMA 340 H (Turn copilot ICS volume control to full counter-
clockwise detent),
- Intercom function is lost,
- A failsafe circuit connects the RH pilot’s headset and microphone directly to
COM1.
- For the optional two pilots IFR version, a "NORM/EMER" ICS back-up
selector on LH pilot side allows ICS function with the RH pilot as well as
access to COM1 when selected to "EMER".
NOTE

In case of ICS failure:

- COM1 is the only radio-communication system available.
- For VFR or single pilot IFR versions, the RH pilot only has access to
COM1. Audio warnings are still available through the pilot headset only.
- For the two pilots IFR version, the LH pilot has to select the ICS back-up
selector to "EMER" to re-establish ICS and COM1 links. Audio warnings
are still available for the two pilots.

• Normal operating procedures:

The detailed operating procedures are described in the GMA 340 H Pilot’s
guide.

355 NP 9.21
15-18 Page 2